WO2016044994A1 - 波束配置方法、基站及用户设备 - Google Patents

波束配置方法、基站及用户设备 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2016044994A1
WO2016044994A1 PCT/CN2014/087193 CN2014087193W WO2016044994A1 WO 2016044994 A1 WO2016044994 A1 WO 2016044994A1 CN 2014087193 W CN2014087193 W CN 2014087193W WO 2016044994 A1 WO2016044994 A1 WO 2016044994A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
user equipment
information
base station
index information
initial beam
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2014/087193
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
张健
曾清海
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to CN201480035926.2A priority Critical patent/CN105830483B/zh
Priority to PCT/CN2014/087193 priority patent/WO2016044994A1/zh
Priority to EP14902628.8A priority patent/EP3200498B1/en
Priority to JP2017515797A priority patent/JP6406777B2/ja
Publication of WO2016044994A1 publication Critical patent/WO2016044994A1/zh
Priority to US15/466,546 priority patent/US10264568B2/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0686—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0695—Hybrid systems, i.e. switching and simultaneous transmission using beam selection
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/20—Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/23—Control channels or signalling for resource management in the downlink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards a terminal
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/08—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the receiving station
    • H04B7/0837—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the receiving station using pre-detection combining
    • H04B7/0842—Weighted combining
    • H04B7/086—Weighted combining using weights depending on external parameters, e.g. direction of arrival [DOA], predetermined weights or beamforming
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0048—Allocation of pilot signals, i.e. of signals known to the receiver
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04L—TRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00—Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003—Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • H04L5/0053—Allocation of signaling, i.e. of overhead other than pilot signals
    • H04L5/0057—Physical resource allocation for CQI
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W24/00—Supervisory, monitoring or testing arrangements
    • H04W24/10—Scheduling measurement reports ; Arrangements for measurement reports
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W52/00—Power management, e.g. TPC [Transmission Power Control], power saving or power classes
    • H04W52/04—TPC
    • H04W52/30—TPC using constraints in the total amount of available transmission power
    • H04W52/36—TPC using constraints in the total amount of available transmission power with a discrete range or set of values, e.g. step size, ramping or offsets
    • H04W52/365—Power headroom reporting
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W56/00—Synchronisation arrangements
    • H04W56/0005—Synchronisation arrangements synchronizing of arrival of multiple uplinks
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00—Wireless channel access
    • H04W74/08—Non-scheduled access, e.g. ALOHA
    • H04W74/0833—Random access procedures, e.g. with 4-step access
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/0413—MIMO systems
    • H04B7/0417—Feedback systems
    • H04B7/0421—Feedback systems utilizing implicit feedback, e.g. steered pilot signals
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04B—TRANSMISSION
    • H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
    • H04B7/02—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas
    • H04B7/04—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas
    • H04B7/06—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station
    • H04B7/0613—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission
    • H04B7/0615—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal
    • H04B7/0619—Diversity systems; Multi-antenna system, i.e. transmission or reception using multiple antennas using two or more spaced independent antennas at the transmitting station using simultaneous transmission of weighted versions of same signal using feedback from receiving side
    • H04B7/0621—Feedback content
    • H04B7/0632—Channel quality parameters, e.g. channel quality indicator [CQI]
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00—Local resource management
    • H04W72/04—Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/046—Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource the resource being in the space domain, e.g. beams

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the field of communications, and in particular, to a beam configuration method, a base station, and a user equipment.
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • LTE-A Long Term Evolution Advanced
  • the IEEE 802.11ad standard uses the 60 GHz band for Wireless Local Area Network (WLAN), which is generally used for short-distance indoor communication of about 10 meters.
  • WLAN Wireless Local Area Network
  • the 60 GHz band belongs to the millimeter wave band.
  • the millimeter wave band includes the spectrum from 3 GHz to 300 GHz.
  • the millimeter wave communication mainly studies the frequency band between 6 GHz and 100 GHz.
  • the embodiment of the present invention provides a beam configuration method, a base station, and a user equipment.
  • the technical solution is as follows:
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a base station, where the base station includes:
  • a sending module configured to send initial beam index information of an initial beam of a millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment to the user equipment;
  • a receiving module configured to receive a radio resource management RRM measurement report originating from the user equipment,
  • the RRM measurement report is obtained by performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information sent by the sending module by the user equipment;
  • a determining module configured to determine, according to the RRM measurement report received by the receiving module, the initial beam index information that is in communication with the user equipment.
  • the determining module is configured to determine, from the reference signal information corresponding to each initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report, that the reference signal information is greater than a first threshold, the first initial beam index information, where the reference The signal information includes at least one of a reference signal received power RSRP and a reference signal received quality RSRQ;
  • the sending module is further configured to send, by using the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information determined by the determining module, control information to the user equipment on a control channel, where the user equipment is used to perform a sleep state. After switching to the active state, the control information is monitored by the initial beam corresponding to the determined first initial beam index information.
  • the determining module is specifically configured to: at least one of the MME signaling and the medium access control layer control meta MAC CE, by the RRM measurement
  • the second initial beam index information is specified in each initial beam index information in the report, and the initial beam corresponding to the specified second initial beam index information is used to send the control information to the user equipment on the control channel.
  • the sending module is further configured to send, to the user equipment, candidate beam index information of an candidate beam of a millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment;
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive first candidate beam index information that is selected and sent by the user equipment from the candidate beam index information sent by the sending module, where the first candidate beam index information is After the reference signal information of the initial beam is smaller than the second threshold, and the RRM measurement is performed on the candidate beam indicated by each candidate beam index information, the determined reference signal information is greater than the third threshold candidate beam index information,
  • the reference signal information includes at least one of RSRP and RSRQ;
  • the base station further includes a communication module, configured to communicate with the user equipment according to the candidate beam corresponding to the first candidate beam index information received by the receiving module.
  • the receiving module is configured to receive a first random access request sent by the user equipment
  • the base station further includes a generating module, configured to generate an uplink time advance TA according to the first random access request;
  • the communication module is configured to communicate with the user equipment according to the received candidate beam corresponding to the first candidate beam index information and the uplink TA generated by the generating module.
  • the determining module is configured to determine, by using beam tracking, that the candidate beam to be allocated for the user equipment is used to communicate with the user equipment;
  • the sending module is further configured to send a random access instruction to the user equipment on a control channel;
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive a second random access request that is sent by the user equipment according to the random access command sent by the sending module;
  • the base station further includes a generating module, configured to generate an uplink TA according to the second random access request;
  • the communication module is further configured to communicate with the user equipment according to the candidate beam corresponding to the allocated second candidate beam index information and the uplink TA generated by the generating module.
  • the determining module is further configured to determine, in a beam that communicates with the user equipment, a beam with the same uplink TA as one packet, where the beam includes at least one of the initial beam and the candidate beam. ;
  • the generating module is further configured to generate, according to each group obtained by the determining module, a TA group, where the TA group includes a TA group identifier, beam index information of each beam in the packet, and each beam in the packet.
  • a TA group includes a TA group identifier, beam index information of each beam in the packet, and each beam in the packet.
  • TAT Corresponding cell identification and time adjustment timer
  • the sending module is further configured to send the TA group generated by the generating module to the user equipment.
  • the receiving module is further configured to: after determining, by using the RRM measurement report, the initial beam index information that is in communication with the user equipment, receive a power headroom report PHR derived from the user equipment, where The PHR includes a power headroom PH, where the PH is measured by measuring the RSRP of each initial beam, and is generated according to the minimum path loss information;
  • the base station further includes an allocating module, configured to allocate an uplink resource to the user equipment according to the PH received by the receiving module and an initial beam corresponding to the PH;
  • the communication module is specifically configured to communicate with the user equipment on a corresponding uplink resource allocated by the allocation module by using an initial beam corresponding to the PH.
  • the sending module is further configured to: before the receiving module receives the power headroom report PHR from the user equipment, send, to the user equipment, a first beam of a first beam in a range of a beam carrying a single initial beam a first indication of the index information, where the first indication is used to instruct the user equipment to measure the RSRP of the first beam.
  • the receiving module after the determining module determines the initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report, receiving a channel state indication CSI measurement report originating from the user equipment, where
  • the CSI measurement report includes CSI information, which is performed by performing CSI measurement on each initial beam to obtain a channel quality indicator CQI, which is generated according to the highest CQI;
  • the communication module is specifically configured to communicate with the user equipment according to the CSI information received by the receiving module and an initial beam corresponding to the CSI information.
  • the sending module is further configured to: before the receiving module receives a channel state indication CSI measurement report originating from the user equipment, send, to the user equipment, a second beam in a range of a beam carrying a single initial beam And a second indication of the beam index information, where the second indication is used to instruct the user equipment to perform CSI measurement on the second beam.
  • the base station further includes an adjustment module, after the determining module determines the initial beam index information that is in communication with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report, and adjusts a cell bandwidth according to the traffic volume of the at least one user equipment, where The cell bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume;
  • the sending module is further configured to broadcast the information of the adjusted cell bandwidth and the center frequency point information to each user equipment, or adjust the adjusted cell bandwidth information and the center frequency point by using RRC signaling.
  • the information is sent to each user equipment, and the central frequency point is a center frequency of a frequency range corresponding to the adjusted cell bandwidth or a specified frequency within the frequency range.
  • the twelfth possible aspect of the first aspect In an implementation manner, if the adjusted cell is composed of channels with the same bandwidth,
  • the sending module is further configured to send public information to each user equipment on a channel located at the central frequency point, or send public information to each user equipment on a center frequency of each channel.
  • the base station further includes an adjustment module, after the determining module determines the initial beam index information that is in communication with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report, and adjusts the user equipment according to the service volume of the user equipment.
  • User bandwidth the user bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic;
  • the sending module is further configured to send information about the adjusted user bandwidth of the adjustment module to the user equipment by using at least one of RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and a control channel.
  • the adjusting module is specifically configured to adjust to the user according to the service volume of the user equipment.
  • the channel allocated by the device obtains the bandwidth of the user.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a user equipment, where the user equipment includes:
  • a receiving module configured to receive initial beam index information sent by the base station, where the initial beam index information is used to indicate an initial beam of a millimeter wave band allocated by the base station to the user equipment;
  • a sending module configured to send a radio resource management RRM measurement report, where the RRM measurement report is obtained by performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information by the user equipment, where the RRM measurement report is used And determining, by the base station, the initial beam index information that is in communication with the user equipment.
  • the reference signal information includes a reference signal received power RSRP and a reference signal received quality.
  • the user equipment further includes:
  • a determining module after the sending, by the sending module, the radio resource management RRM measurement report, after the user equipment is switched from the dormant state to the active state, determining that the reference signal information is greater than the first threshold of the first initial beam index information;
  • the monitoring module is configured to monitor the control information on the control channel by using the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information determined by the determining module.
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive, by the base station, RRC signaling and media by using radio resources.
  • the access control layer controls at least one of the second MAC index information specified in each of the initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report;
  • the user equipment further includes a monitoring module, configured to monitor control information on the control channel by using an initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information received by the receiving module.
  • the monitoring module is configured to receive the control information in an omnidirectional manner, or receive the control information by using a beam range that is greater than or equal to an initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information, or The beam range of the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information receives the control information; or
  • the monitoring module is configured to receive the control information in an omnidirectional manner, or receive the control information by using a beam range that is greater than or equal to an initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information, or The beam range of the initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information receives the control information.
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive candidate beam index information sent by the base station, where the candidate beam index information is used to indicate an candidate beam of a millimeter wave band allocated by the base station to the user equipment;
  • the user equipment further includes:
  • a measuring module configured to perform RRM measurement on the candidate beam indicated by each candidate beam index information when the reference signal information of the initial beam is smaller than a second threshold, where the reference signal information includes at least one of RSRP and RSRQ Species
  • a determining module configured to determine, according to the RRM measurement performed by the measurement module, first candidate beam index information that is greater than a third threshold by reference signal information
  • the sending module is further configured to send the first candidate beam index information that is determined by the determining module to the base station, where the base station is configured to use, according to the first candidate beam index information
  • the selected beam communicates with the user equipment.
  • the sending module is further configured to automatically send a first random access request to the base station, where the first random access request is used to instruct the base station to generate an uplink time advance TA, and according to the allocated second standby Selecting an alternate beam corresponding to the beam index information and the uplink TA to communicate with the user equipment; or
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive, on a control channel, a random access command sent by the base station, where the random access command is that the base station uses beam tracking to determine the candidate to be used for the user equipment
  • the second random access request is sent to the base station according to the random access command, where the second random access request is used to instruct the base station to generate an uplink TA, and And communicating with the user equipment according to the received candidate beam corresponding to the first candidate beam index information and the uplink TA.
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive a TA group that is sent by the base station, where the TA group is a beam in which the base station communicates with the user equipment, and determines a beam with the same uplink TA as a packet, according to each Generated by the group, the TA group includes a TA group identifier, beam index information of each beam in the packet, a cell identifier corresponding to each beam in the packet, and a time adjustment timer TAT, where the beam includes the initial At least one of a beam and the candidate beam;
  • the measuring module is further configured to: when the TAT timeout in the TA group received by the receiving module, detect whether the cell identifier in the TA group corresponds to beam index information located in another TA group, and The TAT of the other TA group does not time out;
  • the user equipment further includes:
  • a maintenance module configured to determine, when the measurement module detects that the cell identifier in the TA group corresponds to beam index information in another TA group, and the TAT of the other TA group does not time out, determining the beam index
  • the cell corresponding to the information maintains a hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ buffer and a sounding reference signal SRS resource corresponding to the cell;
  • a release module configured to determine, when the measurement module detects that the cell identifier in the TA group corresponds to beam index information in another TA group and the TAT of the other TA group times out, determining the beam index information
  • the corresponding cell releases the HARQ buffer and the SRS resource corresponding to the cell.
  • the user equipment further includes:
  • a measurement module configured to: after the sending module sends the radio resource management RRM measurement report, measure the RSRP of the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information, to obtain path loss information of each initial beam;
  • a generating module configured to generate at least one power headroom PH according to the minimum path loss information measured by the measurement module, to obtain a power headroom report PHR;
  • the sending module is configured to send the PHR generated by the generating module, where the PHR is used to instruct the base station to allocate an uplink resource to the user equipment according to the PH and an initial beam corresponding to the PH. Communicating with the user equipment on the corresponding uplink resource by using an initial beam corresponding to the PH.
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive, by the base station, a first indication of first beam index information of a first beam in a range of a beam carrying a single initial beam;
  • the generating module is further configured to measure the RSRP of each first beam indicated by the first indication received by the receiving module, to obtain path loss information of each first beam.
  • the user equipment further includes:
  • a measurement module after the sending module sends a radio resource management RRM measurement report, performing channel state indication CSI measurement on the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information, to obtain a channel quality indicator CQI of each initial beam;
  • a generating module configured to generate at least one channel state indication CSI information according to the highest CQI measured by the measurement module, to obtain a CSI measurement report;
  • the sending module is configured to send the CSI measurement report generated by the generating module, where the CSI measurement report is used to indicate that the base station and the user according to the CSI information and an initial beam corresponding to the CSI information
  • the device communicates.
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive, by the base station, a second indication of second beam index information of a second beam in a range of a beam carrying a single initial beam;
  • the generating module is further configured to perform CSI measurement on each second beam indicated by the second indication received by the receiving module, to obtain CQI of each second beam.
  • the receiving module is configured to receive, by using a broadcast, information about the adjusted cell bandwidth and information of a center frequency point, or receive RRC signaling sent by the base station, where the RRC signaling carries an adjustment Information of the cell bandwidth and information of the center frequency point;
  • the adjusted cell bandwidth is The base station is adjusted according to the traffic volume of the at least one user equipment, and the cell bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume, where the central frequency point is a center frequency or a frequency range of the frequency range corresponding to the adjusted cell bandwidth. a specified frequency within the frequency range;
  • the receiving module is further configured to receive, by using at least one of RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and a control channel, information about the adjusted user bandwidth sent by the base station, where the adjusted user bandwidth is Determining the traffic volume of the user equipment, and the user bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume;
  • the user equipment further includes a monitoring module, configured to monitor a control channel of a channel that constitutes the user bandwidth received by the receiving module.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a base station, where the base station includes:
  • a transmitter configured to send initial beam index information of an initial beam of a millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment to the user equipment;
  • a receiver configured to receive a radio resource management RRM measurement report originating from the user equipment, where the RRM measurement report is the indication indicated by the user equipment to the initial beam index information sent by the transmitter The initial beam is obtained after RRM measurement;
  • a processor configured to determine, according to the RRM measurement report received by the receiver, the initial beam index information that is in communication with the user equipment.
  • the processor is specifically configured to determine, from the reference signal information corresponding to each initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report, the first initial beam index information that is greater than a first threshold, where the reference information is
  • the signal information includes at least one of a reference signal received power RSRP and a reference signal received quality RSRQ;
  • the transmitter configured to send, by using the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information determined by the processor, control information to the user equipment on a control channel, where the user equipment is used to switch from a sleep state. After the activation state, the control information is monitored by the initial beam corresponding to the determined first initial beam index information.
  • the transmitter is further configured to use wireless resources At least one of source control RRC signaling and medium access control layer control meta MAC CE, specifying second initial beam index information from each initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report, the specified second initial The initial beam corresponding to the beam index information is used to send the control information to the user equipment on a control channel.
  • the transmitter is further configured to send, to the user equipment, candidate beam index information of an candidate beam of a millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment;
  • the receiver is further configured to receive first candidate beam index information that is selected and sent by the user equipment from each candidate beam index information sent by the transmitter, where the first candidate beam index information is After the reference signal information of the initial beam is smaller than the second threshold, and the RRM measurement is performed on the candidate beam indicated by each candidate beam index information, the determined reference signal information is greater than the third threshold candidate beam index information,
  • the reference signal information includes at least one of RSRP and RSRQ;
  • the processor is further configured to communicate with the user equipment according to the candidate beam corresponding to the first candidate beam index information received by the receiver.
  • the transmitter is further configured to receive a first random access request sent by the user equipment,
  • the processor is configured to generate an uplink time advance TA according to the first random access request, and the candidate beam corresponding to the received first candidate beam index information, and the uplink TA and the User equipment communicates.
  • the processor is further configured to determine, by using beam tracking, that the candidate beam to be allocated for the user equipment is used to communicate with the user equipment;
  • the transmitter is further configured to send a random access instruction to the user equipment on a control channel;
  • the receiver is further configured to receive a second random access request that is sent by the user equipment according to the random access command sent by the transmitter;
  • the processor is specifically configured to generate an uplink TA according to the second random access request received by the receiver; an candidate beam corresponding to the allocated second candidate beam index information, and the uplink TA and The user equipment communicates.
  • the processor is further configured to determine, in a beam that communicates with the user equipment, a beam with the same uplink TA as a packet, where the beam includes at least one of the initial beam and the candidate beam. Generating a TA group according to each group, the TA group including a TA group identifier, beam index information of each beam in the packet, a cell identifier corresponding to each beam in the packet, and a time adjustment timer TAT;
  • the transmitter is further configured to send the TA group generated by the processor to the user equipment.
  • the receiver after the determining, by the processor, the initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report, receiving a power headroom report PHR derived from the user equipment,
  • the PHR includes a power headroom PH, where the PH is measured by measuring the RSRP of each initial beam, and is generated according to the minimum path loss information;
  • the processor is configured to allocate an uplink resource to the user equipment according to the PH received by the receiver and an initial beam corresponding to the PH, and the corresponding uplink resource corresponding to the PH by using an initial beam corresponding to the PH Communicate with the user equipment.
  • the transmitter is further configured to receive, by the receiver, a power headroom derived from the user equipment Before the PHR is reported, a first indication of the first beam index information of the first beam in the range of the beam carrying the single initial beam is sent to the user equipment, where the first indication is used to indicate the user equipment to the The RSRP of a beam is measured.
  • the receiver after the determining, by the processor, the initial beam index information that is in communication with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report, receiving a channel state indication CSI measurement report originating from the user equipment, where
  • the CSI measurement report includes CSI information, which is performed by performing CSI measurement on each initial beam to obtain a channel quality indicator CQI, which is generated according to the highest CQI;
  • the processor is configured to communicate with the user equipment according to the CSI information received by the receiver and an initial beam corresponding to the CSI information.
  • the transmitter is further configured to receive, by the receiver, a channel status indication that is derived from the user equipment Sending a beam range carrying a single initial beam to the user equipment before the CSI measurement report a second indication of the second beam index information of the second beam, the second indication is used to indicate that the user equipment performs CSI measurement on the second beam.
  • the processor is further configured to: after determining the initial beam index information that is in communication with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report, adjust a cell bandwidth according to traffic volume of the at least one user equipment, where the cell bandwidth is The business volume is positively correlated;
  • the transmitter is further configured to broadcast the adjusted cell bandwidth information and the center frequency information of the processor to each user equipment, or adjust the adjusted cell bandwidth information and the center frequency point by using RRC signaling.
  • the information is sent to each user equipment, and the central frequency point is a center frequency of a frequency range corresponding to the adjusted cell bandwidth or a specified frequency within the frequency range.
  • the transmitter further And transmitting common information to each user equipment on a channel located at the central frequency point, or transmitting public information to each user equipment on a center frequency of each channel.
  • the processor is further configured to: after determining, according to the RRM measurement report, the initial beam index information that is in communication with the user equipment, adjust a user bandwidth of the user equipment according to the service volume of the user equipment, User bandwidth is positively correlated with the amount of traffic;
  • the transmitter is further configured to send information about the adjusted user bandwidth of the processor to the user equipment by using at least one of RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and a control channel.
  • the processor is specifically configured to adjust to the user according to the service volume of the user equipment.
  • the channel allocated by the device obtains the bandwidth of the user.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a user equipment, where the user equipment includes:
  • a receiver configured to receive initial beam index information sent by the base station, where the initial beam index information is used to indicate an initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated by the base station to the user equipment user equipment;
  • a transmitter configured to send a radio resource management RRM measurement report, where the RRM measurement report is obtained by performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information by the user equipment, where the RRM measurement report is used And instructing the base station to determine the initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment.
  • the RRM measurement report includes each Reference signal information corresponding to the initial beam index information, the reference signal information including at least one of a reference signal received power RSRP and a reference signal received quality RSRQ,
  • the user equipment further includes a processor, after the transmitter sends the radio resource management RRM measurement report, after the user equipment switches from the sleep state to the active state, determining that the reference signal information is greater than the first threshold.
  • An initial beam index information after the transmitter sends the radio resource management RRM measurement report, after the user equipment switches from the sleep state to the active state, determining that the reference signal information is greater than the first threshold.
  • the receiver is further configured to monitor control information on the control channel by using an initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information determined by the processor.
  • the receiver is further configured to receive, by the base station, at least one of a radio resource control RRC signaling and a medium access control layer control meta MAC CE
  • the second initial beam index information specified in each initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report; the initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information is used to monitor the control information on the control channel.
  • the receiver is configured to receive the control information in an omnidirectional manner, or receive the control information by using a beam range that is greater than or equal to an initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information, or The beam range of the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information receives the control information; or
  • the receiver is configured to receive the control information in an omnidirectional manner, or receive the control information by using a beam range that is greater than or equal to an initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information, or The beam range of the initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information receives the control information.
  • the receiver is further configured to receive candidate beam index information sent by the base station, where the candidate beam index information is used to indicate an candidate beam of a millimeter wave band allocated by the base station to the user equipment;
  • the user equipment further includes a processor, configured to perform RRM measurement on the candidate beam indicated by each candidate beam index information received by the receiver when the reference signal information of the initial beam is less than a second threshold,
  • the reference signal information includes at least one of RSRP and RSRQ; determining, according to the RRM measurement, first candidate beam index information that the reference signal information is greater than a third threshold;
  • the transmitter is further configured to send the first candidate beam index information determined by the processor to the base station, where the base station is configured to select and match according to the first candidate beam index information.
  • Beam The user equipment communicates.
  • the transmitter is further configured to automatically send a first random access request to the base station,
  • the first random access request is used to indicate that the base station generates an uplink time advance TA, and communicates with the user equipment according to the candidate beam corresponding to the allocated second candidate beam index information and the uplink TA, or Receiving, on a control channel, a random access command sent by the base station, where the random access command is that the base station determines, by using beam tracking, that the candidate beam to be allocated for the user equipment is used to communicate with the user equipment.
  • the second random access request is used to instruct the base station to generate an uplink TA, and according to the received first
  • the candidate beam corresponding to the candidate beam index information and the uplink TA communicate with the user equipment.
  • the receiver is further configured to receive a TA group sent by the base station, where the TA group is a beam in which the base station communicates with the user equipment, and determines a beam with the same uplink TA as one packet, according to each Generated by the group, the TA group includes a TA group identifier, beam index information of each beam in the packet, a cell identifier corresponding to each beam in the packet, and a time adjustment timer TAT, where the beam includes the initial At least one of a beam and the candidate beam;
  • the processor is further configured to: when the TAT timeout in the TA group received by the receiver, detect whether the cell identifier in the TA group corresponds to beam index information located in another TA group, and The TAT of the other TA group does not time out; determining the beam when it is detected that the cell identifier in the TA group corresponds to beam index information located in another TA group and the TAT of the other TA group does not time out.
  • the cell corresponding to the index information, the hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ buffer and the sounding reference signal SRS resource corresponding to the cell are maintained; and the cell identifier in the TA group is detected to be located in another TA group.
  • the beam index information and the TAT of the other TA group are timed out, the cell corresponding to the beam index information is determined, and the HARQ buffer and the SRS resource corresponding to the cell are released.
  • the user equipment further includes a processor, configured to send, by the transmitter, a radio resource management RRM test After the quantity report, the RSRP of the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information is measured to obtain path loss information of each initial beam; and at least one power headroom PH is generated according to the minimum path loss information to obtain a power headroom report PHR;
  • the transmitter is further configured to send the PHR generated by the processor, where the PHR is used to indicate that the base station allocates uplink resources to the user equipment according to the PH and an initial beam corresponding to the PH, Communicating with the user equipment on a corresponding uplink resource by using a beam corresponding to the PH.
  • the receiver is further configured to receive, by the base station, a first indication of first beam index information of a first beam in a range of a beam carrying a single initial beam;
  • the processor is further configured to measure, according to the RSRP of each first beam indicated by the first indication received by the receiver, to obtain path loss information of each first beam.
  • the user equipment further includes a processor, after the transmitter sends the radio resource management RRM measurement report, performs channel state indication CSI measurement on the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information, and obtains a channel quality indicator of each initial beam. CQI; generating at least one channel state indication CSI information according to the highest CQI, and obtaining a CSI measurement report;
  • the transmitter is further configured to send the CSI measurement report generated by the processor, where the CSI measurement report is used to indicate, according to the CSI information, an initial beam corresponding to the CSI information, and the User equipment communicates.
  • the receiver is further configured to receive, by the base station, a second indication of second beam index information of a second beam in a range of a beam carrying a single initial beam;
  • the processor is further configured to perform CSI measurement on each second beam indicated by the second indication received by the receiver, to obtain CQI of each second beam.
  • the receiver is further configured to receive, by using a broadcast, information about the adjusted cell bandwidth sent by the base station, and information about a center frequency point, or receive the RRC signaling sent by the base station, where the RRC signaling carries information of the adjusted cell bandwidth and information of a central frequency point;
  • the adjusted cell bandwidth is determined by the base station according to at least one user equipment
  • the traffic is adjusted, and the cell bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume, where the center frequency is the center frequency of the frequency range corresponding to the adjusted cell bandwidth or a specified frequency within the frequency range;
  • the adjusted cell is composed of channels with the same bandwidth, and receives public information sent by the base station on a channel located at the center frequency point, or receives a transmission sent by the base station on a center frequency of each channel. Public information.
  • the receiver is further configured to receive, by using at least one of RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and a control channel, information about the adjusted user bandwidth sent by the base station, where the adjusted user bandwidth is The traffic of the user equipment is adjusted, and the user bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic; and the control channel of the channel that constitutes the user bandwidth is monitored.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a beam configuration method, where the method includes:
  • the base station sends initial beam index information of the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment to the user equipment;
  • Radio resource management RRM measurement report that is obtained by the user equipment, where the RRM measurement report is obtained by performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information by the user equipment;
  • the base station determines the initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report.
  • the determining, by the base station, the initial beam index information that is in communication with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report includes:
  • the base station Determining, by the base station, the first initial beam index information that is greater than the first threshold by using the reference signal information corresponding to each initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report, where the reference signal information includes a reference signal At least one of a received power RSRP and a reference signal received quality RSRQ;
  • the base station sends control information to the user equipment on the control channel by using the determined initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information, where the user equipment is configured to switch from the sleep state to the active state, and then determine The initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information is used to monitor the control information.
  • the method further includes:
  • the base station by using at least one of radio resource control RRC signaling and media access control layer control meta MAC CE, specifies a second initial from each beam index information in the RRM measurement report
  • the beam index information, the initial beam corresponding to the specified second initial beam index information is used to send the control information to the user equipment on a control channel.
  • the method further includes:
  • first candidate beam index information that is selected and sent by the user equipment from each candidate beam index information, where the first candidate beam index information is that the reference signal information of the initial beam is smaller than a second threshold.
  • the determined reference signal information is greater than a third threshold of at least one candidate beam index information, where the reference signal information includes RSRP and RSRQ At least one
  • the base station communicates with the user equipment according to the received candidate beam corresponding to the first candidate beam index information.
  • the base station is configured according to the candidate beam corresponding to the received candidate beam index information User equipment communicates, including:
  • the base station communicates with the user equipment according to the received candidate beam corresponding to the first candidate beam index information and the uplink TA.
  • the method further includes:
  • the base station determines, by using beam tracking, that the candidate beam to be allocated for the user equipment is to communicate with the user equipment;
  • the base station receives a second random access request sent by the user equipment according to the random access command, and generates an uplink TA according to the second random access request;
  • the base station communicates with the user equipment according to the candidate beam corresponding to the allocated second candidate beam index information and the uplink TA.
  • the method further includes:
  • the base station determines a beam having the same uplink TA as one packet, the beam including at least one of the initial beam and the candidate beam;
  • the base station generates a TA group according to each packet, where the TA group includes a TA group identifier, beam index information of each beam in the packet, a cell identifier corresponding to each beam in the packet, and a time adjustment timer TAT;
  • the base station sends the generated TA group to the user equipment.
  • the base station after the determining, by the base station, the initial beam index information that is in communication with the user equipment, the base station further includes:
  • the base station receives a power headroom report PHR from the user equipment, where the PHR includes a power headroom PH, and the PH is to measure the RSRP of each initial beam to obtain path loss information according to the minimum path loss information. Generated;
  • the base station allocates an uplink resource to the user equipment according to the PH and an initial beam corresponding to the PH;
  • the base station communicates with the user equipment on a corresponding uplink resource by using an initial beam corresponding to the PH.
  • the method before the receiving, by the base station, the power headroom report PHR from the user equipment, the method further includes:
  • the base station after the determining, by the base station, the initial beam index information that is in communication with the user equipment, the base station further includes:
  • the base station receives a channel state indication CSI measurement report from the user equipment, where the CSI measurement report includes CSI information, where the CSI information is obtained by performing CSI measurement on each initial beam, and the channel quality indicator CQI is obtained according to the highest CQI. Generated;
  • the base station communicates with the user equipment according to the CSI information and an initial beam corresponding to the CSI information.
  • the method before the receiving, by the base station, the channel state indication CSI measurement report that is derived from the user equipment, the method further includes:
  • the beam performs CSI measurements.
  • the method further includes:
  • the base station adjusts a cell bandwidth according to the traffic volume of the at least one user equipment, where the cell bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume;
  • the base station broadcasts the information of the adjusted cell bandwidth and the information of the central frequency point to each user equipment, or sends the information of the adjusted cell bandwidth and the information of the central frequency point to each user equipment through RRC signaling.
  • the center frequency point is a center frequency of a frequency range corresponding to the adjusted cell bandwidth or a specified frequency within the frequency range.
  • the method further includes :
  • the base station transmits public information to each user equipment on a channel located at the center frequency point, or transmits public information to each user equipment on a center frequency of each channel.
  • the method further includes:
  • the base station adjusts a user bandwidth of the user equipment according to the service volume of the user equipment, where the user bandwidth is positively correlated with the service volume;
  • the base station sends the adjusted user bandwidth information to the user equipment by using at least one of RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and a control channel.
  • the base station adjusts user bandwidth of the user equipment according to the service volume of the user equipment, including :
  • the base station adjusts a channel allocated to the user equipment according to the service volume of the user equipment, to obtain the user bandwidth.
  • an embodiment of the present invention provides a beam configuration method, where the method includes:
  • the user equipment receives the initial beam index information sent by the base station, where the initial beam index information is used to indicate an initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated by the base station to the user equipment user equipment;
  • the user equipment sends a radio resource management RRM measurement report, where the RRM measurement report is The RRM measurement report is used by the user equipment to perform the RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information, where the RRM measurement report is used to indicate that the base station determines the initial beam index that is in communication with the user equipment. information.
  • the method further includes:
  • the user equipment After the user equipment is switched from the dormant state to the activated state, the user equipment determines that the reference signal information is greater than a first threshold of first initial beam index information;
  • the user equipment listens to control information on the control channel by using an initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information.
  • the method further includes:
  • the user equipment listens to control information on the control channel by using an initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information.
  • the user equipment is configured to monitor the control information on the control channel by using the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information, where the user equipment receives the control information in an omnidirectional manner, or is greater than or equal to the first Receiving, by the beam range of the initial beam corresponding to the initial beam index information, the control information, or receiving the control information by a beam range smaller than an initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information;
  • the user equipment is configured to monitor the control information on the control channel by using the initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information, where the user equipment receives the control information in an omnidirectional manner, or is greater than or equal to the first
  • the beam range of the initial beam corresponding to the initial beam index information receives the control information, or receives the control information with a beam range smaller than an initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information.
  • the method further includes:
  • candidate beam index information sent by the base station where the candidate beam index is The information is used to indicate an candidate beam of the millimeter wave band allocated by the base station to the user equipment;
  • the user equipment performs RRM measurement on the candidate beam indicated by each candidate beam index information, where the reference signal information includes at least one of RSRP and RSRQ ;
  • the method further includes:
  • the user equipment automatically sends a first random access request to the base station, where the first random access request is used to instruct the base station to generate an uplink time advance TA, and corresponding to the allocated second candidate beam index information.
  • An alternate beam and the uplink TA are in communication with the user equipment; or
  • a TA group sent by the base station, where the TA group is a beam in which the base station communicates with the user equipment, determining a beam with the same uplink TA as one packet, and generating according to each group
  • the TA group includes a TA group identifier, beam index information of each beam in the packet, a cell identifier corresponding to each beam in the packet, and a time adjustment timer TAT, where the beam includes the initial beam and the At least one of the alternative beams;
  • the user equipment detects whether the cell identifier in the TA group corresponds to beam index information located in another TA group and the TAT of the other TA group Not timed out;
  • the user equipment determines the cell corresponding to the beam index information. Maintaining a hybrid automatic repeat request HARQ buffer and a sounding reference signal SRS resource corresponding to the cell;
  • the user equipment determines a cell corresponding to the beam index information, Release the HARQ buffer and SRS resources corresponding to the cell.
  • the method further includes:
  • the user equipment measures the RSRP of the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information, and obtains path loss information of each initial beam.
  • the user equipment generates a power headroom PH according to the minimum path loss information, and obtains a power headroom report PHR;
  • the user equipment sends the PHR, where the PHR is used to instruct the base station to allocate an uplink resource to the user equipment according to the PH and an initial beam corresponding to the PH, by using an initial beam corresponding to the PH. Communicating with the user equipment on the corresponding uplink resource.
  • the user equipment measures an RSRP of an initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information, to obtain each beam.
  • Road loss information including:
  • the user equipment measures the RSRP of each first beam indicated by the first indication to obtain path loss information of each first beam.
  • the method further includes:
  • the user equipment performs channel state indication CSI measurement on the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information, and obtains a channel quality indicator CQI of each initial beam;
  • the user equipment sends the CSI measurement report, where the CSI measurement report is used to indicate the base
  • the station communicates with the user equipment according to the CSI information and an initial beam corresponding to the CSI information.
  • the user equipment performs channel state indication CSI measurement on an initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information, to obtain The channel quality of each initial beam indicates CQI, including:
  • the user equipment performs CSI measurement on each second beam indicated by the second indication to obtain CQI of each second beam.
  • the method further includes:
  • the adjusted cell bandwidth is adjusted by the base station according to the traffic volume of the at least one user equipment, and the cell bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume, the central frequency a point is a center frequency of a frequency range corresponding to the adjusted cell bandwidth or a specified frequency within the frequency range;
  • the user equipment receives the public information sent by the base station on a channel located at the center frequency point, or receives the center frequency on each channel.
  • the sending public information sent by the base station is not limited to, but not limited to, but not limited to, but not limited to, but not limited to, but not limited to, but not limited to, but not limited to, but not limited to, but not limited to, but not limited to, but not limited to, but not limited to, but not limited to the base station.
  • the method further includes:
  • the user equipment monitors a control channel of a channel that constitutes the user bandwidth.
  • the letter beamforming technology solves the problem that the transmission distance of the existing millimeter wave band is short, and the data communication requirement of the user equipment in the cellular communication environment cannot be met, and the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band is extended.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a beam configuration system according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a structural block diagram of a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a structural structural diagram of a base station according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a structural structural diagram of a user equipment according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 5 is a structural structural diagram of a user equipment according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 6 is a structural structural diagram of a base station according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a structural structural diagram of a user equipment according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 8 is a structural structural diagram of a user equipment according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a method for configuring a beam according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a method of a beam configuration method according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the embodiment of the invention relates to a beam configuration method, which uses the existing LTE-A carrier aggregation as a background to aggregate the lower frequency carrier and the millimeter wave frequency carrier of the LTE-A technology to provide users with greater bandwidth and Higher capacity.
  • the lower frequency band carrier is used as the primary carrier PCell
  • the millimeter wave frequency band carrier is used as the secondary carrier SCell as an example, and is also applicable to the case where the millimeter wave frequency band carrier is used as the primary carrier.
  • the beamforming techniques involved in various embodiments of the present invention may refer to either a horizontal plane beam or a vertical plane beam.
  • PCell and SCell can be co-site or non-co-site, SCell is located in the coverage of PCell There are overlapping areas within the perimeter or PCell and SCell coverage.
  • the LTE-A base station of the PCell and one or more millimeter-wave small base stations or remote radio heads (English, Remote Radio Head; RRH) providing one or more SCells are provided.
  • the wireless backhaul can use microwave or millimeter wave.
  • the frequency band of the millimeter wave used by the wireless backhaul can be the same as or different from the frequency band where the SCell is located.
  • FIG. 1 includes an LTE evolved base station (English: evolved Node B; eNB for short), and three millimeter wave cellular communication evolved base stations (English: millimeter wave eNB) eNB1 eNB2, eNB3, and one user equipment (English: User Equipment; UE): eNBs 1-3 provide millimeter-wave band coverage.
  • eNB1 to eNB3 may be one eNB or multiple eNBs, which may not be co-sited or co-sited with the LTE eNB.
  • the eNB1 to the eNB3 may also be remote radio units RRH that have a backhaul connection with the LTE eNB.
  • FIG. 2 is a structural diagram of a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the base station may be the LTE eNB, the millimeter wave eNB1, the eNB2, and the eNB3 shown in FIG. 1.
  • the LTE eNB and one of the millimeter wave eNBs, such as the eNB1, are described as an example in the embodiments of the present invention; Both refer to millimeter wave eNB.
  • the base station may include a transmitting module 201, a receiving module 202, and a determining module 203.
  • the sending module 201 is configured to send initial beam index information of the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is used to indicate an initial beam used by the base station to send downlink information to the user equipment, and is pre-configured by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is associated with antenna weights or codebook information used by the base station to transmit downlink information to determine information such as the direction and width of the initial beam.
  • the direction of the initial beam refers to the angle information of the initial beam with respect to the horizontal direction and/or the vertical direction.
  • the initial beam index information is also associated with the feature information of the initial beam, and the base station transmits the initial beam-specific feature information on different initial beams, so that the user equipment identifies different initial beams according to different feature information.
  • the base station uses different reference signal sequences in different initial beams or broadcasts initial beam index information of the initial beam in different initial beams, and the user equipment can uniquely determine a specific initial beam according to the initial beam index information and the characteristic information of the initial beam.
  • the initial beam index information may also be used as a virtual cell identifier, that is, the same cell is further divided into different sectors or sub-sectors according to a plurality of wider initial beams.
  • the functions and usage methods of the initial beam index information in the following embodiments of the present invention are the same as those in the present embodiment, and are not described herein again.
  • the LTE eNB and the millimeter wave eNB can configure initial beam index information measured by Radio Resource Management (RRM) for the user equipment.
  • RRM Radio Resource Management
  • the millimeter wave eNB sends the configuration of the initial beam index information to the LTE eNB, and the LTE eNB sends the configuration to the user equipment.
  • the method for configuring the initial beam index information in the following embodiments of the present invention is the same as the description of the embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • the RRM measurement may refer to a measurement for mobility management in a normal sense, and is a filtered measurement method through a radio resource control (English: Radio Resource Control; RRC) layer.
  • RRC Radio Resource Control
  • F n is the latest measurement results of the filter, for evaluating the measurement report triggering criteria
  • F n-1 is the measurement result of the previous calculation of the filter
  • M n is the latest measurement results of the physical layer
  • a is based on different The coefficient determined by the demand is measured.
  • RRM measurement requirements for beam update may be more stringent than in existing LTE systems, for example, every tens of milliseconds to evaluate Whether the criteria for measurement reporting are met.
  • RRM measurement can also refer to measurements made by means of beam training.
  • the base station and the user equipment respectively transmit and receive multiple beams in the cell range to find the best matching beam pair, and when such a pair of transmitting beams and receiving beams are communicated, the receiving efficiency is the highest and the transmitted data is the most reliable.
  • Measurements in this case can be filtered through the RRC layer but the measurement requirements are more stringent, or the RRC layer filtering is not required, but the current measurement results are used directly. For example, a smaller transmission power can be achieved between the base station and the user equipment to achieve a better transmission effect.
  • the meanings of the RRM measurement in the following embodiments of the present invention are the same as those of the present embodiment, and will not be described below.
  • the UE may further determine an initial beam allocated by the base station according to the initial beam index information, and perform RRM measurement on the initial beam allocated by the base station. Generate an RRM measurement report based on the measurement results.
  • the receiving module 202 is configured to receive an RRM measurement report that is obtained by the user equipment, and the RRM measurement report is obtained by performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information sent by the sending module 201 by the user equipment.
  • the millimeter wave eNB may directly receive the RRM measurement report; when the user equipment sends the RRM measurement report to the LTE eNB, the LTE eNB receives the received RRM measurement report and beam index information. Forward to the millimeter wave eNB.
  • the method for receiving the RRM measurement report by the millimeter wave eNB in the following embodiments of the present invention is the same as that of the embodiment, and will not be described below.
  • the determining module 203 is configured to determine initial beam index information for communicating with the UE according to the RRM measurement report received by the receiving module 202.
  • the base station determines the signal quality of the initial beam according to the RRM measurement report, and then selects the initial beam with good signal quality to communicate with the UE, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the millimeter wave band, which cannot meet the user equipment in the cellular communication environment.
  • the problem of data communication requirements can extend the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • the base station provided by the embodiment of the present invention sends the initial beam index information of the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment to the user equipment; and receives the RRM measurement report originating from the user equipment, the RRM measurement report. It is obtained by the user equipment performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information; determining initial beam index information for communicating with the UE according to the RRM measurement report, and determining the signal quality of the initial beam according to the RRM measurement report, and then selecting the signal.
  • the better quality initial beam communicates with the user equipment, and the beamforming technology solves the problem that the existing millimeter wave band has a short transmission distance and cannot meet the data communication requirement of the user equipment in the cellular communication environment, and the extended millimeter wave is achieved. The effect of the transmission distance of the frequency band.
  • FIG. 3 is a structural diagram of a base station according to still another embodiment of the present invention.
  • the base station may include the base station shown in FIG. 1; the base station may include a sending module 301, a receiving module 302, and a determining module 303.
  • the sending module 301 is configured to send initial beam index information of the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is used to indicate a beam used by the base station to send downlink information to the user equipment, and is configured by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is associated with antenna weights or codebook information used by the base station to transmit downlink information to determine information such as the direction and width of the initial beam.
  • the direction of the initial beam refers to the angle information of the initial beam with respect to the horizontal direction and/or the vertical direction.
  • the beam direction of an initial beam is a direction of 30°-60° with respect to the horizontal direction, or, relative to the vertical direction. 20°-40° direction, etc.
  • the initial beam index information is also associated with the feature information of the initial beam, and the base station transmits the initial beam-specific feature information on different initial beams, so that the user equipment identifies different initial beams according to different feature information, as shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the description in the embodiment is not described here.
  • the base station may configure at least one initial beam for the user equipment, and send initial beam index information of each initial beam in the at least one initial beam to the user equipment, so that the user sets It is clear on which initial beam the downlink information sent by the base station is received.
  • the RRM measurement may refer to a measurement for mobility management in a normal sense, a measurement method filtered by the RRC layer, or a measurement performed by means of beam training, as shown in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 . The description is not repeated here.
  • the receiving module 302 is configured to receive an RRM measurement report that is obtained by the user equipment, and the RRM measurement report is obtained by performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information sent by the sending module 301 by the user equipment.
  • the determining module 303 is configured to determine initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report received by the receiving module 302.
  • the base station determines the signal quality of the beam according to the RRM measurement report, and then selects the beam with better signal quality to communicate with the user equipment, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the existing millimeter wave band, and cannot satisfy the user in the cellular communication environment.
  • the problem of data communication requirements of the device has reached the effect of extending the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • the beam configuration method is described in detail in the following different application scenarios, as follows:
  • the first application scenario is described by using a base station in a scenario of discontinuous reception as an example:
  • the user equipment has a dormant state and an activated state, and the user equipment in the active state needs to receive the control information transmitted by the base station through the beamforming technology on the control channel, and the control information includes resource allocation control.
  • the resource allocation control instruction is used to indicate an uplink/downlink resource allocated by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the control channel includes at least one of a physical downlink control channel (English: Physical Downlink Control Channel; PDCCH) and an enhanced physical downlink control channel (English: Enhanced Physical Downlink Control Channel; EPDCCH).
  • This embodiment provides two methods for determining the beam of the control channel to be monitored. The following two methods are specifically described:
  • the determining module 303 is specifically configured to: determine, by using the reference signal information corresponding to each initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report, the first initial beam index information that is greater than the first threshold, where the reference signal is
  • the information includes reference signal receiving power (English: Reference Signal Receiving Power; referred to as: RSRP) and reference signal receiving quality (English: Reference) At least one of Signal Receiving Quality; referred to as: RSRQ);
  • the sending module 301 is further configured to send, by using the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information determined by the determining module 302, control information to the user equipment on the control channel, where the user equipment is used to switch from the sleep state to the active state, The initial beam monitoring control information corresponding to the determined first initial beam index information.
  • the base station can agree with the user equipment to use the initial beam with better signal quality in the RRM measurement report. Specifically, the base station reads the reference signal information from the RRM measurement report, and determines an initial beam indicated by the first initial beam index information whose reference signal information is greater than the first threshold as a beam that needs to transmit control information on the control channel.
  • the reference signal information includes at least one of RSRP and RSRQ.
  • the first threshold may be an RSRP threshold; when the reference signal information is RSRQ, the first threshold may be an RSRQ threshold; when the reference signal information is RSRP and RSRQ, the first threshold may include an RSRP threshold and RSRQ threshold.
  • the base station may select at least one RSRP that is greater than the RSRP threshold from the RRM measurement report, and determine at least one initial beam index information corresponding to the at least one RSRP, and determine, according to the at least one initial beam index information. At least one initial beam.
  • the base station may select at least one RSRP greater than the RSRP threshold and at least one RSRQ greater than the RSRQ threshold from the RRM measurement report, and determine that the at least one RSRP and the at least one RSRQ belong to the same
  • the RSRP and the RSRQ of an initial beam determine corresponding at least one initial beam index information, and determine at least one initial beam according to the at least one initial beam index information.
  • the second method is further configured to perform at least one of RRC signaling and media access control (English: Media Access Control; MAC) control element (English: Control Element; abbreviated as: CE)
  • RRC signaling and media access control English: Media Access Control; MAC
  • control element English: Control Element; abbreviated as: CE
  • the second initial beam index information is specified in each initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report, and the initial beam corresponding to the specified second initial beam index information is used to send control information to the user equipment on the control channel.
  • the base station may specify an initial beam for transmitting resource allocation control signaling on the control channel from the allocated initial beam, and then pass the second initial beam index information of the specified initial beam through the RRC. Signaling or MAC CE is sent to the user equipment.
  • the beam index information can also be jointly determined by the first method and the second method described above.
  • the base station first specifies the second initial beam index information by using at least one of RRC signaling and the MAC CE, and after a certain period of time interval, the base station further uses the reference signal information according to the reference signal information.
  • the first initial beam index information is selected in the RRM measurement report; or the base station first selects the first initial beam index information from the RRM measurement report according to the reference signal information, and after passing the RRC signaling and the MAC CE, after a certain period of time interval At least one of the second initial beam index information is specified.
  • the beam index information may be determined by other methods, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the first initial beam index information whose reference signal information is greater than the first threshold is determined from the reference signal information corresponding to each initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report, and the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information is controlled.
  • the control information is sent to the user equipment on the channel, and the initial information of the signal quality in the RRM measurement report can be used to transmit the control information, thereby improving communication efficiency.
  • the second application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is used in Time Advance (TA):
  • TA Time Advance
  • the base station can configure the candidate beam for the user equipment in advance to improve the communication quality by avoiding the obstacle. Therefore, the sending module 301 is further configured to send the candidate beam index information of the candidate beam of the millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment to the user equipment;
  • the receiving module 302 is further configured to receive first candidate beam index information selected and sent by the user equipment from the candidate beam index information sent by the sending module 301, where the first candidate beam index information is that the reference signal information of the initial beam is smaller than a second threshold value, and after performing RRM measurement on the candidate beam indicated by each candidate beam index information, the determined reference signal information is greater than the third threshold candidate beam index information, and the reference signal information includes at least one of RSRP and RSRQ One type;
  • the base station further includes a communication module 304, configured to communicate with the user equipment according to the candidate beam corresponding to the first candidate beam index information received by the receiving module 302.
  • the base station may separately send the candidate beam index information to the user equipment, or may send the candidate beam index information and the initial beam index information together to the user equipment when the initial beam index information is sent to the user equipment, to save transmission overhead.
  • the method for transmitting the candidate beam index information in the following embodiments is the same as the method for sending the candidate beam index information in this embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • the user equipment When the user equipment communicates with the base station by using the initial beam allocated by the base station, the user equipment may periodically or periodically measure the reference signal information of the initial beam. When the user equipment measures that the reference signal information is less than the second threshold, the user equipment determines the initial. The quality of the beam is poor. In this case, the pre-stored candidate beam index information can be read, and the candidate beam indicated by each candidate beam index information is used to communicate with the base station. letter.
  • the reference signal information includes at least one of RSRP and RSRQ.
  • the second threshold is an RSRP threshold; when the reference signal information is RSRQ, the reference signal information is an RSRQ threshold; when the reference signal information includes RSRP and RSRQ, the second threshold includes an RSRP threshold and an RSRQ threshold.
  • the user equipment Before the at least one candidate beam is used to communicate with the base station, the user equipment further needs to perform RRM measurement on the at least one candidate beam, and selects reference signal information that is greater than the third threshold from the obtained reference signal information of each candidate beam, thereby Corresponding candidate beams are determined according to the filtered reference signal information.
  • the RRM measurement of the candidate beam may be triggered after the user equipment detects that the reference signal information of the initial beam is smaller than the second threshold, or may be triggered periodically. This embodiment is not limited.
  • the reference signal information When the reference signal information is greater than the third threshold, it may be determined that the quality of the candidate beam corresponding to the reference signal information is good, and may be used to communicate with the base station.
  • the method for detecting whether the reference signal information is greater than the third threshold is the same as the method for detecting whether the reference signal information is greater than the second threshold, and is not described herein.
  • the third threshold may be the same as the second threshold or may be different from the second threshold.
  • the first candidate beam index information of the at least one candidate beam is sent to the base station.
  • the base station communicates with the user equipment according to the candidate beam corresponding to the received at least one candidate beam index information.
  • the base station may also use the beam tracking technology to detect whether the user equipment is about to enter the obstacle area, when the base station detects When the user equipment is about to enter the obstacle area, the user equipment is triggered to perform RRM measurement on the candidate beam.
  • the base station needs to configure different TAs according to different user equipments between the user equipment and the base station. For example, when the user equipment is far away from the base station, the user equipment may be configured with a smaller uplink TA. When the user equipment is closer to the base station, the user equipment may be configured with a smaller uplink TA.
  • the candidate beam has a longer propagation path than the initial beam allocated by the base station, resulting in a large propagation delay.
  • the uplink TA is abruptly changed. Therefore, the user equipment needs to re-determine the uplink TA.
  • the determination of the uplink TA needs to be implemented through a random access procedure.
  • the user equipment When the user equipment actively triggers the random access procedure, the user equipment actively sends a first random access request to the base station.
  • the receiving module 302 is further configured to receive the first random access that is sent by the user equipment. begging;
  • the base station further includes a generating module 305, configured to generate an uplink TA according to the first random access request;
  • the communication module 304 is configured to communicate with the user equipment according to the candidate beam corresponding to the received first candidate beam index information and the uplink TA generated by the generating module 304.
  • the user equipment When the user equipment triggers the random access procedure under the instruction of the random access command, the user equipment sends a second random access request to the base station.
  • the determining module 303 is further configured to use beam tracking to determine that the user equipment is to be used for allocation.
  • the alternate beam communicates with the user equipment;
  • the sending module 301 is configured to send a random access instruction to the user equipment on the control channel;
  • the receiving module 302 is further configured to receive a second random access request that is sent by the user equipment according to the random access command sent by the sending module 301.
  • the base station further includes a generating module 305, configured to generate an uplink TA according to the second random access request;
  • the communication module 304 is further configured to communicate with the user equipment according to the candidate beam corresponding to the allocated second candidate beam index information and the uplink TA generated by the generating module 305.
  • the random access command may be applied to a non-contention based random access procedure, and the base station indicates a dedicated random access preamble and a physical random access channel resource (PRACH resource) by using the random access instruction.
  • the second random access request sent by the device means that the user equipment sends a random access preamble to the base station on the PRACH resource indicated by the base station.
  • the user equipment selects the random access preamble and the PRACH resource, and the user equipment sends a random access preamble to the base station on the PRACH resource selected by the user equipment.
  • the random access procedure in the following embodiments of the present invention is the same as that in the present embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • the user equipment when the user equipment detects that the reference signal information of each candidate beam is smaller than the third threshold and detects that the reference signal information of the at least one initial beam is greater than the second threshold, determining that the quality of the initial beam is better, at least one The initial beam index information of the initial beam is transmitted to the base station, and the base station communicates with the base station using at least one initial beam. Or, the base station determines, by using the beam waveform technology, that the user equipment is about to leave the obstacle area and detects that the reference signal information of the at least one initial beam is greater than the second threshold, determining to communicate with the base station by using the at least one initial beam. At this time, the user equipment may re-determine the uplink TA, or may not be sure of the uplink TA.
  • the beams used by the user equipment may have different TAs, and these TAs may be for the same millimeter wave base station or for different millimeter wave base stations. Therefore, the base station may further set at least one TA group for each user equipment, each TA group includes at least one beam index information, and the uplink TA corresponding to each beam index information is the same.
  • the beam index information may be an initial wave of the initial beam
  • the bundle index information may also be candidate beam index information of the candidate beam.
  • the beams indicated by the beam index information in one TA group may belong to the same cell or belong to different cells. Therefore, the cell identifier of the cell associated with each beam may also be identified in the TA group.
  • the determining module 303 is further configured to: determine, in a beam that communicates with the user equipment, the same beam of the uplink TA as a packet, where the beam includes at least one of an initial beam and an alternate beam;
  • the generating module 305 is configured to generate, according to each packet obtained by the determining module 303, a TA group, where the TA group includes a TA group identifier, beam index information of each beam in the packet, a cell identifier corresponding to each beam in the packet, and a time adjustment timer. TAT;
  • the sending module 301 is configured to send the TA group generated by the generating module 305 to the user equipment.
  • the base station may reconfigure the TA group for the user equipment according to the new uplink TA and allocate the cell associated with the beam index information and the beam index information of the TA group.
  • the base station can adjust the uplink TA and the TA group by using TA cmd.
  • the first candidate beam index information is that the reference signal information of the initial beam is smaller than a second threshold, and each candidate is selected After the candidate beam indicated by the beam index information is subjected to the RRM measurement, the determined reference signal information is greater than the third threshold candidate beam index information; and the candidate beam corresponding to the first candidate beam index information is used to communicate with the user equipment.
  • the quality of the allocated initial beam is poor, the candidate beam with better quality can be used to communicate with the user equipment, thereby improving the communication efficiency.
  • the third application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is applied to the power control.
  • the path loss in different beam directions may be different. Therefore, at least one initial beam with the smallest path loss needs to be selected from the allocated initial beams, and communication is performed on the selected at least one initial beam. .
  • the receiving module 302 is configured to: after determining the initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report, receive the PHR from the user equipment, where the PHR includes the PH, and the PH is performed on the RSRP of each initial beam. Measure the path loss information and generate it based on the minimum path loss information;
  • the base station further includes an allocation module 306 for receiving the PH and the PH according to the receiving module 302.
  • the corresponding initial beam allocates uplink resources to the user equipment;
  • the communication module 304 is specifically configured to communicate with the user equipment on the corresponding uplink resource allocated by the allocation module 306 by using the initial beam corresponding to the PH.
  • the millimeter wave eNB may directly receive the PHR; when the user equipment sends the PHR to the LTE eNB, the LTE eNB forwards the received PHR to the millimeter wave eNB.
  • the method for receiving the PHR by the millimeter wave eNB in the following embodiments of the present invention is the same as that of the embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • the base station After receiving the PHR, the base station allocates uplink resources to the user equipment according to the initial beam index information and the PH in the PHR, so that the user equipment sends uplink information on the corresponding initial beam using power that is suitable and does not exceed the maximum allowed transmit power of the user equipment.
  • the scheduled at least two initial beams may be determined by measuring the SRS of the user equipment.
  • the MAC CE can be dynamically indicated by the MAC CE to cause the user equipment to report the path loss among the least.
  • the sending module 301 is configured to: before the receiving module 302 receives the power headroom report PHR from the user equipment, send the first beam index information of the first beam in the beam range carrying the single initial beam to the user equipment.
  • An indication is that the first indication is used to indicate that the user equipment measures the RSRP of the first beam.
  • the first beam in the beam range of a single initial beam refers to a refinement beam in an initial beam.
  • the first beam refers to a beam between 30°-60°, for example, a first beam of 30° to 40°, or 35°-55.
  • the base station may separately perform power control for each beam direction, for example, allocate different uplink resources for beams that need to consume different uplink powers.
  • the PHR By receiving the PHR from the user equipment, the PHR includes a PH, and the PH is a measurement of the RSRP of each initial beam to obtain path loss information, which is generated according to the minimum path loss information; and the user is based on the PH and the initial beam corresponding to the PH.
  • the device allocates an uplink resource; and the initial beam corresponding to the PH communicates with the user equipment on the corresponding uplink resource, and the initial beam with the smallest path loss can be selected.
  • the corresponding uplink resource communicates with the user equipment, which saves the transmission power.
  • the fourth application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is applied to the channel state information (CSI).
  • CSI channel state information
  • the user equipment also needs to perform CSI measurement on the initial beam to obtain CSI information to determine the quality of the initial beam according to the CSI information.
  • the CSI information includes a Channel Quality Indication (CQI), a Precoding Matrix Index (PMI), and a Rank Indicator (English: Rank Indication; RI).
  • the receiving module 302 is configured to: after determining the initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report, receive the CSI measurement report from the user equipment, where the CSI measurement report includes CSI information, where the CSI information is Each initial beam performs CSI measurement to obtain CQI, which is generated according to the highest CQI;
  • the communication module 304 is configured to communicate with the user equipment according to the CSI information received by the receiving module 302 and the initial beam corresponding to the CSI information.
  • the millimeter wave eNB may directly receive the CSI measurement report; when the user equipment sends the CSI measurement report to the LTE eNB, the LTE eNB forwards the received CSI measurement report to the millimeter wave. eNB.
  • the method for receiving the CSI measurement report by the millimeter wave eNB in the following embodiments of the present invention is the same as that of the embodiment, and will not be described below.
  • the base station After receiving the CSI measurement report, the base station selects a good quality initial beam according to the CSI information in the CSI measurement report, and communicates with the user equipment by using the selected initial beam.
  • the MAC CE can be dynamically indicated by the MAC CE to enable the user equipment to report the CSI information with the highest CQI.
  • the sending module 301 is configured to send, by the receiving module 302, a second indication of the second beam index information of the second beam in the beam range carrying the single initial beam to the user equipment before receiving the CSI measurement report originating from the user equipment.
  • the second indication is used to indicate that the user equipment performs CSI measurement on the second beam.
  • the second beam in the beam range of a single initial beam refers to a refinement beam in an initial beam.
  • the second beam in the beam range of a single initial beam refers to a beam between 30°-60°, for example, a second of 30° to 40°. Beam, or a second beam of 35°-55°, etc.
  • the CSI measurement report includes a CSI measurement report, where the CSI measurement report includes CSI measurement for each initial beam to obtain a CQI, which is generated according to the highest CQI, and an initial corresponding to the CSI information according to the CSI information.
  • the beam communicates with the user equipment, and the initial beam with the highest CQI can be selected to communicate with the user equipment to improve communication efficiency.
  • the fifth application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is used to adjust the bandwidth of the cell.
  • the base station when the traffic of each user equipment that is accessed by the cell changes, and the load of the cell changes, the base station needs to adjust the cell bandwidth of the cell. For example, when the load is reduced, the maximum bandwidth of 500 MHz may no longer be needed, and the cell bandwidth may be reduced to, for example, 200 MHz; when the load is increased, it may be necessary to increase the cell bandwidth, for example, to 400 MHz or 500 MHz. If the original cell needs to be deleted every time the radio resource is adjusted, and then a new cell is added, the signaling overhead and delay are large, and in fact, only the cell bandwidth information may change, and other radio resource configuration parameters are not. Need to change. Therefore, the base station can adjust the cell bandwidth when the traffic of the user equipment changes.
  • the base station further includes:
  • the adjusting module 307 is configured to determine, after determining, according to the RRM measurement report, the initial beam index information that is communicated with the user equipment, adjusting the cell bandwidth according to the traffic volume of the at least one user equipment, where the cell bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume;
  • the sending module 301 is configured to broadcast the information about the cell bandwidth adjusted by the adjustment module 307 and the information of the central frequency point to each user equipment, or send the information of the adjusted cell bandwidth and the information of the central frequency point by using RRC signaling.
  • the center frequency is the center frequency of the frequency range corresponding to the adjusted cell bandwidth or the specified frequency within the frequency range.
  • the base station can use one of the following methods when adjusting the cell bandwidth: keep the center frequency point unchanged, and reduce or increase symmetrically from both sides.
  • the cell bandwidth is 100 MHz to 300 MHz, and the center frequency point is 200 MHz, then it can be from two.
  • the side is increased by 50MHz, and the adjusted cell bandwidth is 50MHz to 350MHz; or, it is reduced or increased from one side, for example, the cell bandwidth is 200MHz to 300MHz, and the 100MHz is reduced from one side, and the adjusted cell bandwidth is 100MHz to 300MHz.
  • dynamically intercept a certain continuous frequency range for example, the cell bandwidth is 100 MHz to 300 MHz, and 200 MHz to 300 MHz is intercepted therefrom as the adjusted cell bandwidth.
  • the adjusted cell bandwidth is a continuous frequency range.
  • the base station can adjust the cell bandwidth multiple times, and can also be set each time.
  • the granularity or unit information of the adjustment for example, a reduction or increase of 20 MHz at a time.
  • the granularity or unit information may be specified in advance or configured by Operation Administration and Maintenance (OAM).
  • OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance
  • the base station may directly notify all user equipments of the adjusted cell bandwidth and the center frequency point, or the base station notifies all user equipments of the new cell bandwidth and the center frequency point through the LTE-A base station. For example, the base station notifies all user equipments in the BCH or System Information Broadcast (SIB) or through RRC signaling.
  • SIB System Information Broadcast
  • the adjusted cell can use multiple channels such that multiple channels share the same HARQ entity.
  • the entire cell may be composed of a plurality of channels of the same bandwidth
  • the base station may transmit the common information on the channel located at the central frequency point, or the base station may transmit the common information on the center frequency of each channel. That is, if the adjusted cell is composed of channels having the same bandwidth, the sending module 301 is configured to send public information to each user equipment on a channel located at the central frequency point, or to each user on the center frequency of each channel. The device sends public information.
  • the public information may be PSS and SSS, a broadcast channel (English: Broadcast Channel; BCH for short), and a physical random access channel (English: Physical Random Access Channel; PRACH).
  • BCH Broadcast Channel
  • PRACH Physical Random Access Channel
  • the base station needs to send the public information transmitted only in the frequency range near the center frequency. Make adjustments. For example, for PSS and SSS, BCH, PRACH, etc., the base station can transmit public information at the center frequency of the adjusted cell bandwidth.
  • the center frequency of the adjusted cell bandwidth is the center position of the frequency range corresponding to the adjusted cell bandwidth.
  • the cell bandwidth is adjusted according to the traffic volume of the at least one user equipment, and the cell bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume; the adjusted cell bandwidth information and the central frequency point information are broadcast to each user equipment, or adjusted by RRC signaling.
  • the information of the cell bandwidth and the information of the center frequency are sent to the user equipments, and only the cell bandwidth can be adjusted, and other radio resource configuration parameters need not be configured, which saves the communication overhead in the process of configuring the cell bandwidth.
  • the sixth application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is used to adjust the user bandwidth.
  • the overall load of the cell does not change much, but the traffic of some user equipments varies greatly.
  • the demand for the cell bandwidth of the user equipment changes.
  • only the cell bandwidth required by the user equipment needs to be adjusted. From the perspective of the user equipment, its user bandwidth can be adaptively reduced or Increase; but from the perspective of the base station, the base station still transmits information based on the originally used cell bandwidth, but the frequency range used by different user equipments may be different.
  • the base station further includes:
  • the adjusting module 307 is configured to determine, after the determining, by the module 303, the initial beam index information that is used to communicate with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report, adjust the user bandwidth of the user equipment according to the service volume of the user equipment, and the user bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume;
  • the sending module 301 is configured to send information about the adjusted user bandwidth of the adjustment module 307 to the user equipment by using at least one of RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and a control channel.
  • the base station when the base station adjusts the user bandwidth, the base station can adjust the user bandwidth by adjusting the channel allocated to the user equipment according to the traffic volume.
  • the adjusting module 307 is specifically configured to adjust a channel allocated to the user equipment according to the service volume of the user equipment, to obtain a user bandwidth.
  • the channel in the deactivated state or the dormant state may be activated to allocate the channel to the user equipment; when the traffic volume decreases, the user bandwidth needs to be reduced, and the active state may be activated.
  • the channel is modified to a deactivated state or a dormant state, at which time the user equipment cannot use the channel.
  • the base station may indicate the adjusted user bandwidth to the user equipment by using RRC signaling or a MAC CE or a control channel.
  • the user bandwidth of the user equipment is adjusted according to the traffic volume of the user equipment, and the user bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume; the adjusted user bandwidth information is sent to the user equipment by using at least one of RRC signaling, the MAC CE, and the control channel.
  • the user bandwidth can be adjusted in real time according to the service volume of the user equipment, and the normal operation of the user equipment is ensured.
  • the seventh application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is applied to semi-persistent scheduling (English: Semi-Sersistent Scheduling; SPS for short):
  • the sending module 301 is configured to send the SPS resource information to the user equipment, where the SPS resource information is used to indicate resource information and beam index information allocated by the base station to the user equipment;
  • the user equipment may determine the initial beam according to the initial beam index information; when the SPS resource information does not include the initial beam index information, the user equipment may determine, according to the initial beam index information carried by the RRM measurement report.
  • the initial beam which may be a transmit beam or a receive beam.
  • the base station can be configured by using RRC signaling
  • the user equipment is set or indicates initial beam index information when the SPS resource is activated using the control channel.
  • the communication module 304 is configured to communicate with the user equipment according to a beam corresponding to the beam index information indicated by the SPS information.
  • the base station may agree with the user equipment to use a better quality beam or use a preset beam according to the measurement result. At this time, the user equipment can transmit/receive information on a beam with better quality. Correspondingly, the base station receives/transmits information on the beam. Or, the user equipment simultaneously transmits/receives information on the preset at least one beam, and correspondingly, the base station simultaneously receives/transmits information on the at least one beam.
  • the user equipment selects a beam with better signal condition when transmitting/receiving information in the SPS manner, or simultaneously transmits and/or receives on one or more predetermined beams.
  • the base station can receive/transmit information in SPS mode on one or more predetermined beams.
  • the base station and the user equipment can preferentially select one or more beams with good signal conditions in a plurality of predetermined beam ranges according to the measurement result.
  • the base station when the base station re-instructs the beam index information according to the measurement result or the recommended beam index information of the user equipment, only the beam index information in the SPS resource information needs to be modified, and the resource information does not need to be modified. At this time, the base station may re-instruct the user equipment to the beam index information through RRC signaling or a MAC CE or a control channel.
  • the SPS resource information is used to indicate resource information and beam index information allocated by the base station for the user equipment; and the beam corresponding to the beam index information indicated by the SPS information is used to communicate with the user equipment, and may be sent by
  • the SPS resource information is configured to allocate resources and beams to the user equipment, and can solve the problem of wasteful communication overhead caused by dynamically configuring resources and beams for the user equipment, thereby achieving the effect of saving communication overhead.
  • the eighth application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is applied to the device (Device: Device to Device: D2D).
  • the base station allocates initial beam index information of the initial beam of the D2D communication to the user equipment.
  • the allocation module 306 is configured to send the resource indication information used in the D2D communication to the user equipment, where the resource indication information includes D2D resource information and initial beam index information, and is used to indicate that the user equipment uses D2D communication with other user equipments. Resources and initial beams.
  • the beam index information allocated by the base station may be set by the base station, or may be a user equipment root. After the beam index information of the beam with better quality is determined according to the measurement result, the allocated initial beam index information is requested to the base station for D2D communication between the user equipment and other user equipments.
  • the D2D resource information includes time domain resource information and frequency domain resource information.
  • the cellular communication used between the base station and the user equipment and the D2D communication used between the user equipment and other user equipment can reuse time domain resources and frequency domain resources on different initial beams.
  • the resource indication information used in the D2D communication is sent to the user equipment, where the resource indication information includes D2D resource information and beam index information, and is used to indicate resources and beams used when the user equipment and the other user equipment adopt D2D communication, and may be
  • the initial beam allocated by the base station communicates with other user equipments to solve the problem of mutual interference between D2D communications, and the effect of improving communication quality is achieved.
  • the base station provided by the embodiment of the present invention sends the initial beam index information of the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment to the UE, and receives the RRM measurement report originating from the user equipment, where the RRM measurement report is Obtaining, after the user equipment performs RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information; determining initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report, determining the signal quality of the initial beam according to the RRM measurement report, and selecting the signal
  • the better quality initial beam communicates with the user equipment, and the beamforming technology solves the problem that the existing millimeter wave band has a short transmission distance and cannot meet the data communication requirement of the user equipment in the cellular communication environment, and the extended millimeter wave is achieved. The effect of the transmission distance of the frequency band. .
  • FIG. 4 is a structural diagram of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the user equipment may be the UE shown in FIG. 1, and the UE may include: a receiving module 401 and a sending module 402.
  • the receiving module 401 is configured to receive initial beam index information sent by the base station, where the initial beam index information is used to indicate an initial beam of a millimeter wave band allocated by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is detailed in the description in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and details are not described herein.
  • the sending module 402 is configured to send an RRM measurement report, where the RRM measurement report is used by the user equipment to perform RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information, where the RRM measurement report is used to indicate that the base station determines to communicate with the user equipment. Initial beam index information.
  • the user equipment may also perform the initial beam allocated by the determined base station.
  • the RRM measurement generates an RRM measurement report based on the measurement result.
  • the user equipment may send the RRM measurement report to the LTE eNB, and the LTE eNB forwards the RRM measurement report to the millimeter wave eNB.
  • the RRM measurement report may also be sent to the millimeter wave eNB.
  • the embodiment does not limit the user equipment to the RRM measurement report. sending method.
  • the method for the user equipment to send the RRM measurement report in the following embodiments of the present invention is the same as the description of the embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • the RRM measurement may refer to a measurement for mobility management in a normal sense, a measurement method filtered by the RRC layer, or a measurement performed by means of beam training, as shown in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 . The description is not repeated here.
  • the base station determines the signal quality of the initial beam according to the RRM measurement report, and then selects the initial beam with good signal quality to communicate with the UE, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the millimeter wave band, which cannot meet the user equipment in the cellular communication environment.
  • the problem of data communication requirements can extend the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • the user equipment receives the initial beam index information sent by the base station, where the initial beam index information is used to indicate the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated by the base station for the user equipment; and the radio resource management RRM is sent.
  • a measurement report the RRM measurement report is obtained by the user equipment performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information, where the RRM measurement report is used to indicate that the base station determines initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment, and may pass the RRM.
  • the measurement report reports the signal quality of the initial beam to the base station, so that the base station selects a beam with better signal quality to communicate with the user equipment, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the existing millimeter wave band, which cannot meet the cellular communication environment.
  • the problem of data communication requirements of the user equipment achieves the effect of extending the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • FIG. 5 is a structural diagram of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the user equipment may be the UE shown in FIG. 1, and the UE may include: a receiving module 501 and a sending module 502.
  • the receiving module 501 is configured to receive initial beam index information sent by the base station, where the initial beam index information is used to indicate an initial beam of a millimeter wave band allocated by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is detailed in the description in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and details are not described herein.
  • the sending module 502 is configured to send an RRM measurement report, where the RRM measurement report is obtained by performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information by the user equipment, where the RRM measurement is performed.
  • the report is used to instruct the base station to determine initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment.
  • the user equipment may perform RRM measurement on the determined initial beam allocated by the base station, and generate an RRM measurement report according to the measurement result.
  • the RRM measurement may refer to a measurement for mobility management in a normal sense, a measurement method filtered by the RRC layer, or a measurement performed by means of beam training, as shown in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 . The description is not repeated here.
  • the method for the user equipment to send the RRM measurement report is detailed in the description in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and details are not described herein again.
  • the base station determines the signal quality of the initial beam according to the RRM measurement report, and then selects the initial beam with good signal quality to communicate with the UE, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the millimeter wave band, which cannot meet the user equipment in the cellular communication environment.
  • the problem of data communication requirements can extend the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • the beam configuration method is described in detail in the following different application scenarios, as follows:
  • the first application scenario is described by using a user equipment in a scenario that is discontinuously received.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the first application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the user equipment has a dormant state and an activated state, and the user equipment in the active state needs to receive the control information transmitted by the base station through the beamforming technology on the control channel, and the control information includes resource allocation control.
  • the resource allocation control instruction is used to indicate an uplink/downlink resource allocated by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the user equipment needs to determine the beam that needs to monitor the control channel according to the RRM measurement report. Therefore, if the RRM measurement report includes reference signal information corresponding to each initial beam index information, the reference signal information includes the reference signal received power. At least one of the RSRP and the reference signal receiving quality RSRQ, the user equipment, further includes:
  • the determining module 403 is configured to send, after the sending module 402 sends the RRM measurement report, the user equipment After switching from the dormant state to the activated state, determining first reference beam index information that the reference signal information is greater than the first threshold;
  • the monitoring module 404 is configured to monitor the control information on the control channel by using the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information determined by the determining module 403.
  • At least one initial beam may be determined from the RRM measurement report according to the foregoing method, and monitored by the determined at least one initial beam on the control channel. Control information.
  • the process of determining the first initial beam index information by the user equipment is the same as the process of determining the first initial beam index information by the base station.
  • the process of determining the first initial beam index information by the base station is the same as the process of determining the first initial beam index information by the base station.
  • the second method the user equipment needs to receive the specified beam index information
  • the receiving module 401 is further configured to receive, by the base station, the initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report by using at least one of RRC signaling and MAC CE. Second initial beam index information;
  • the user equipment further includes a monitoring module 404, configured to monitor the control information on the control channel by using the initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information received by the receiving module 401.
  • the beam index information can also be jointly determined by the first method and the second method described above.
  • the base station first specifies the second initial beam index information by using at least one of RRC signaling and the MAC CE. After a certain period of time, the base station selects the first initial beam index information from the RRM measurement report according to the reference signal information. Or, the base station first selects the first initial beam index information from the RRM measurement report according to the reference signal information, and after the interval is a certain period of time, specifies the second initial beam index information by using at least one of the RRC signaling and the MAC CE.
  • the beam index information may be determined by other methods, which is not limited in this embodiment.
  • the user equipment can also monitor the control channel in at least one of the following manners.
  • the monitoring module 404 is configured to receive control information in an omnidirectional manner, or receive control information in a beam range equal to or greater than an initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information, or to be smaller than the first initial beam index information.
  • the beam range of the corresponding initial beam receives the control information; or the monitoring module 404 is specifically configured to receive the control information in an omnidirectional manner, or to receive and control the beam range of the initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information.
  • the information, or the control information is received with a beam range smaller than the initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information.
  • the user equipment may receive the control information in an omnidirectional manner. At this time, it is not necessary to determine the initial beam of the control channel. Since the smaller the beam range, the greater the gain, therefore, in an omnidirectional manner Receiving the received control information may result in a small gain. Therefore, the user equipment may further determine a beam range according to the first initial beam index information or the second initial beam index information, and receive the control information according to the beam range.
  • the user equipment may receive the control information with a beam range greater than or equal to the initial beam. For example, if the beam range indicated by the first initial beam index information is 20°-30°, the user equipment may receive the control information in a beam range of 15°-35°. Alternatively, the user equipment may receive control information in a beam range that is less than the beam range. For example, if the beam range indicated by the first initial beam index information is 10°-30°, the user equipment may receive the control information in a beam range of 15°-25°.
  • the method for determining the beam range according to the second initial beam index information is the same as the method for determining the beam range according to the first initial index information, and details are not described herein.
  • the reference signal information includes at least one of a reference signal received power RSRP and a reference signal received quality RSRQ
  • the RRM measurement report includes reference signal information corresponding to each initial beam index information
  • the user equipment switches from the sleep state to the active state. After the state, the user equipment determines the first initial beam index information that the reference signal information is greater than the first threshold; and the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information is used to monitor the control information on the control channel, and the signal quality in the RRM measurement report may be used.
  • the second application scenario is described in the scenario where the user equipment is applied to the TA.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the second application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the base station can configure the candidate beam for the user equipment in advance to improve the communication quality by avoiding the obstacle. Therefore, the receiving module 401 is further configured to receive candidate beam index information sent by the base station, where the candidate beam index information is used to indicate an candidate beam of the millimeter wave band allocated by the base station to the user equipment;
  • the user equipment further includes a measurement module 405, configured to perform RRM measurement on the candidate beam indicated by each candidate beam index information when the reference signal information of the initial beam is smaller than the second threshold, where the reference signal information includes at least one of RSRP and RSRQ.
  • a measurement module 405 configured to perform RRM measurement on the candidate beam indicated by each candidate beam index information when the reference signal information of the initial beam is smaller than the second threshold, where the reference signal information includes at least one of RSRP and RSRQ.
  • a determining module 403 configured to determine, according to the RRM measurement performed by the measurement module 405, first candidate beam index information that the reference signal information is greater than a third threshold;
  • the sending module 402 is configured to send the first candidate beam index information determined by the determining module 403 to the base station, where the base station is configured to enter, according to the candidate beam corresponding to the first candidate beam index information, the user equipment. Line communication.
  • the base station may separately send the candidate beam index information to the user equipment, or may send the candidate beam index information and the initial beam index information together to the user equipment when the initial beam index information is sent to the user equipment, to save transmission overhead.
  • the method for transmitting the candidate beam index information in the following embodiments is the same as the method for sending the candidate beam index information in this embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • the method for determining the first candidate beam index information by the user equipment is detailed in the description in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and details are not described herein.
  • the base station may also use the beam tracking technology to detect whether the user equipment is about to enter the obstacle area, when the base station detects When the user equipment is about to enter the obstacle area, the user equipment is triggered to perform RRM measurement on the candidate beam.
  • the base station needs to configure different TAs according to different user equipments between the user equipment and the base station.
  • the candidate beam has a longer propagation path than the initial beam allocated by the base station, resulting in a large propagation delay.
  • the uplink TA is abruptly changed. Therefore, the user equipment needs to re-determine the uplink TA.
  • the determination of the uplink TA needs to be implemented through a random access procedure.
  • the user equipment may receive the random access command sent by the base station, trigger a random access procedure under the instruction of the random access command, and re-acquire the uplink TA, or actively trigger the random access process to reacquire the uplink.
  • the sending module 402 is further configured to automatically send a first random access request to the base station, where the first random access request is used to instruct the base station to generate an uplink TA, and according to the allocated second candidate beam index information Selecting a beam and an uplink TA to communicate with the user equipment; or,
  • the receiving module 401 is further configured to receive, on the control channel, a random access command sent by the base station, where the base station uses the beam tracking to determine that the candidate beam to be allocated for the user equipment is used to communicate with the user equipment, according to the The random access command sends a second random access request to the base station, where the second random access request is used to instruct the base station to generate an uplink TA, and according to the received candidate beam and the uplink TA corresponding to the first candidate beam index information.
  • User equipment communicates.
  • the user equipment when the user equipment detects that the reference signal information of each candidate beam is smaller than the third threshold and detects that the reference signal information of the at least one initial beam is greater than the second threshold, determining that the quality of the initial beam is better, at least one The initial beam index information of the initial beam is sent to the base station, and the base station uses One less initial beam communicates with the base station. Or, the base station determines, by using the beam waveform technology, that the user equipment is about to leave the obstacle area and detects that the reference signal information of the at least one initial beam is greater than the second threshold, determining to communicate with the base station by using the at least one initial beam. At this time, the user equipment may re-determine the uplink TA, or may not be sure of the uplink TA.
  • the beams used by the user equipment may have different TAs, and these TAs may be for the same millimeter wave base station or for different millimeter wave base stations. Therefore, the base station may further set at least one TA group for each user equipment, each TA group includes at least one beam index information, and the uplink TA corresponding to each beam index information is the same.
  • the beam index information may be initial beam index information of the initial beam, or may be candidate beam index information of the candidate beam.
  • the beams indicated by the beam index information in one TA group may belong to the same cell or belong to different cells. Therefore, the cell identifier of the cell associated with each beam may also be identified in the TA group.
  • the receiving module 401 is configured to receive the TA group sent by the base station, and the TA group is the base station that determines the same uplink beam of the uplink TA as a packet in the beam that communicates with the user equipment, and generates the TA group according to each group. And including a TA group identifier, beam index information of each beam in the packet, a cell identifier corresponding to each beam in the packet, and a time adjustment timer TAT, where the beam includes at least one of an initial beam and an alternate beam;
  • the measuring module 405 is configured to: when the TAT in the TA group received by the receiving module 401 times out, detect whether the cell identifier in the TA group corresponds to the beam index information in the other TA group and the TAT of the other TA group does not time out;
  • the user equipment further includes: a maintenance module 406, configured to determine, according to the beam index information, when the measurement module 405 detects that the cell identifier in the TA group corresponds to the beam index information in the other TA group and the TAT of the other TA group does not time out.
  • the cell the hybrid automatic repeat request (English: Hybrid Automatic Repeat Req user equipment st; abbreviation: HARQ) buffer and sounding reference signal (English: Sounding Reference Signal; SRS) resources;
  • the release module 407 is configured to: when the measurement module 405 detects that the cell identifier in the TA group corresponds to the beam index information in the other TA group and the TAT of the other TA group times out, determine the cell corresponding to the beam index information, and release the cell Corresponding HARQ buffer and SRS resources.
  • the TA group 1 includes the beam 1 and the beam 2 and the beam 1 corresponds to the cell 1.
  • the user equipment detects that the beam 3 associated with the cell 1 still exists in the TA group 2 and the TAT in the TA group 2 If the device does not time out, the user equipment maintains the HARQ buffer and SRS resources corresponding to the cell and does not send SRS and HARQ ACK/NACK in beam 1. If the beam 3 associated with cell 1 is detected, When the TAT in the TA group 2 and the TA group 2 times out, the user equipment releases the HARQ buffer and the SRS resource corresponding to the cell.
  • the candidate beam index information is used to receive the candidate beam index information of the millimeter wave band allocated by the base station for the user equipment; if the reference signal information of the initial beam is smaller than the second threshold, The candidate beam indicated by the beam index information is subjected to the RRM measurement; the first candidate beam index information whose reference signal information is greater than the third threshold is determined according to the RRM measurement; and the determined first candidate beam index information is sent to the base station, where When the quality of the allocated initial beam is poor, the better-quality candidate beam is used to communicate with the base station, thereby achieving an effect of improving communication efficiency.
  • the third application scenario is described in the example in which the user equipment is applied to the power control.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the third application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the path loss in different beam directions may be different. Therefore, at least one initial beam with the smallest path loss needs to be selected from the allocated initial beams, and communication is performed on the selected at least one initial beam. .
  • the user equipment further includes:
  • the measurement module 405 is configured to: after the sending module 402 sends the RRM measurement report, measure the RSRP of the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information, and obtain path loss information of each initial beam;
  • the generating module 408 is configured to generate a power headroom according to the minimum path loss information measured by the measuring module 407 (English: Power Headroom; abbreviation: PH), and obtain a power headroom report (English: Power Headroom Report; abbreviated as: PHR);
  • the sending module 402 is configured to send the PHR generated by the generating module 408, where the PHR is used to indicate that the base station allocates an uplink resource to the user equipment according to the PH and the initial beam corresponding to the PH, and the beam corresponding to the PH is on the corresponding uplink resource.
  • User equipment communicates.
  • the beam index information sent by the base station may correspond to a beam located outside the beam range corresponding to the RRM measurement report, or may correspond to an initial beam located in a beam range corresponding to the RRM measurement report, or may be an adaptively determined beam. This embodiment is not limited.
  • the user equipment may select at least two PHs satisfying a predetermined condition from the PHs of the at least two initial beams, the at least two The PH of the initial beam is added to the PHR.
  • the predetermined condition may be that the PH is greater than a fixed threshold, or the PH and one of the at least two initial beams are initial waves. The difference in the PH of the beam is greater than a fixed threshold or the like.
  • the user equipment may send the PHR to the LTE eNB, and the LTE eNB forwards the PHR to the millimeter wave eNB.
  • the PHR may also be sent to the millimeter wave eNB.
  • This embodiment does not limit the manner in which the user equipment sends the PHR.
  • the method for transmitting the PHR by the user equipment in the following embodiments of the present invention is the same as the description of the embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • the MAC CE can be dynamically indicated by the MAC CE to cause the user equipment to report the path loss among the least.
  • the PH of the beam is the PH of the beam.
  • the receiving module 401 is further configured to receive, by the base station, a first indication of the first beam index information of the first beam in the range of the beam carrying the single initial beam;
  • the generating module 408 is further configured to measure the RSRP of each first beam indicated by the first indication received by the receiving module 401, to obtain path loss information of each first beam.
  • the user equipment After detecting the PH of each initial beam index information, the user equipment detects that the difference between the path loss information of the measured initial beam index information and the path loss information of the initial beam index information included in the RRM measurement report is less than a predetermined threshold. Then, the user equipment may add the PH of the initial beam index information included in the RRM measurement report to the PHR for transmission.
  • the user equipment can support multi-beam transmission on the uplink to improve air interface efficiency.
  • the user equipment may send the same or different information on multiple beams, send the same or different HARQ redundancy version (English: Redundancy Version; RV for short), send control information on part of the beam, and send on part of the beam. Data information, etc.
  • the user equipment uses multi-beam communication, it is also necessary to allocate uplink transmit power between the beams. For example, when the path loss between multiple beams is not large, the user equipment can evenly distribute the total transmit power among multiple beams.
  • the transmit power of at least one beam needs to be down-regulated.
  • the user equipment may averagely adjust the transmit power of each beam according to the same factor or coefficient; or, the user equipment may set different factors or coefficients for different beams, and reduce the transmit power of the beam according to the respective factors or coefficients; or
  • the user equipment can prioritize according to the information content carried on different beams, and adjust the transmit power of each beam according to the priority.
  • the beam priority of the bearer control information is higher than the beam priority of the bearer data information.
  • the path loss information of each initial beam is obtained by measuring the RSRP of the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information; the PH is generated according to the minimum path loss information to obtain the PHR; and the PHR is transmitted, and the PHR is used to indicate the base station according to the PH and
  • the initial beam corresponding to the PH allocates an uplink resource to the user equipment, and communicates with the user equipment on the corresponding uplink resource by using the initial beam corresponding to the PH, and can select to communicate with the base station on the uplink resource corresponding to the initial beam with the smallest path loss, thereby saving The transmission power.
  • the fourth application scenario is described in the scenario where the user equipment is applied to the CSI measurement.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the fourth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the user equipment also needs to perform CSI measurement on the initial beam to obtain CSI information to determine the quality of the initial beam according to the CSI information.
  • the user equipment further includes:
  • the measurement module 405 is configured to: after the sending module 403 sends the RRM measurement report, perform CSI measurement on the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information, to obtain a channel quality indicator of each initial beam (English: Channel Quality Information; referred to as CQI);
  • the generating module 408 is configured to generate at least one channel state indication CSI information according to the highest CQI measured by the measurement module 405, to obtain a CSI measurement report;
  • the sending module 402 is configured to send a CSI measurement report generated by the generating module 408, where the CSI measurement report is used to instruct the base station to communicate with the user equipment according to the CSI information and the initial beam corresponding to the CSI information.
  • the user equipment needs to obtain the initial beam corresponding to the RRM measurement report.
  • the RRM measurement defaults to a beam corresponding to a primary synchronization signal (English: Primary Synchronization Signal; PSS) and a secondary synchronization signal (English: Secondary Synchronization Signal; SSS) when the user equipment accesses the base station; or, the user
  • PSS Primary Synchronization Signal
  • SSS Secondary Synchronization Signal
  • the device includes the identifier information of the initial beam in the RRM measurement report, and the user equipment determines the beam according to the identifier information; or the user equipment determines the initial beam index information according to the measurement result of the downlink reference signal, and includes the initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report.
  • the user equipment may filter the CSI information including the highest CQI from each CSI information, and generate a CSI measurement report according to the selected at least one CSI information.
  • the CSI information includes at least one of CQI, PMI, and RI, and the user equipment may send at least one of CQI, PMI, and RI at the same time or at different times.
  • the user equipment may send the CSI measurement report to the LTE eNB, and the LTE eNB forwards the CSI measurement report to the millimeter wave eNB.
  • the CSI measurement report may also be sent to the millimeter wave eNB. How to send.
  • the method for transmitting the CSI measurement report by the user equipment in the following embodiments of the present invention is the same as that of the embodiment, and is not described here.
  • the MAC CE can be dynamically indicated by the MAC CE to enable the user equipment to report the CSI information with the highest CQI. specifically,
  • the receiving module 401 is further configured to receive, by the base station, a second indication of the second beam index information of the second beam in the range of the beam carrying the single initial beam;
  • the generating module 408 is further configured to perform CSI measurement on each of the second beams indicated by the second indication received by the receiving module 401, to obtain CQIs of the respective second beams.
  • the CSI measurement of each initial beam is performed by performing channel state indication CSI measurement on the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information; the CSI measurement report is generated according to the highest CQI, and the CSI measurement report is sent; the CSI measurement report is used to indicate
  • the base station communicates with the user equipment according to the CSI information and the initial beam corresponding to the CSI information, and can select the initial beam with the highest CQI to communicate with the base station, thereby improving communication efficiency.
  • the fifth application scenario is described in the scenario where the user equipment is used to adjust the bandwidth of the cell.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the fifth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the base station when the traffic of each user equipment that is accessed by the cell changes, and the load of the cell changes, the base station needs to adjust the cell bandwidth of the cell.
  • the manner in which the base station adjusts the cell bandwidth is described in detail in the fifth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and details are not described herein.
  • the receiving module 401 is further configured to receive, by using a broadcast, the adjusted information of the cell bandwidth and the information of the center frequency point, or receive the RRC signaling sent by the base station, where the RRC signaling carries the adjusted cell bandwidth.
  • the information and the information of the central frequency point the adjusted cell bandwidth is adjusted by the base station according to the traffic volume of the at least one user equipment, and the cell bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume, and the central frequency point is the frequency range corresponding to the adjusted cell bandwidth.
  • the public information transmitted by the base station is received on the channel located at the central frequency point, or the transmitting publicity sent by the base station is received on the center frequency of each channel. information.
  • the user equipment may receive the adjusted information of the cell bandwidth and the information of the center frequency point in a manner corresponding to the manner in which the base station sends the information of the adjusted cell bandwidth and the information of the center frequency point, and the information according to the center frequency point is located at the center frequency.
  • the public information is received on the channel of the point, or the public information is received on the center frequency of each channel.
  • the adjusted cell bandwidth is adjusted by the base station according to the service volume of the user equipment, and the cell bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume.
  • the center frequency point is the center frequency or the specified frequency within the frequency range corresponding to the adjusted cell bandwidth.
  • the cell bandwidth can be adjusted only without configuring other radio resource configuration parameters, which saves communication overhead in the process of configuring cell bandwidth.
  • the sixth application scenario is described in the example that the user equipment is used to adjust the bandwidth of the user.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the sixth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the overall load of the cell does not change much, but the traffic of some user equipments varies greatly.
  • the demand for the cell bandwidth of the user equipment changes.
  • the user bandwidth can be adaptively reduced or increased; but from the perspective of the base station, the base station still transmits information according to the originally used cell bandwidth, but the frequency range used by different user equipments can be different.
  • the base station when the base station adjusts the user bandwidth, the base station can adjust the user bandwidth by adjusting the channel allocated to the user equipment according to the traffic volume.
  • the receiving module 401 is configured to receive, by using at least one of the RRC signaling, the MAC CE, and the control channel, information about the adjusted user bandwidth sent by the base station, where the adjusted user bandwidth is adjusted by the base station according to the service volume of the user equipment. And the user bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume;
  • the user equipment further includes a listening module 404 for monitoring the control channel of the channel that constitutes the user bandwidth received by the receiving module 401.
  • the user equipment may receive the adjusted user bandwidth information in a manner corresponding to the manner in which the base station sends the adjusted user bandwidth information, and listen to the channel that constitutes the user bandwidth.
  • the remaining bandwidth after adjusting the user bandwidth adjustment may be continuous or discontinuous in the frequency domain.
  • the adjusted user bandwidth information sent by the base station by using at least one of the RRC signaling, the MAC CE, and the control channel, where the adjusted user bandwidth is adjusted by the base station according to the service volume of the user equipment.
  • the user bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume, and the user bandwidth can be adjusted in real time according to the service volume of the user equipment, thereby ensuring the normal operation of the user equipment.
  • the seventh application scenario is described in the scenario where the user equipment is applied to the SPS.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the seventh application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the receiving module 401 is configured to receive SPS resource information sent by the base station;
  • the determining module 403 is configured to determine resource information and beam index information allocated by the base station for the user equipment according to the SPS resource information.
  • the user equipment may determine the initial beam according to the initial beam index information; when the SPS resource information does not include the initial beam index information, the user equipment may determine, according to the initial beam index information carried by the RRM measurement report.
  • the initial beam which may be a transmit beam or a receive beam.
  • the base station may indicate initial beam index information when the user equipment is configured through RRC signaling or when the SPS resource is activated by using the control channel.
  • the base station may agree with the user equipment to use a better quality beam or use a preset beam according to the measurement result. At this time, the user equipment can transmit/receive information on a beam with better quality. Correspondingly, the base station receives/transmits information on the beam. Or, the user equipment simultaneously transmits/receives information on the preset at least one beam, and correspondingly, the base station simultaneously receives/transmits information on the at least one beam.
  • the user equipment selects a beam with better signal condition when transmitting/receiving information in the SPS manner, or simultaneously transmits and/or receives on one or more predetermined beams.
  • the base station can receive/transmit information in SPS mode on one or more predetermined beams.
  • the base station and the user equipment can preferentially select one or more beams with good signal conditions in a plurality of predetermined beam ranges according to the measurement result.
  • the resource information and the beam index information allocated by the base station for the user equipment are determined according to the SPS resource information, and the resource and the beam can be configured by receiving the SPS resource information, and the resource and the beam can be dynamically configured for the user equipment.
  • the problem of wasted communication overhead is achieved, and the effect of saving communication overhead is achieved.
  • An eighth application scenario is described in the example in which the user equipment is applied to the D2D.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the eighth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the base station allocates initial beam index information of the initial beam of the D2D communication to the user equipment.
  • the receiving module 401 is configured to receive resource indication information sent by the base station, where the resource indication information includes D2D resource information and initial beam index information;
  • the user equipment further includes a communication module 409, configured to determine, according to the resource indication information received by the receiving module 401, resources and initial beams used when D2D communication is used with other user equipments.
  • the initial beam index information allocated by the base station may be set by the base station, or the user equipment may request the allocated initial beam index information for the user equipment after determining the beam index information of the beam with good quality according to the measurement result.
  • the D2D resource information includes time domain resource information and frequency domain resource information.
  • the cellular communication used between the base station and the user equipment and the D2D communication used between the user equipment and other user equipment can reuse time domain resources and frequency domain resources on different initial beams.
  • the resource indication information includes D2D resource information and beam index information; determining resources and beams used when using D2D communication with other user equipments according to the resource indication information, and Other user equipment communication solves the problem of mutual interference between D2D communication, and achieves the effect of improving communication quality.
  • the user equipment receives the initial beam index information sent by the base station, where the initial beam index information is used to indicate the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated by the base station for the user equipment; and the radio resource management RRM is sent.
  • a measurement report the RRM measurement report is obtained by the user equipment performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information, where the RRM measurement report is used to indicate that the base station determines initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment, and may pass the RRM.
  • the measurement report reports the signal quality of the initial beam to the base station, so that the base station selects a beam with better signal quality to communicate with the user equipment, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the existing millimeter wave band, which cannot meet the cellular communication environment.
  • the problem of data communication requirements of the user equipment achieves the effect of extending the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • FIG. 6 is a structural diagram of a base station according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the base station may be the base station shown in FIG. 1; the base station may include a transmitter 601, a receiver 602, and a processor 603.
  • the transmitter 601 is configured to send initial beam index information of the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is used to indicate an initial beam used by the base station to send downlink information to the user equipment, and is pre-configured by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is associated with antenna weights or codebook information used by the base station to transmit downlink information to determine information such as the direction and width of the initial beam.
  • the direction of the initial beam refers to the angle information of the initial beam with respect to the horizontal direction and/or the vertical direction.
  • the initial beam index information is also associated with the feature information of the initial beam, and the base station transmits the initial beam-specific feature information on different initial beams, so that the user equipment identifies different initial beams according to different feature information, as shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the description in the embodiment is not described here.
  • the receiver 602 is configured to receive an RRM measurement report that is obtained by the user equipment, where the RRM measurement report is obtained by performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information sent by the transmitter 601.
  • the processor 603 is configured to determine initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report received by the receiver 602.
  • the base station determines the signal quality of the initial beam according to the RRM measurement report, and then selects the initial beam with good signal quality to communicate with the UE, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the millimeter wave band, which cannot meet the user equipment in the cellular communication environment.
  • the problem of data communication requirements can extend the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • the base station provided by the embodiment of the present invention sends the initial beam index information of the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment to the UE, and receives the RRM measurement report originating from the user equipment, where the RRM measurement report is Obtaining, after the user equipment performs RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information; determining initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report, determining the signal quality of the initial beam according to the RRM measurement report, and selecting the signal
  • the better quality initial beam communicates with the user equipment, and the beamforming technology solves the problem that the existing millimeter wave band has a short transmission distance and cannot meet the data communication requirement of the user equipment in the cellular communication environment, and the extended millimeter wave is achieved. The effect of the transmission distance of the frequency band.
  • the base station may be the base station shown in FIG. 1; the base station may include a transmitter 601, a receiver 602, and a processor 603.
  • the transmitter 601 is configured to send initial beam index information of the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment user equipment to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is used to indicate a beam used by the base station to send downlink information to the user equipment, and is configured by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is associated with the base station to send the downlink.
  • the antenna weight or codebook information used in the information to determine information such as the direction and width of the initial beam.
  • the direction of the initial beam refers to the angle information of the initial beam with respect to the horizontal direction and/or the vertical direction.
  • the beam direction of an initial beam is a direction of 30°-60° with respect to the horizontal direction, or, relative to the vertical direction. 20°-40° direction, etc.
  • the initial beam index information is also associated with the feature information of the initial beam, and the base station transmits the initial beam-specific feature information on different initial beams, so that the user equipment identifies different initial beams according to different feature information, as shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the description in the embodiment is not described here.
  • the base station may configure at least one initial beam for the user equipment, and send initial beam index information of each initial beam in the at least one initial beam to the user equipment, so that the user equipment explicitly indicates on which initial beam the base station transmits. Downstream information.
  • the receiver 602 is configured to receive a radio resource management RRM measurement report that is obtained by the user equipment, where the RRM measurement report is obtained by performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information sent by the transmitter 601.
  • the processor 603 is configured to determine initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report received by the receiver 602.
  • the base station determines the signal quality of the initial beam according to the RRM measurement report, and then selects the initial beam with good signal quality to communicate with the UE, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the millimeter wave band, which cannot meet the user equipment in the cellular communication environment.
  • the problem of data communication requirements can extend the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • the beam configuration method is described in detail in the following different application scenarios, as follows:
  • the first application scenario is described by using a base station in a scenario of discontinuous reception.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the first application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the user equipment has a dormant state and an activated state, and the user equipment in the active state needs to receive the control information transmitted by the base station through the beamforming technology on the control channel, and the control information includes resource allocation control.
  • the resource allocation control instruction is used to indicate an uplink/downlink resource allocated by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the processor 603 is specifically configured to determine, from the reference signal information corresponding to each initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report, the first initial beam index information that is greater than the first threshold, and the reference signal information. Include at least one of a reference signal received power RSRP and a reference signal received quality RSRQ;
  • the transmitter 601 is further configured to send, by using the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information determined by the processor 603, control information to the user equipment on the control channel, where the user equipment is configured to switch from the sleep state to the active state, and then determine The initial beam monitoring control information corresponding to the first initial beam index information.
  • the base station can agree with the user equipment to use the initial beam with better signal quality in the RRM measurement report.
  • the base station can agree with the user equipment to use the initial beam with better signal quality in the RRM measurement report.
  • the second method, the transmitter 601 is further configured to: at least one of the RRC signaling and the medium access control layer control meta MAC CE, and specify the second from each initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report.
  • the initial beam index information, the initial beam corresponding to the specified second initial beam index information is used to send control information to the user equipment on the control channel.
  • the base station may specify an initial beam for transmitting resource allocation control signaling on the control channel from the allocated initial beam, and then pass the second initial beam index information of the specified initial beam through the RRC. Signaling or MAC CE is sent to the user equipment.
  • the beam index information may be jointly determined by the first method and the second method.
  • the first method may be jointly determined by the first method and the second method.
  • the first initial beam index information whose reference signal information is greater than the first threshold is determined from the reference signal information corresponding to each initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report, and the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information is controlled.
  • the control information is sent to the user equipment on the channel, and the initial information of the signal quality in the RRM measurement report can be used to transmit the control information, thereby improving communication efficiency.
  • the second application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is applied to the TA.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the second application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the base station can configure the candidate beam for the user equipment in advance to improve the communication quality by avoiding the obstacle. Therefore, specifically, the transmitter 601 , also used to select alternate beams in the millimeter wave band for user equipment
  • the candidate beam index information is sent to the user equipment;
  • the receiver 602 is further configured to receive first candidate beam index information selected and sent by the user equipment from the candidate beam index information sent by the transmitter 601, where the first candidate beam index information is that the reference signal information of the initial beam is smaller than a second threshold value, and after performing RRM measurement on the candidate beam indicated by each candidate beam index information, the determined reference signal information is greater than the third threshold candidate beam index information, and the reference signal information includes at least one of RSRP and RSRQ One type;
  • the processor 603 is further configured to communicate with the user equipment according to the candidate beam corresponding to the first candidate beam index information received by the receiver 602.
  • the process of configuring the candidate beam for the user equipment is described in detail in the description of the second application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and details are not described herein.
  • the base station communicates with the user equipment according to the candidate beam corresponding to the received at least one candidate beam index information.
  • the base station may also use the beam tracking technology to detect whether the user equipment is about to enter the obstacle area, when the base station detects When the user equipment is about to enter the obstacle area, the user equipment is triggered to perform RRM measurement on the candidate beam.
  • the base station needs to configure different TAs according to different user equipments between the user equipment and the base station.
  • the candidate beam has a longer propagation path than the initial beam allocated by the base station, resulting in a large propagation delay.
  • the uplink TA is abruptly changed. Therefore, the user equipment needs to re-determine the uplink TA.
  • the determination of the uplink TA needs to be implemented through a random access procedure.
  • the user equipment When the user equipment actively triggers the random access procedure, the user equipment sends a first random access request to the base station, and the transmitter 601 is further configured to receive the first random access request sent by the user equipment.
  • the processor 603 is configured to generate an uplink time advance TA according to the first random access request, and communicate with the user equipment according to the received candidate beam and the uplink TA corresponding to the first candidate beam index information.
  • the user equipment When the user equipment triggers the random access procedure under the instruction of the random access command, the user equipment sends a second random access request to the base station.
  • the processor 603 is further configured to use beam tracking to determine that the user equipment is to be used for allocation. The alternate beam communicates with the user equipment;
  • the transmitter 601 is further configured to send a random access instruction to the user equipment on the control channel;
  • the receiver 602 is further configured to receive, by the user equipment, a random access command sent by the transmitter 601. Sending a second random access request;
  • the processor 603 is further configured to generate an uplink TA according to the second random access request received by the receiver 602, and communicate with the user equipment according to the candidate beam and the uplink TA corresponding to the allocated second candidate beam index information.
  • the beams used by the user equipment may have different TAs, and these TAs may be for the same millimeter wave base station or for different millimeter wave base stations. Therefore, the base station may further set at least one TA group for each user equipment, each TA group includes at least one beam index information, and the uplink TA corresponding to each beam index information is the same.
  • the beam index information may be initial beam index information of the initial beam, or may be candidate beam index information of the candidate beam.
  • the beams indicated by the beam index information in one TA group may belong to the same cell or belong to different cells. Therefore, the cell identifier of the cell associated with each beam may also be identified in the TA group.
  • the processor 603 is further configured to: determine, in a beam that communicates with the user equipment, the same beam of the uplink TA as one packet, where the beam includes at least one of an initial beam and an candidate beam; Generating a TA group, where the TA group includes a TA group identifier, beam index information of each beam in the packet, a cell identifier corresponding to each beam in the packet, and a time adjustment timer TAT;
  • the transmitter 601 is further configured to send the TA group generated by the processor 603 to the user equipment.
  • the base station may reconfigure the TA group for the user equipment according to the new uplink TA and allocate the cell associated with the beam index information and the beam index information of the TA group.
  • the base station can adjust the uplink TA and the TA group by using TA cmd.
  • the first candidate beam index information is that the reference signal information of the initial beam is smaller than a second threshold, and each candidate is selected After the candidate beam indicated by the beam index information is subjected to the RRM measurement, the determined reference signal information is greater than the third threshold candidate beam index information; and the candidate beam corresponding to the first candidate beam index information is used to communicate with the user equipment.
  • the quality of the allocated initial beam is poor, the candidate beam with better quality can be used to communicate with the user equipment, thereby improving the communication efficiency.
  • the third application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is applied to the power control.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the third application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the path loss in different beam directions may be different, therefore, It is necessary to select an initial beam with the smallest path loss from the allocated initial beams, and perform communication on the selected initial beam.
  • the receiver 602 is configured to: after determining, by the processor 603, the initial beam index information that is used to communicate with the user equipment, the processor 603 receives the power headroom report PHR from the user equipment, where the power headroom PH is included in the PHR.
  • the PH is obtained by measuring the RSRP of each initial beam to obtain path loss information, which is generated according to the minimum path loss information;
  • the processor 603 is configured to allocate an uplink resource to the user equipment according to the PH received by the receiver 602 and the initial beam corresponding to the PH, and communicate with the user equipment on the corresponding uplink resource by using the initial beam corresponding to the PH.
  • the beam index information sent by the base station may correspond to a beam located outside the beam range corresponding to the RRM measurement report, or may correspond to an initial beam located in a beam range corresponding to the RRM measurement report, or may be an adaptively determined beam. This embodiment is not limited.
  • the base station After receiving the PHR, the base station allocates uplink resources to the user equipment according to the beam index information and the PH in the PHR, so that the user equipment sends uplink information on the corresponding initial beam using power that is suitable and does not exceed the maximum allowed transmit power of the user equipment.
  • the MAC CE can be dynamically indicated by the MAC CE to enable the user equipment to report the minimum path loss.
  • the PH of the beam is the PH of the beam.
  • the transmitter 601 is further configured to: before the receiver 602 receives the power headroom report PHR from the user equipment, send the first beam index information of the first beam in the range of the beam carrying the single initial beam to the user equipment.
  • the first indication is used to indicate that the user equipment measures the RSRP of the first beam.
  • the base station does not limit the uplink transmit power of the user equipment
  • the user equipment can support multi-beam transmission on the uplink to improve air interface efficiency. If the user equipment supports multiple beams at the same time and the power is limited to a certain extent, the transmit power of the at least one beam needs to be down-converted. For details, refer to the description of the third application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. Do not repeat them.
  • the PHR By receiving the PHR from the user equipment, the PHR includes a PH, and the PH is a measurement of the RSRP of each initial beam to obtain path loss information, which is generated according to the minimum path loss information; and the user is based on the PH and the initial beam corresponding to the PH.
  • the device allocates an uplink resource, and communicates with the user equipment on the corresponding uplink resource by using the initial beam corresponding to the PH, and can select to communicate with the user equipment on the uplink resource corresponding to the initial beam with the smallest path loss, thereby saving the transmission power.
  • the fourth application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is applied to the CSI measurement.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the fourth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the user equipment also needs to perform CSI measurement on the initial beam to obtain CSI information to determine the quality of the initial beam according to the CSI information.
  • the user equipment needs to obtain the beam in the range of the RRM measurement report, and the user equipment first needs to obtain the initial beam corresponding to the RRM measurement report.
  • the specific acquisition method is shown in the fourth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 . The description is not repeated here.
  • the receiver 602 is configured to receive, by the processor 603, the channel state indication CSI measurement report that is derived from the user equipment, and the CSI measurement report includes the CSI information after determining the initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report.
  • the CSI information is obtained by performing CSI measurement on each initial beam to obtain a channel quality indicator CQI, which is generated according to the highest CQI;
  • the processor 603 is configured to communicate with the user equipment according to the CSI information received by the receiver 602 and the initial beam corresponding to the CSI information.
  • the MAC CE may be dynamically indicated by the MAC CE to cause the user equipment to report the CSI information with the highest CQI.
  • the transmitter 601 is further configured to: before the receiver 602 receives the channel state indication CSI measurement report from the user equipment, send the second beam index information of the second beam in the range of the beam carrying the single initial beam to the user equipment.
  • the second indication is used to indicate that the user equipment performs CSI measurement on the second beam.
  • the CSI measurement report includes a CSI measurement report, where the CSI measurement report includes CSI measurement for each initial beam to obtain a CQI, which is generated according to the highest CQI, and an initial corresponding to the CSI information according to the CSI information.
  • the beam communicates with the user equipment, and the initial beam with the highest CQI can be selected to communicate with the user equipment to improve communication efficiency.
  • the fifth application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is used to adjust the bandwidth of the cell.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the fifth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the base station when the traffic of each user equipment that is accessed by the cell changes, and the load of the cell changes, the base station needs to adjust the cell bandwidth of the cell, and the specific adjustment method is shown in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the description of the fifth application scenario is not described here.
  • the processor 603 is further configured to determine, according to the RRM measurement report, to communicate with the user equipment. After the initial beam index information of the message, the cell bandwidth is adjusted according to the traffic volume of the at least one user equipment, and the cell bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume;
  • the transmitter 601 is further configured to broadcast the information about the cell bandwidth adjusted by the processor 603 and the information of the central frequency point to each user equipment, or use the RRC signaling to adjust the information of the cell bandwidth and the information of the center frequency point.
  • the central frequency point is sent to each user equipment, and the central frequency point is a central frequency or a specified frequency within a frequency range corresponding to the adjusted cell bandwidth.
  • the adjusted cell can use multiple channels such that multiple channels share the same HARQ entity.
  • the entire cell may be composed of a plurality of channels of the same bandwidth
  • the base station may transmit the common information on the channel located at the central frequency point, or the base station may transmit the common information on the center frequency of each channel. That is, if the adjusted cell is composed of channels having the same bandwidth, the transmitter 601 is further configured to send public information to each user equipment on a channel located at the center frequency point, or to each of the center frequencies of each channel. The user device sends public information.
  • the cell bandwidth is adjusted according to the traffic volume of the at least one user equipment, and the cell bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume; the adjusted cell bandwidth information and the central frequency point information are broadcast to each user equipment, or adjusted by RRC signaling.
  • the information of the cell bandwidth and the information of the center frequency are sent to the user equipments, and only the cell bandwidth can be adjusted, and other radio resource configuration parameters need not be configured, which saves the communication overhead in the process of configuring the cell bandwidth.
  • a sixth application scenario is described in the example in which the base station is used to adjust the bandwidth of the user.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the sixth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the overall load of the cell does not change much, but the traffic of some user equipments varies greatly.
  • the demand for the cell bandwidth of the user equipment changes.
  • the user bandwidth can be adaptively reduced or increased; but from the perspective of the base station, the base station still transmits information according to the originally used cell bandwidth, but the frequency range used by different user equipments can be different.
  • the processor 603 is further configured to: after determining the initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report, adjusting the user bandwidth of the user equipment according to the service volume of the user equipment, where the user bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume;
  • the transmitter 601 is further configured to send information about the adjusted user bandwidth of the processor 603 to the user equipment by using at least one of RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and a control channel.
  • the base station can adjust the user bandwidth according to Traffic is adjusted by adjusting the channel allocated to the user equipment.
  • the processor 603 is specifically configured to adjust at least one channel allocated to the user equipment according to the traffic volume of the user equipment, to obtain a user bandwidth.
  • the user bandwidth of the user equipment is adjusted according to the traffic volume of the user equipment, and the user bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume; the adjusted user bandwidth information is sent to the user equipment by using at least one of RRC signaling, the MAC CE, and the control channel.
  • the user bandwidth can be adjusted in real time according to the service volume of the user equipment, and the normal operation of the user equipment is ensured.
  • the seventh application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is applied to the SPS.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the seventh application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the transmitter 601 is configured to send the SPS resource information to the user equipment, where the SPS resource information is used to indicate resource information and beam index information allocated by the base station for the user equipment;
  • the user equipment may determine the beam according to the beam index information; when the SPS resource information does not include the beam index information, the user equipment may determine the beam according to the beam index information carried in the RRM measurement report, where the beam may be It is either a transmit beam or a receive beam.
  • the base station may indicate beam index information when the user equipment is configured through RRC signaling or when the SPS resource is activated by using the control channel.
  • the processor 603 is configured to communicate with the user equipment according to a beam corresponding to the beam index information indicated by the SPS information.
  • the base station may agree with the user equipment to use a better quality beam or use a preset beam according to the measurement result. At this time, the user equipment can transmit/receive information on a beam with better quality. Correspondingly, the base station receives/transmits information on the beam. Or, the user equipment simultaneously transmits/receives information on the preset at least one beam, and correspondingly, the base station simultaneously receives/transmits information on the at least one beam.
  • the user equipment selects a beam with better signal condition when transmitting/receiving information in the SPS manner, or simultaneously transmits and/or receives on one or more predetermined beams.
  • the base station can receive/transmit information in SPS mode on one or more predetermined beams.
  • the base station and the user equipment can preferentially select one or more beams with good signal conditions in a plurality of predetermined beam ranges according to the measurement result.
  • the base station may re-instruct the user equipment of the beam index information through RRC signaling or a MAC CE or a control channel.
  • the SPS resource information is used to indicate resource information and beam index information allocated by the base station for the user equipment; and the beam corresponding to the beam index information indicated by the SPS information is used to communicate with the user equipment, and may be sent by
  • the SPS resource information is configured to allocate resources and beams to the user equipment, and can solve the problem of wasteful communication overhead caused by dynamically configuring resources and beams for the user equipment, thereby achieving the effect of saving communication overhead.
  • An eighth application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is applied to the D2D.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the eighth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the base station allocates initial beam index information of the beam of the D2D communication to the user equipment.
  • the transmitter 601 is configured to send the resource indication information used in the D2D communication to the user equipment, where the resource indication information includes D2D resource information and initial beam index information, and is used to indicate that the user equipment uses D2D communication with other user equipments. Resources and initial beams.
  • the initial beam index information allocated by the base station may be set by the base station, or the user equipment may request the allocated initial beam index information for the user equipment after determining the beam index information of the beam with good quality according to the measurement result.
  • the D2D resource information includes time domain resource information and frequency domain resource information.
  • the cellular communication used between the base station and the user equipment and the D2D communication used between the user equipment and other user equipment can reuse time domain resources and frequency domain resources on different initial beams.
  • Receiving resource indication information sent by the base station where the resource indication information includes D2D resource information and beam index information; determining resources and beams used when using D2D communication with other user equipments according to the resource indication information, and may be based on an initial beam allocated by the base station Communicate with other user equipments to solve the problem of mutual interference between D2D communication, and the effect of improving communication quality is obtained.
  • the base station provided by the embodiment of the present invention sends the initial beam index information of the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment to the UE, and receives the RRM measurement report originating from the user equipment, where the RRM measurement report is Obtaining, after the user equipment performs RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information; determining, according to the RRM measurement report, communication with the user equipment
  • the initial beam index information can determine the signal quality of the initial beam according to the RRM measurement report, and then select the initial beam with better signal quality to communicate with the user equipment, and use the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the existing millimeter wave band.
  • the problem of data communication requirements of user equipment in a cellular communication environment cannot be met, and the effect of extending the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band is achieved.
  • FIG. 7 is a structural diagram of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the user equipment may be the UE shown in FIG. 1, and the UE may include: a receiver 701 and a transmitter 702.
  • the receiver 701 is configured to receive initial beam index information sent by the base station, where the initial beam index information is used to indicate an initial beam of a millimeter wave band allocated by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is detailed in the description in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and details are not described herein.
  • the transmitter 702 is configured to send an RRM measurement report, where the RRM measurement report is used by the user equipment to perform RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information, where the RRM measurement report is used to indicate that the base station determines to communicate with the user equipment.
  • Initial beam index information is used to indicate that the base station determines to communicate with the user equipment.
  • the user equipment may perform RRM measurement on the determined initial beam allocated by the base station, and generate an RRM measurement report according to the measurement result.
  • the user equipment may send the RRM measurement report to the LTE eNB, and the LTE eNB forwards the RRM measurement report to the millimeter wave eNB.
  • the RRM measurement report may also be sent to the millimeter wave eNB.
  • the embodiment does not limit the user equipment to the RRM measurement report. sending method.
  • the method for the user equipment to send the RRM measurement report in the following embodiments of the present invention is the same as the description of the embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • the RRM measurement may refer to a measurement for mobility management in a normal sense, a measurement method filtered by the RRC layer, or a measurement performed by means of beam training, as shown in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 . The description is not repeated here.
  • the base station determines the signal quality of the initial beam according to the RRM measurement report, and then selects the initial beam with good signal quality to communicate with the UE, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the millimeter wave band, which cannot meet the user equipment in the cellular communication environment.
  • the problem of data communication requirements can extend the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • the user equipment receives the initial beam index information sent by the base station, where the initial beam index information is used to indicate the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated by the base station for the user equipment; and the radio resource management RRM is sent.
  • Measurement report the RRM measurement report is a user equipment pair
  • the RRM measurement report is used to indicate that the base station determines initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment, and may report the signal quality of the initial beam to the base station by using the RRM measurement report.
  • the base station selects a beam with better signal quality to communicate with the user equipment, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the problem that the transmission distance of the existing millimeter wave band is short, and the data communication requirement of the user equipment in the cellular communication environment cannot be met, and the problem is reached.
  • the effect of extending the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band is not limited.
  • FIG. 8 is a structural diagram of a user equipment according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the user equipment may be the UE shown in FIG. 1, and the UE may include: a receiver 801 and a transmitter 802.
  • the receiver 801 is configured to receive initial beam index information sent by the base station, where the initial beam index information is used to indicate an initial beam of a millimeter wave band allocated by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is detailed in the description in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and details are not described herein.
  • the transmitter 802 is configured to send an RRM measurement report, where the RRM measurement report is used by the user equipment to perform RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information, where the RRM measurement report is used to indicate that the base station determines to communicate with the user equipment.
  • Initial beam index information is used to indicate that the base station determines to communicate with the user equipment.
  • the user equipment may perform RRM measurement on the determined initial beam allocated by the base station, and generate an RRM measurement report according to the measurement result.
  • the RRM measurement may refer to a measurement for mobility management in a normal sense, a measurement method filtered by the RRC layer, or a measurement performed by means of beam training, as shown in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 . The description is not repeated here.
  • the method for the user equipment to send the RRM measurement report is detailed in the description in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and details are not described herein again.
  • the base station determines the signal quality of the initial beam according to the RRM measurement report, and then selects the initial beam with good signal quality to communicate with the UE, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the millimeter wave band, which cannot meet the user equipment in the cellular communication environment.
  • the problem of data communication requirements can extend the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • the beam configuration method is described in detail in the following different application scenarios, as follows:
  • the first application scenario is described by using a user equipment in a scenario that is discontinuously received.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the first application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5:
  • the user equipment has a dormant state and an activated state, and the user equipment in the active state needs to receive the control information transmitted by the base station through the beamforming technology on the control channel, and the control information includes resource allocation control.
  • the resource allocation control instruction is used to indicate an uplink/downlink resource allocated by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the user equipment further includes a processor 803, and is also used for the transmitter. After the 802 sends the RRM measurement report, after the user equipment switches from the sleep state to the active state, determining, by the user equipment, the first initial beam index information that is greater than the first threshold by the reference signal information;
  • the receiver 801 is further configured to monitor the control information on the control channel by using an initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information determined by the processor 803.
  • the base station can agree with the user equipment to use the initial beam with better signal quality in the RRM measurement report.
  • the base station can agree with the user equipment to use the initial beam with better signal quality in the RRM measurement report.
  • At least one initial beam may be determined from the RRM measurement report according to the foregoing method, and the control information is monitored on the control channel by the determined at least one initial beam.
  • the receiver 801 is further configured to: receive, by the base station, the at least one of the radio resource control RRC signaling and the medium access control layer control meta MAC CE from each initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report.
  • the second initial beam index information the control information is monitored on the control channel by the initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information.
  • the base station may specify an initial beam for transmitting resource allocation control signaling on the control channel from the allocated initial beam, and then pass the second initial beam index information of the specified initial beam through the RRC. Signaling or MAC CE is sent to the user equipment.
  • the beam index information may be jointly determined by the first method and the second method.
  • the first method may be jointly determined by the first method and the second method.
  • the user equipment can also control the control by at least one of the following methods.
  • the channel is listening.
  • the receiver 801 is configured to receive control information in an omnidirectional manner, or receive control information in a beam range equal to or greater than an initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information, or to be smaller than the first initial beam index information.
  • the beam range of the corresponding initial beam receives the control information; or the receiver 801 is specifically configured to receive the control information in an omnidirectional manner, or to receive and control the beam range of the initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information.
  • the information, or the control information is received with a beam range smaller than the initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information.
  • the reference signal information includes at least one of a reference signal received power RSRP and a reference signal received quality RSRQ
  • the RRM measurement report includes reference signal information corresponding to each initial beam index information
  • the user equipment switches from the sleep state to the active state. After the state, the user equipment determines the first initial beam index information that the reference signal information is greater than the first threshold; and the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information is used to monitor the control information on the control channel, and the signal quality in the RRM measurement report may be used.
  • the second application scenario is described in the scenario where the user equipment is applied to the TA.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the second application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5:
  • the base station can configure the candidate beam for the user equipment in advance to improve the communication quality by avoiding the obstacle, and therefore, optionally, the receiver 801.
  • the 801 is further configured to receive candidate beam index information sent by the base station, where the candidate beam index information is used to indicate an candidate beam of a millimeter wave band allocated by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the user equipment further includes a processor 803, configured to perform RRM measurement, reference signal information, on the candidate beam indicated by each candidate beam index information received by the receiver 801 when the reference signal information of the initial beam is less than the second threshold. Include at least one of RSRP and RSRQ; determining first candidate beam index information that the reference signal information is greater than a third threshold according to the RRM measurement;
  • the transmitter 802 is further configured to send the first candidate beam index information determined by the processor 803 to the base station, where the base station is configured to communicate with the user equipment according to the candidate beam corresponding to the first candidate beam index information.
  • the base station needs to configure different TAs according to different user equipments between the user equipment and the base station.
  • the candidate beam has a longer propagation path than the initial beam allocated by the base station, resulting in a large propagation delay.
  • the uplink TA is abruptly changed. Therefore, the user equipment needs to re-determine the uplink TA.
  • the determination of the uplink TA needs to be implemented through a random access procedure.
  • the transmitter 802 is further configured to automatically send a first random access request to the base station, where the first random access request is used to instruct the base station to generate an uplink TA, and corresponding to the allocated second candidate beam index information.
  • the candidate beam and the uplink TA communicate with the user equipment, or receive a random access command sent by the base station on the control channel, where the base station uses beam tracking to determine an alternate beam and user to be used for the user equipment to be allocated.
  • the second random access request is sent to the base station according to the random access command, and the second random access request is used to indicate that the base station generates the uplink TA, and corresponding to the received first candidate beam index information.
  • the alternate beam and the uplink TA communicate with the user equipment.
  • the user equipment When the user equipment actively triggers the random access procedure, the user equipment actively sends a first random access request to the base station. When the user equipment triggers the random access procedure under the instruction of the random access instruction, the user equipment sends the second random to the base station.
  • the access process For details of the access process, refer to the description of the second application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, which is not described here.
  • the user equipment when the user equipment detects that the reference signal information of each candidate beam is smaller than the third threshold and detects that the reference signal information of the at least one initial beam is greater than the second threshold, determining that the quality of the initial beam is better, at least one The initial beam index information of the initial beam is transmitted to the base station, and the base station communicates with the base station using at least one initial beam. Or, the base station determines, by using the beam waveform technology, that the user equipment is about to leave the obstacle area and detects that the reference signal information of the at least one initial beam is greater than the second threshold, determining to communicate with the base station by using the at least one initial beam. At this time, the user equipment may re-determine the uplink TA, or may not be sure of the uplink TA.
  • the beams used by the user equipment may have different TAs, and these TAs may be for the same millimeter wave base station or for different millimeter wave base stations. Therefore, the base station may further set at least one TA group for each user equipment, each TA group includes at least one beam index information, and the uplink TA corresponding to each beam index information is the same.
  • the beam index information may be initial beam index information of the initial beam, or may be candidate beam index information of the candidate beam.
  • the beams indicated by the beam index information in one TA group may belong to the same cell or belong to different cells. Therefore, the cell identifier of the cell associated with each beam may also be identified in the TA group.
  • the receiver 801 is further configured to receive a TA group that is sent by the base station, where the TA group is a beam that the base station communicates with the user equipment, and determines that the same beam of the uplink TA is a packet, and the TA group includes the TA according to each group. a group identifier, beam index information of each beam in the packet, a cell identifier corresponding to each beam in the packet, and a time adjustment timer TAT, where the beam includes at least one of the initial beam and the candidate beam;
  • the user equipment further includes a processor 803, and is further configured to: when the TAT timeout in the TA group received by the receiver 801, detect whether the cell identifier in the TA group corresponds to beam index information in other TA groups and other TA groups The TAT does not time out; when it is detected that the cell identifier in the TA group corresponds to the beam index information in the other TA group and the TAT of the other TA group does not time out, the cell corresponding to the beam index information is determined, and the hybrid automatic corresponding to the maintenance cell is maintained.
  • the HARQ buffer and the SRS resource corresponding to the cell are released.
  • the candidate beam index information is used to receive the candidate beam index information of the millimeter wave band allocated by the base station for the user equipment; if the reference signal information of the initial beam is smaller than the second threshold, The candidate beam indicated by the beam index information is subjected to the RRM measurement; the first candidate beam index information whose reference signal information is greater than the third threshold is determined according to the RRM measurement; and the determined first candidate beam index information is sent to the base station, where When the quality of the allocated initial beam is poor, the better-quality candidate beam is used to communicate with the base station, thereby achieving an effect of improving communication efficiency.
  • the third application scenario is described in the example in which the user equipment is applied to the power control.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the third application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5:
  • the path loss in different beam directions may be different. Therefore, it is necessary to select the initial beam with the smallest path loss from the allocated initial beams, and perform communication on the selected initial beam.
  • the user equipment further includes a processor 803, configured to: after the transmitter 802 sends the RRM measurement report, measure the RSRP of the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information, to obtain path loss information of each initial beam;
  • the path loss information generates at least one power headroom PH to obtain a power headroom report PHR;
  • the transmitter 802 is further configured to send a PHR generated by the processor 803, where the PHR is used to indicate that the base station is configured to allocate uplink resources to the user equipment according to the PH and the initial beam corresponding to the PH, by using the PH and the PH.
  • the corresponding initial beam communicates with the user equipment on the corresponding uplink resource.
  • the beam index information sent by the base station may correspond to a beam located outside the beam range corresponding to the RRM measurement report, or may correspond to an initial beam located in a beam range corresponding to the RRM measurement report, or may be an adaptively determined beam. This embodiment is not limited.
  • the MAC CE can be dynamically indicated by the MAC CE to enable the user equipment to report the minimum path loss.
  • the PH of the beam is the PH of the beam.
  • the receiver 801 is further configured to receive, by the base station, a first indication of the first beam index information of the first beam in the range of the beam carrying the single initial beam;
  • the processor 803 is further configured to measure the RSRP of each first beam indicated by the first indication received by the receiver 801 to obtain path loss information of each first beam.
  • the base station does not limit the uplink transmit power of the user equipment
  • the user equipment can support multi-beam transmission on the uplink to improve air interface efficiency. If the user equipment supports multiple beams at the same time and the power is limited to a certain extent, the transmit power of the at least one beam needs to be down-converted. For details, refer to the description of the third application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. Do not repeat them.
  • the path loss information of each initial beam is obtained by measuring the RSRP of the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information; the PH is generated according to the minimum path loss information to obtain the PHR; and the PHR is transmitted, and the PHR is used to indicate the base station according to the PH and
  • the initial beam corresponding to the PH allocates an uplink resource to the user equipment, and communicates with the user equipment on the corresponding uplink resource by using the initial beam corresponding to the PH, and can select to communicate with the base station on the uplink resource corresponding to the initial beam with the smallest path loss, thereby saving The transmission power.
  • the fourth application scenario is described in the scenario where the user equipment is applied to the CSI measurement.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the fourth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5:
  • the user equipment also needs to perform CSI measurement on the initial beam to obtain CSI information to determine the quality of the initial beam according to the CSI information.
  • the user equipment further includes a processor 803, configured to perform channel state indication CSI measurement on the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information after the transmitter 802 sends the RRM measurement report, to obtain a channel quality indicator CQI of each initial beam. Generating at least one channel state indication CSI information according to the highest CQI to obtain a CSI measurement report;
  • the transmitter 802 is further configured to send a CSI measurement report generated by the processor 803, where the CSI measurement report is used to instruct the base station to communicate with the user equipment according to the CSI information and the initial beam corresponding to the CSI information. letter.
  • the user equipment needs to obtain the beam in the range of the RRM measurement report, and the user equipment first needs to obtain the initial beam corresponding to the RRM measurement report.
  • the specific acquisition method is shown in the fourth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 . The description is not repeated here.
  • the user equipment may filter the CSI information including the highest CQI from each CSI information, and generate a CSI measurement report according to the selected at least one CSI information.
  • the CSI information includes at least one of CQI, PMI, and RI, and the user equipment may send at least one of CQI, PMI, and RI to the base station at the same time or at different times.
  • the MAC CE may be dynamically indicated by the MAC CE to cause the user equipment to report the CSI information with the highest CQI.
  • the receiver 801 is further configured to receive, by the base station, a second indication of the second beam index information of the second beam in the range of the beam carrying the single initial beam;
  • the processor 803 is further configured to perform CSI measurement on each of the second beams indicated by the second indication received by the receiver 801 to obtain CQIs of the respective second beams.
  • the CSI measurement of each initial beam is performed by performing channel state indication CSI measurement on the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information; the CSI measurement report is generated according to the highest CQI, and the CSI measurement report is sent; the CSI measurement report is used to indicate
  • the base station communicates with the user equipment according to the CSI information and the initial beam corresponding to the CSI information, and can select the initial beam with the highest CQI to communicate with the base station, thereby improving communication efficiency.
  • the fifth application scenario is described in the scenario where the user equipment is used to adjust the bandwidth of the cell.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the fifth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5:
  • the base station when the traffic of each user equipment that is accessed by the cell changes, and the load of the cell changes, the base station needs to adjust the cell bandwidth of the cell, and the specific adjustment method is shown in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the description of the fifth application scenario is not described here.
  • the adjusted cell can use multiple channels such that multiple channels share the same HARQ entity.
  • the entire cell may be composed of a plurality of channels of the same bandwidth, the base station may transmit the common information on the channel located at the central frequency point, or the base station may transmit the common information on the center frequency of each channel.
  • the receiver 801 is further configured to receive, by using a broadcast, an adjusted cell bandwidth sent by the base station.
  • the information and the information of the central frequency point, or the RRC signaling sent by the receiving base station, the RRC signaling carries the information of the adjusted cell bandwidth and the information of the central frequency point; the adjusted cell bandwidth is determined by the base station according to at least one user.
  • the service volume of the device is adjusted, and the cell bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume.
  • the center frequency is the center frequency or the specified frequency in the frequency range corresponding to the adjusted cell bandwidth; if the adjusted cell has the same bandwidth
  • the channel composition receives the common information sent by the base station on the channel located at the center frequency point, or receives the transmission common information sent by the base station on the center frequency of each channel.
  • the user equipment may receive the adjusted information of the cell bandwidth and the information of the center frequency point in a manner corresponding to the manner in which the base station sends the information of the adjusted cell bandwidth and the information of the center frequency point, and the information according to the center frequency point is located at the center frequency.
  • the public information is received on the channel of the point, or the public information is received on the center frequency of each channel.
  • the adjusted cell bandwidth is adjusted by the base station according to the service volume of the user equipment, and the cell bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume.
  • the center frequency point is the center frequency or the specified frequency within the frequency range corresponding to the adjusted cell bandwidth.
  • the cell bandwidth can be adjusted only without configuring other radio resource configuration parameters, which saves communication overhead in the process of configuring cell bandwidth.
  • the sixth application scenario is described in the example that the user equipment is used to adjust the bandwidth of the user.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the sixth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5:
  • the overall load of the cell does not change much, but the traffic of some user equipments varies greatly.
  • the demand for the cell bandwidth of the user equipment changes.
  • the user bandwidth can be adaptively reduced or increased; but from the perspective of the base station, the base station still transmits information according to the originally used cell bandwidth, but the frequency range used by different user equipments can be different.
  • the base station when the base station adjusts the user bandwidth, the base station can adjust the user bandwidth by adjusting the channel allocated to the user equipment according to the traffic volume.
  • the receiver 801 is further configured to: receive, by using at least one of the RRC signaling, the MAC CE, and the control channel, information about the adjusted user bandwidth sent by the base station, where the adjusted user bandwidth is the traffic volume of the base station according to the user equipment. Adjusted, and the user bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic; the control channel of the channel that constitutes the user bandwidth is monitored.
  • the user equipment may receive the adjusted user bandwidth information in a manner corresponding to the manner in which the base station sends the adjusted user bandwidth information, and listen to the channel that constitutes the user bandwidth.
  • the remaining bandwidth after adjusting the user bandwidth adjustment may be continuous or discontinuous in the frequency domain.
  • the adjusted user bandwidth is adjusted by the base station according to the service volume of the user equipment, and the user bandwidth and the traffic volume are positive.
  • the related relationship can adjust the user bandwidth in real time according to the service volume of the user equipment, and ensure the normal operation of the user equipment.
  • the seventh application scenario is described in the scenario where the user equipment is applied to the SPS.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the seventh application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5:
  • the receiver 801 is configured to receive SPS resource information sent by the base station.
  • the user equipment may determine the beam according to the beam index information; when the SPS resource information does not include the beam index information, the user equipment may determine the beam according to the beam index information carried in the RRM measurement report, where the beam may be It is either a transmit beam or a receive beam.
  • the base station may indicate beam index information when the user equipment is configured through RRC signaling or when the SPS resource is activated by using the control channel.
  • the user equipment further includes a processor 803, configured to determine, according to the SPS resource information, resource information and beam index information allocated by the base station for the user equipment.
  • the base station may agree with the user equipment to use a better quality beam or use a preset beam according to the measurement result. At this time, the user equipment can transmit/receive information on a beam with better quality. Correspondingly, the base station receives/transmits information on the beam. Or, the user equipment simultaneously transmits/receives information on the preset at least one beam, and correspondingly, the base station simultaneously receives/transmits information on the at least one beam.
  • the user equipment selects a beam with better signal condition when transmitting/receiving information in the SPS manner, or simultaneously transmits and/or receives on one or more predetermined beams.
  • the base station can receive/transmit information in SPS mode on one or more predetermined beams.
  • the base station and the user equipment can preferentially select one or more beams with good signal conditions in a plurality of predetermined beam ranges according to the measurement result.
  • the base station when the base station re-indicates the beam index information according to the measurement result or the recommended beam index information of the user equipment, only the beam index information in the SPS resource information needs to be modified, and There is no need to modify resource information. At this time, the base station may re-instruct the user equipment of the beam index information through RRC signaling or a MAC CE or a control channel.
  • the resource information and the beam index information allocated by the base station for the user equipment are determined according to the SPS resource information, and the resource and the beam can be configured by receiving the SPS resource information, and the resource and the beam can be dynamically configured for the user equipment.
  • the problem of wasted communication overhead is achieved, and the effect of saving communication overhead is achieved.
  • An eighth application scenario is described in the example in which the user equipment is applied to the D2D.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the eighth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5:
  • the base station allocates initial beam index information of the beam of the D2D communication to the user equipment.
  • the receiver 801 receives resource indication information sent by the base station, where the resource indication information includes D2D resource information and initial beam index information.
  • the user equipment further includes a processor 803, configured to determine, according to the resource indication information received by the receiver 801, resources and initial beams used when D2D communication is adopted with other user equipments.
  • the beam index information allocated by the base station may be set by the base station, or may be, after the user equipment determines the beam index information of the beam with good quality according to the measurement result, requesting the initial beam index information allocated to the base station, for the user equipment and D2D communication between other user equipments.
  • the D2D resource information includes time domain resource information and frequency domain resource information.
  • the cellular communication used between the base station and the user equipment and the D2D communication used between the user equipment and other user equipment can reuse time domain resources and frequency domain resources on different initial beams.
  • the user equipment provided by the embodiment of the present invention receives the initial beam index information sent by the base station, where the initial beam index information is used to indicate the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated by the base station for the user equipment; and the radio resource management RRM is sent.
  • the RRM measurement report is obtained by the user equipment performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information, where the RRM measurement report is used to indicate that the base station determines initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment,
  • the RRM measurement report reports the signal quality of the initial beam to the base station, so that the base station selects a beam with better signal quality to communicate with the user equipment, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the existing millimeter wave band, which cannot meet the cellular communication environment.
  • the problem of the data communication requirement of the user equipment reaches the effect of extending the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • the beam configuration method may include:
  • Step 901 The base station sends initial beam index information of the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is used to indicate an initial beam used by the base station to send downlink information to the user equipment, and is pre-configured by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is associated with antenna weights or codebook information used by the base station to transmit downlink information to determine information such as the direction and width of the initial beam.
  • the direction of the initial beam refers to the angle information of the initial beam with respect to the horizontal direction and/or the vertical direction.
  • the initial beam index information is also associated with the feature information of the initial beam, and the base station transmits the initial beam-specific feature information on different initial beams, so that the user equipment identifies different initial beams according to different feature information, as shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the description in the embodiment is not described here.
  • Step 902 The base station receives an RRM measurement report originating from the user equipment, where the RRM measurement report is obtained by performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information by the user equipment.
  • Step 903 The base station determines initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report.
  • the base station determines the signal quality of the initial beam according to the RRM measurement report, and then selects the initial beam with good signal quality to communicate with the UE, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the millimeter wave band, which cannot meet the user equipment in the cellular communication environment.
  • the problem of data communication requirements can extend the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • the beam configuration method sends the initial beam index information of the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment to the UE, and receives the RRM measurement report originating from the user equipment, and the RRM measurement is performed.
  • the report is obtained by the user equipment performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information; determining initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report, and determining the signal quality of the initial beam according to the RRM measurement report, and then
  • the initial beam with good signal quality is selected to communicate with the user equipment, and the beamforming technology is used to solve the short transmission distance of the existing millimeter wave band, which cannot meet the number of user equipments in the cellular communication environment. According to the problem of communication demand, the effect of extending the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band is achieved.
  • Another embodiment of the present invention provides a beam configuration method, where the beam configuration method may include:
  • Step 901 The base station sends initial beam index information of the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is used to indicate a beam used by the base station to send downlink information to the user equipment, and is configured by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is associated with antenna weights or codebook information used by the base station to transmit downlink information to determine information such as the direction and width of the initial beam.
  • the direction of the initial beam refers to the angle information of the initial beam with respect to the horizontal direction and/or the vertical direction.
  • the beam direction of an initial beam is a direction of 30°-60° with respect to the horizontal direction, or, relative to the vertical direction. 20°-40° direction, etc.
  • the initial beam index information is also associated with the feature information of the initial beam, and the base station transmits the initial beam-specific feature information on different initial beams, so that the user equipment identifies different initial beams according to different feature information, as shown in FIG. 2 .
  • the description in the embodiment is not described here.
  • the base station may configure at least one initial beam for the user equipment, and send initial beam index information of each initial beam in the at least one initial beam to the user equipment, so that the user equipment explicitly indicates on which initial beam the base station transmits. Downstream information.
  • Step 902 The base station receives an RRM measurement report originating from the user equipment, where the RRM measurement report is obtained by performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information by the user equipment.
  • Step 903 The base station determines initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report.
  • the base station determines the signal quality of the initial beam according to the RRM measurement report, and then selects the initial beam with good signal quality to communicate with the UE, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the millimeter wave band, which cannot meet the user equipment in the cellular communication environment.
  • the problem of data communication requirements can extend the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • the beam configuration method is described in detail in the following different application scenarios, as follows:
  • the first application scenario is described by using a base station in a scenario of discontinuous reception.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the first application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the user equipment has a dormant state and an activated state, and the user equipment in the activated state needs to receive the base station through the beam monitoring control channel allocated by the base station, thereby receiving the base station through the beamforming technology on the control channel.
  • the control information is sent, where the control information includes a resource allocation control command, and the resource allocation control command is used to indicate an uplink/downlink resource allocated by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the user equipment is switched from the dormant state to the active state, the beam that may receive the resource allocation control signaling when the user equipment is in the active state is no longer applicable. Therefore, the user equipment also needs to determine the control channel that needs to be monitored this time. Beam.
  • This embodiment provides two methods for determining the beam of the control channel to be monitored. The following two methods are specifically described:
  • the base station determines initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report, including:
  • the base station determines, from the reference signal information corresponding to each initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report, the first initial beam index information that the reference signal information is greater than the first threshold, where the reference signal information includes at least one of RSRP and RSRQ;
  • the base station sends control information to the user equipment on the control channel by using the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information, and the user equipment is configured to respond to the first initial beam index information after the user equipment is used to switch from the sleep state to the active state.
  • Initial beam steering control information
  • the base station can agree with the user equipment to use the initial beam with better signal quality in the RRM measurement report.
  • the base station can agree with the user equipment to use the initial beam with better signal quality in the RRM measurement report.
  • the base station controls at least one of the RRC signaling and the medium access control layer control element MAC CE by using the radio resource control RRC signaling, and specifies the second initial beam index information from each initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report, and specifies The initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information is used to send control information to the user equipment on the control channel.
  • the base station may specify an initial beam for transmitting resource allocation control signaling on the control channel from the allocated initial beam, and then pass the second initial beam index information of the specified initial beam through the RRC. Signaling or MAC CE is sent to the user equipment.
  • the beam index information may be jointly determined by the first method and the second method.
  • the first method may be jointly determined by the first method and the second method.
  • the first initial beam index information whose reference signal information is greater than the first threshold is determined from the reference signal information corresponding to each initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report, and the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information is controlled.
  • the control information is sent to the user equipment on the channel, and the initial information of the signal quality in the RRM measurement report can be used to transmit the control information, thereby improving communication efficiency.
  • the second application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is applied to the TA.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the second application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the provided beam configuration method also includes:
  • the base station sends the candidate beam index information of the candidate beam of the millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment to the user equipment;
  • the base station receives first candidate beam index information that is selected and sent by the user equipment from each candidate beam index information, where the first candidate beam index information is that the reference signal information of the initial beam is smaller than a second threshold, and each candidate beam index is indexed.
  • the determined reference signal information is greater than the third threshold candidate beam index information, and the reference signal information includes at least one of RSRP and RSRQ;
  • the base station communicates with the user equipment according to the candidate beam corresponding to the received first candidate beam index information.
  • the process of configuring the candidate beam for the user equipment is described in detail in the description of the second application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3, and details are not described herein.
  • the base station communicates with the user equipment according to the candidate beam corresponding to the received at least one candidate beam index information.
  • the base station may also use the beam tracking technology to detect whether the user equipment is about to enter the obstacle area, when the base station detects When the user equipment is about to enter the obstacle area, the user equipment is triggered to perform RRM measurement on the candidate beam.
  • the base station needs to configure different TAs according to different user equipments between the user equipment and the base station.
  • the candidate beam has a longer propagation path than the initial beam allocated by the base station, resulting in a large propagation delay.
  • the uplink TA is abruptly changed. Therefore, the user equipment needs to re-determine the uplink TA.
  • the determination of the uplink TA needs to be implemented through a random access procedure.
  • the user equipment When the user equipment actively triggers the random access procedure, the user equipment actively sends a first random access request to the base station, and the base station communicates with the user equipment according to the candidate beam corresponding to the received first candidate beam index information. , including:
  • the base station communicates with the user equipment according to the candidate beam corresponding to the received first candidate beam index information and the uplink TA.
  • the user equipment When the user equipment triggers the random access procedure under the instruction of the random access command, the user equipment sends a second random access request to the base station, and the method further includes:
  • the base station uses beam tracking to determine that the candidate beam to be allocated for the user equipment is to communicate with the user equipment;
  • the base station sends a random access instruction to the user equipment on the control channel
  • the base station receives the second random access request sent by the user equipment according to the random access command, and generates an uplink TA according to the second random access request;
  • the base station communicates with the user equipment according to the candidate beam corresponding to the allocated second candidate beam index information and the uplink TA.
  • the beams used by the user equipment may have different TAs, and these TAs may be for the same millimeter wave base station or for different millimeter wave base stations. Therefore, the base station may further set at least one TA group for each user equipment, each TA group includes at least one beam index information, and the uplink TA corresponding to each beam index information is the same.
  • the beam index information may be initial beam index information of the initial beam, or may be candidate beam index information of the candidate beam.
  • the beams indicated by the beam index information in one TA group may belong to the same cell or belong to different cells. Therefore, the cell identifier of the cell associated with each beam may also be identified in the TA group.
  • the method further includes:
  • the base station determines the same beam of the uplink TA as one packet, and the beam includes at least one of an initial beam and an alternate beam;
  • the base station generates a TA group according to each group, and the TA group includes a TA group identifier, beam index information of each beam in the packet, a cell identifier corresponding to each beam in the packet, and a time adjustment timer TAT;
  • the base station sends the generated TA group to the user equipment.
  • the base station may reconfigure the TA group for the user equipment according to the new uplink TA and allocate the cell associated with the beam index information and the beam index information of the TA group.
  • the base station can adjust the uplink TA and the TA group by using TA cmd.
  • the third application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is applied to the power control.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the third application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the path loss in different beam directions may be different. Therefore, it is necessary to select the initial beam with the smallest path loss from the allocated initial beams, and perform communication on the selected initial beam.
  • the base station further includes:
  • the base station receives the power headroom report PHR from the user equipment, where the PHR includes a power headroom PH, and the PH is a road loss information obtained by measuring the RSRP of each initial beam, and is generated according to the minimum path loss information;
  • the base station allocates uplink resources to the user equipment according to the PH and the initial beam corresponding to the PH;
  • the base station communicates with the user equipment on the corresponding uplink resource by using the initial beam corresponding to the PH.
  • the beam index information sent by the base station may correspond to a beam located outside the beam range corresponding to the RRM measurement report, or may correspond to an initial beam located in a beam range corresponding to the RRM measurement report, or may be an adaptively determined beam. This embodiment is not limited.
  • the base station After receiving the PHR, the base station allocates uplink resources to the user equipment according to the beam index information and the PH in the PHR, so that the user equipment sends uplink information on the corresponding initial beam using power that is suitable and does not exceed the maximum allowed transmit power of the user equipment.
  • the MAC CE can be dynamically indicated by the MAC CE to enable the user equipment to report the minimum path loss.
  • the PH of the beam is the PH of the beam.
  • the method before the base station receives the power headroom report PHR from the user equipment, the method further includes:
  • the base station sends a first indication of the first beam index information of the first beam in the range of the beam carrying the single initial beam to the user equipment, where the first indication is used to indicate that the user equipment measures the RSRP of the first beam.
  • the base station does not limit the uplink transmit power of the user equipment
  • the user equipment can support multi-beam transmission on the uplink to improve air interface efficiency. If the user equipment supports multiple beams at the same time and the power is limited to a certain extent, the transmit power of the at least one beam needs to be down-converted. For details, refer to the description of the third application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. Do not repeat them.
  • the PHR By receiving the PHR from the user equipment, the PHR includes a PH, and the PH is a measurement of the RSRP of each initial beam to obtain path loss information, which is generated according to the minimum path loss information; and the user is based on the PH and the initial beam corresponding to the PH.
  • the device allocates an uplink resource, and communicates with the user equipment on the corresponding uplink resource by using the initial beam corresponding to the PH, and can select to communicate with the user equipment on the uplink resource corresponding to the initial beam with the smallest path loss, thereby saving the transmission power.
  • the fourth application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is applied to the CSI measurement.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the fourth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the user equipment also needs to perform CSI measurement on the initial beam to obtain CSI information to determine the quality of the initial beam according to the CSI information.
  • the user equipment needs to obtain the beam in the range of the RRM measurement report, and the user equipment first needs to obtain the initial beam corresponding to the RRM measurement report.
  • the specific acquisition method is shown in the fourth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 . The description is not repeated here.
  • the base station further includes:
  • the base station receives the channel state indication CSI measurement report from the user equipment, where the CSI measurement report includes CSI information, and the CSI information is obtained by performing CSI measurement on each initial beam to obtain a channel quality indicator CQI, which is generated according to the highest CQI;
  • the base station communicates with the user equipment according to the CSI information and the initial beam corresponding to the CSI information.
  • the MAC CE may be dynamically indicated by the MAC CE to cause the user equipment to report the CSI information with the highest CQI.
  • the method before receiving, by the base station, the channel state indication CSI measurement report originating from the user equipment, the method further includes:
  • the base station sends a second indication of the second beam index information of the second beam in the range of the beam carrying the single initial beam to the user equipment, where the second indication is used to indicate that the user equipment performs CSI measurement on the second beam.
  • the CSI measurement report includes a CSI measurement report, where the CSI measurement report includes CSI measurement for each initial beam to obtain a CQI, which is generated according to the highest CQI, and an initial corresponding to the CSI information according to the CSI information.
  • the beam communicates with the user equipment, and the initial beam with the highest CQI can be selected to communicate with the user equipment to improve communication efficiency.
  • the fifth application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is used to adjust the bandwidth of the cell.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the fifth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the base station when the traffic of each user equipment that is accessed by the cell changes, and the load of the cell changes, the base station needs to adjust the cell bandwidth of the cell, and the specific adjustment method is shown in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the description of the fifth application scenario is not described here.
  • the base station further includes:
  • the base station adjusts the cell bandwidth according to the traffic volume of the user equipment, and the cell bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume;
  • the base station broadcasts the adjusted information of the cell bandwidth and the information of the central frequency point to each user equipment, or sends the information of the adjusted cell bandwidth and the information of the central frequency point to each user equipment through RRC signaling, and the central frequency point It is the center frequency or the specified frequency in the frequency range corresponding to the adjusted cell bandwidth.
  • the adjusted cell can use multiple channels such that multiple channels share the same HARQ entity.
  • the entire cell may be composed of a plurality of channels of the same bandwidth
  • the base station may transmit the common information on the channel located at the central frequency point, or the base station may transmit the common information on the center frequency of each channel. That is, if the adjusted cell is composed of channels having the same bandwidth, the method further includes:
  • the base station transmits public information to each user equipment on a channel located at a central frequency point, or transmits public information to each user equipment at a center frequency of each channel.
  • the cell bandwidth is adjusted according to the traffic volume of the at least one user equipment, and the cell bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume; the adjusted cell bandwidth information and the central frequency point information are broadcast to each user equipment, or adjusted by RRC signaling.
  • the information of the cell bandwidth and the information of the center frequency are sent to the user equipments, and only the cell bandwidth can be adjusted, and other radio resource configuration parameters need not be configured, which saves the communication overhead in the process of configuring the cell bandwidth.
  • a sixth application scenario is described in the example in which the base station is used to adjust the bandwidth of the user.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the sixth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the overall load of the cell does not change much, but the traffic of some user equipments varies greatly.
  • the demand for the cell bandwidth of the user equipment changes.
  • the user bandwidth can be adaptively reduced or increased; but from the perspective of the base station, the base station still transmits information based on the originally used cell bandwidth, but different The frequency range used by the user equipment can vary.
  • the base station further includes:
  • the base station adjusts the user bandwidth of the user equipment according to the service volume of the user equipment, and the user bandwidth is positively correlated with the service volume;
  • the base station sends the adjusted user bandwidth information to the user equipment by using at least one of RRC signaling, a MAC CE, and a control channel.
  • the base station can adjust the user bandwidth by adjusting the channel allocated to the user equipment according to the traffic volume. Specifically, the base station adjusts the user bandwidth of the user equipment according to the service volume of the user equipment, including:
  • the base station adjusts the channel allocated to the user equipment according to the traffic volume of the user equipment, and obtains the user bandwidth.
  • the user bandwidth of the user equipment is adjusted according to the traffic volume of the user equipment, and the user bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume; the adjusted user bandwidth information is sent to the user equipment by using at least one of RRC signaling, the MAC CE, and the control channel.
  • the user bandwidth can be adjusted in real time according to the service volume of the user equipment, and the normal operation of the user equipment is ensured.
  • the seventh application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is applied to the SPS.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the seventh application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the transmitter 601 is configured to send the SPS resource information to the user equipment, where the SPS resource information is used to indicate resource information and beam index information allocated by the base station for the user equipment;
  • the user equipment may determine the beam according to the beam index information; when the SPS resource information does not include the beam index information, the user equipment may determine the beam according to the beam index information carried in the RRM measurement report, where the beam may be It is either a transmit beam or a receive beam.
  • the base station may indicate beam index information when the user equipment is configured through RRC signaling or when the SPS resource is activated by using the control channel.
  • the processor 603 is configured to communicate with the user equipment according to a beam corresponding to the beam index information indicated by the SPS information.
  • the base station may agree with the user equipment to use a better quality beam or use a preset beam according to the measurement result. At this time, the user equipment can transmit/receive information on a beam with better quality. Correspondingly, the base station receives/transmits information on the beam. Or, the user equipment simultaneously transmits/receives information on the preset at least one beam, and correspondingly, the base station simultaneously receives/transmits information on the at least one beam.
  • the user equipment selects a beam with better signal condition when transmitting/receiving information in the SPS manner, or simultaneously transmits and/or receives on one or more predetermined beams.
  • the base station can receive/transmit information in SPS mode on one or more predetermined beams.
  • the base station and the user equipment can preferentially select one or more beams with good signal conditions in a plurality of predetermined beam ranges according to the measurement result.
  • the base station when the base station re-instructs the beam index information according to the measurement result or the recommended beam index information of the user equipment, only the beam index information in the SPS resource information needs to be modified, and the resource information does not need to be modified. At this time, the base station may re-instruct the user equipment of the beam index information through RRC signaling or a MAC CE or a control channel.
  • the SPS resource information is used to indicate resource information and beam index information allocated by the base station for the user equipment; and the beam corresponding to the beam index information indicated by the SPS information is used to communicate with the user equipment, and may be sent by
  • the SPS resource information is configured to allocate resources and beams to the user equipment, and can solve the problem of wasteful communication overhead caused by dynamically configuring resources and beams for the user equipment, thereby achieving the effect of saving communication overhead.
  • An eighth application scenario is described in the scenario where the base station is applied to the D2D.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the eighth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3:
  • the base station allocates initial beam index information of the beam of the D2D communication to the user equipment.
  • the transmitter 601 is configured to send the resource indication information used in the D2D communication to the user equipment, where the resource indication information includes D2D resource information and initial beam index information, and is used to indicate that the user equipment uses D2D communication with other user equipments. Resources and initial beams.
  • the beam index information allocated by the base station may be set by the base station, or may be, after the user equipment determines the beam index information of the beam with good quality according to the measurement result, requesting the initial beam index information allocated to the base station, for the user equipment and D2D communication between other user equipments.
  • the D2D resource information includes time domain resource information and frequency domain resource information.
  • the cellular communication used between the base station and the user equipment and the D2D communication used between the user equipment and other user equipment can reuse time domain resources and frequency domain resources on different initial beams.
  • Receiving resource indication information sent by the base station where the resource indication information includes D2D resource information and beam index information; determining resources and beams used when using D2D communication with other user equipments according to the resource indication information, and may be based on an initial beam allocated by the base station Communicate with other user equipments to solve the problem of mutual interference between D2D communication, and the effect of improving communication quality is obtained.
  • the beam configuration method provided by the embodiment of the present invention sends the initial beam index information of the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated to the user equipment to the UE, and receives the RRM measurement report originating from the user equipment, and the RRM measurement is performed.
  • the report is obtained by the user equipment performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information; determining initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment according to the RRM measurement report, and determining the signal quality of the initial beam according to the RRM measurement report, and then
  • the initial beam with good signal quality is selected to communicate with the user equipment, and the beamforming technology is used to solve the problem that the transmission distance of the existing millimeter wave band is short, and the data communication requirement of the user equipment in the cellular communication environment cannot be met, and the problem is extended.
  • the effect of the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band is used to solve the problem that the transmission distance of the existing millimeter wave band is short, and the data communication requirement of the user equipment in the cellular communication environment cannot be met, and the problem is extended. The effect of the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of a method of a beam configuration method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the beam configuration method may include:
  • Step 1001 The user equipment receives initial beam index information sent by the base station, where the initial beam index information is used to indicate an initial beam of a millimeter wave band allocated by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is detailed in the description in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and details are not described herein.
  • Step 1002 The user equipment sends an RRM measurement report, where the RRM measurement report is obtained by the user equipment performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information, where the RRM measurement report is used to indicate that the base station determines the initial communication with the user equipment. Beam index information.
  • the user equipment may perform RRM measurement on the determined initial beam allocated by the base station, and generate an RRM measurement report according to the measurement result.
  • the user equipment may send the RRM measurement report to the LTE eNB, and the LTE eNB forwards the RRM measurement report to the millimeter wave eNB.
  • the RRM measurement report may also be sent to the millimeter wave eNB.
  • the embodiment does not limit the user equipment to the RRM measurement report. sending method.
  • the method for the user equipment to send the RRM measurement report in the following embodiments of the present invention is the same as the description of the embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • the RRM measurement may refer to a measurement for mobility management in a usual sense, a measurement method filtered by the RRC layer, or a measurement performed by means of beam training, as shown in FIG.
  • the description in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2 is not described herein.
  • the base station determines the signal quality of the initial beam according to the RRM measurement report, and then selects the initial beam with good signal quality to communicate with the UE, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the millimeter wave band, which cannot meet the user equipment in the cellular communication environment.
  • the problem of data communication requirements can extend the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • the beam configuration method receives the initial beam index information sent by the base station, and the initial beam index information is used to indicate the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated by the base station for the user equipment;
  • the RRM measurement report is obtained by the user equipment performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information, where the RRM measurement report is used to indicate that the base station determines initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment, which can be
  • the RRM measurement report reports the signal quality of the initial beam to the base station, so that the base station selects a beam with better signal quality to communicate with the user equipment, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the existing millimeter wave band, which cannot meet the cellular communication environment.
  • the problem of the data communication requirement of the user equipment reaches the effect of extending the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • a further embodiment of the present invention provides a beam configuration method, which may include:
  • Step 1001 The user equipment receives initial beam index information sent by the base station, where the initial beam index information is used to indicate an initial beam of a millimeter wave band allocated by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the initial beam index information is detailed in the description in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and details are not described herein.
  • Step 1002 The user equipment sends an RRM measurement report, where the RRM measurement report is obtained by the user equipment performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information, where the RRM measurement report is used to indicate that the base station determines the initial communication with the user equipment. Beam index information.
  • the user equipment may perform RRM measurement on the determined initial beam allocated by the base station, and generate an RRM measurement report according to the measurement result.
  • the user equipment may send the RRM measurement report to the LTE eNB, and the LTE eNB forwards the RRM measurement report to the millimeter wave eNB.
  • the RRM measurement report may also be sent to the millimeter wave eNB.
  • the embodiment does not limit the user equipment to the RRM measurement report. sending method.
  • the method for the user equipment to send the RRM measurement report in the following embodiments of the present invention is the same as the description of the embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • RRM measurement can refer to the measurement for mobility management in the usual sense, which is through RRC.
  • the measurement method of the layer filtering may also refer to the measurement by means of beam training. For details, refer to the description in the embodiment shown in FIG. 2, and details are not described herein.
  • the base station determines the signal quality of the initial beam according to the RRM measurement report, and then selects the initial beam with good signal quality to communicate with the UE, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the millimeter wave band, which cannot meet the user equipment in the cellular communication environment.
  • the problem of data communication requirements can extend the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • the beam configuration method is described in detail in the following different application scenarios, as follows:
  • the first application scenario is described by using a user equipment in a scenario that is discontinuously received.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the first application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5:
  • the user equipment has a dormant state and an activated state, and the user equipment in the active state needs to receive the control information transmitted by the base station through the beamforming technology on the control channel, and the control information includes resource allocation control.
  • the resource allocation control instruction is used to indicate an uplink/downlink resource allocated by the base station to the user equipment.
  • the first method if the RRM measurement report includes reference signal information corresponding to each initial beam index information, and the reference signal information includes at least one of RSRP and RSRQ, after the user equipment sends the RRM measurement report, the method further includes:
  • the user equipment After the user equipment is switched from the dormant state to the activated state, the user equipment determines first reference beam index information that the reference signal information is greater than the first threshold;
  • the user equipment listens to the control information on the control channel by using the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information.
  • the base station can agree with the user equipment to use the initial beam with better signal quality in the RRM measurement report.
  • the base station can agree with the user equipment to use the initial beam with better signal quality in the RRM measurement report.
  • At least one initial beam may be determined from the RRM measurement report according to the foregoing method, and the control information is monitored on the control channel by the determined at least one initial beam.
  • the second method, method also includes:
  • the user equipment receives, by the base station, the second initial beam index information specified in each initial beam index information in the RRM measurement report by at least one of the radio resource control RRC signaling and the medium access control layer control meta MAC CE;
  • the user equipment listens to the control information on the control channel by using an initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information.
  • the base station may specify an initial beam for transmitting resource allocation control signaling on the control channel from the allocated initial beam, and then pass the second initial beam index information of the specified initial beam through the RRC. Signaling or MAC CE is sent to the user equipment.
  • the beam index information may be jointly determined by the first method and the second method.
  • the first method may be jointly determined by the first method and the second method.
  • the user equipment can also monitor the control channel by using at least one of the following manners.
  • the user equipment monitors the control information on the control channel by using the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information, including: the user equipment receives the control information in an omnidirectional manner, or is greater than or equal to the first initial beam index information.
  • the beam range of the initial beam receives the control information, or receives the control information with a beam range smaller than the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information;
  • the user equipment monitors the control information on the control channel by using the initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information, including: the user equipment receives the control information in an omnidirectional manner, or the initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information is greater than or equal to
  • the beam range receives the control information, or receives the control information with a beam range smaller than the initial beam corresponding to the second initial beam index information.
  • the reference signal information includes at least one of a reference signal received power RSRP and a reference signal received quality RSRQ
  • the RRM measurement report includes reference signal information corresponding to each initial beam index information
  • the user equipment switches from the sleep state to the active state. After the state, the user equipment determines the first initial beam index information that the reference signal information is greater than the first threshold; and the initial beam corresponding to the first initial beam index information is used to monitor the control information on the control channel, and the signal quality in the RRM measurement report may be used.
  • the second application scenario is described in the scenario where the user equipment is applied to the TA, and the application is used as an example.
  • the scenario corresponds to the second application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5:
  • the base station can configure the candidate beam for the user equipment in advance to improve the communication quality by avoiding the obstacle. Therefore, the method is optional. Also includes:
  • the user equipment receives the candidate beam index information sent by the base station, where the candidate beam index information is used to indicate the candidate beam of the millimeter wave band allocated by the base station to the user equipment;
  • the user equipment performs RRM measurement on the candidate beam indicated by each candidate beam index information, where the reference signal information includes at least one of RSRP and RSRQ;
  • the user equipment sends the determined first candidate beam index information to the base station, where the base station is configured to communicate with the candidate beam user equipment according to the first candidate beam index information.
  • the base station needs to configure different TAs according to different user equipments between the user equipment and the base station.
  • the candidate beam has a longer propagation path than the initial beam allocated by the base station, resulting in a large propagation delay.
  • the uplink TA is abruptly changed. Therefore, the user equipment needs to re-determine the uplink TA.
  • the determination of the uplink TA needs to be implemented through a random access procedure.
  • the method further includes:
  • the user equipment automatically sends a first random access request to the base station, where the first random access request is used to instruct the base station to generate an uplink time advance TA, and the candidate beam and the uplink TA corresponding to the allocated second candidate beam index information User equipment communicates; or,
  • the user equipment receives the random access command sent by the base station on the control channel, where the base station uses the beam tracking to determine that the candidate beam to be allocated for the user equipment is used to communicate with the user equipment, and is sent according to the random access command.
  • the base station sends a second random access request, where the second random access request is used to instruct the base station to generate an uplink TA, and communicates with the user equipment according to the candidate beam and the uplink TA corresponding to the received first candidate beam index information.
  • the user equipment When the user equipment actively triggers the random access procedure, the user equipment actively sends the first random to the base station.
  • the user equipment triggers the random access procedure under the instruction of the random access command the user equipment sends a second random access request to the base station, and the specific process is shown in the second application in the embodiment shown in FIG. The description of the scene is not described here.
  • the user equipment when the user equipment detects that the reference signal information of each candidate beam is smaller than the third threshold and detects that the reference signal information of the at least one initial beam is greater than the second threshold, determining that the quality of the initial beam is better, at least one The initial beam index information of the initial beam is transmitted to the base station, and the base station communicates with the base station using at least one initial beam. Or, the base station determines, by using the beam waveform technology, that the user equipment is about to leave the obstacle area and detects that the reference signal information of the at least one initial beam is greater than the second threshold, determining to communicate with the base station by using the at least one initial beam. At this time, the user equipment may re-determine the uplink TA, or may not be sure of the uplink TA.
  • the beams used by the user equipment may have different TAs, and these TAs may be for the same millimeter wave base station or for different millimeter wave base stations. Therefore, the base station may further set at least one TA group for each user equipment, each TA group includes at least one beam index information, and the uplink TA corresponding to each beam index information is the same.
  • the beam index information may be initial beam index information of the initial beam, or may be candidate beam index information of the candidate beam.
  • the beams indicated by the beam index information in one TA group may belong to the same cell or belong to different cells. Therefore, the cell identifier of the cell associated with each beam may also be identified in the TA group.
  • the method further includes:
  • the user equipment receives the TA group sent by the base station, and the TA group is the base station that determines the same uplink beam of the uplink TA as a packet in the beam that communicates with the user equipment, and the TA group includes the TA group identifier and the packet in each group.
  • the user equipment detects whether the cell identifier in the TA group corresponds to the beam index information in the other TA group and the TAT of the other TA group does not time out;
  • the user equipment determines the cell corresponding to the beam index information, and maintains the hybrid automatic retransmission corresponding to the cell. Requesting a HARQ buffer and sounding reference signal SRS resources;
  • the user equipment determines the cell corresponding to the beam index information, and releases the HARQ buffer and the SRS corresponding to the cell. Resources.
  • the candidate beam index information is used to indicate the base station by receiving the candidate beam index information sent by the base station.
  • the first candidate beam index information is greater than the third threshold; the first candidate beam index information is sent to the base station, and the candidate beam with better quality can be used when the quality of the allocated initial beam is poor.
  • Base station communication achieves the effect of improving communication efficiency.
  • the third application scenario is described in the example in which the user equipment is applied to the power control.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the third application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5:
  • the path loss in different beam directions may be different. Therefore, it is necessary to select the initial beam with the smallest path loss from the allocated initial beams, and perform communication on the selected initial beam.
  • the method further includes:
  • the user equipment measures the RSRP of the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information, and obtains path loss information of each initial beam.
  • the user equipment generates a power headroom PH according to the minimum path loss information, and obtains a power headroom report PHR;
  • the user equipment sends a PHR, and the PHR is used to instruct the base station to allocate an uplink resource to the user equipment according to the PH and the initial beam corresponding to the PH, and communicate with the user equipment on the corresponding uplink resource by using the initial beam corresponding to the PH.
  • the beam index information sent by the base station may correspond to a beam located outside the beam range corresponding to the RRM measurement report, or may correspond to an initial beam located in a beam range corresponding to the RRM measurement report, or may be an adaptively determined beam. This embodiment is not limited.
  • the MAC CE can be dynamically indicated by the MAC CE to enable the user equipment to report the minimum path loss.
  • the PH of the beam is the PH of the beam.
  • the user equipment measures the RSRP of the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information, and obtains path loss information of each initial beam, including:
  • the user equipment measures the RSRP of each first beam indicated by the first indication to obtain path loss information of each first beam.
  • the base station does not limit the uplink transmit power of the user equipment
  • the user equipment Multi-beam transmission can be supported on the uplink to improve air interface efficiency. If the user equipment supports multiple beams at the same time and the power is limited to a certain extent, the transmit power of the at least one beam needs to be down-converted. For details, refer to the description of the third application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. Do not repeat them.
  • the path loss information of each initial beam is obtained by measuring the RSRP of the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information; the PH is generated according to the minimum path loss information to obtain the PHR; and the PHR is transmitted, and the PHR is used to indicate the base station according to the PH and
  • the initial beam corresponding to the PH allocates an uplink resource to the user equipment, and communicates with the user equipment on the corresponding uplink resource by using the initial beam corresponding to the PH, and can select to communicate with the base station on the uplink resource corresponding to the initial beam with the smallest path loss, thereby saving The transmission power.
  • the fourth application scenario is described in the scenario where the user equipment is applied to the CSI measurement.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the fourth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5:
  • the user equipment also needs to perform CSI measurement on the initial beam to obtain CSI information to determine the quality of the initial beam according to the CSI information.
  • the method further includes:
  • the user equipment performs channel state indication CSI measurement on the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information, and obtains a channel quality indicator CQI of each initial beam;
  • the user equipment generates channel state indication CSI information according to the highest CQI, and obtains a CSI measurement report;
  • the user equipment sends a CSI measurement report, where the CSI measurement report is used to instruct the base station to communicate with the user equipment according to the CSI information and the initial beam corresponding to the CSI information.
  • the user equipment needs to obtain the beam in the range of the RRM measurement report, and the user equipment first needs to obtain the initial beam corresponding to the RRM measurement report.
  • the specific acquisition method is shown in the fourth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 . The description is not repeated here.
  • the user equipment may filter the CSI information including the highest CQI from each CSI information, and generate a CSI measurement report according to the selected at least one CSI information.
  • the CSI information includes at least one of CQI, PMI, and RI, and the user equipment may send at least one of CQI, PMI, and RI to the base station at the same time or at different times.
  • the MAC CE may be dynamically indicated by the MAC CE to cause the user equipment to report the CSI information with the highest CQI.
  • the user equipment performs channel shape on the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information.
  • the state indicates the CSI measurement, and the channel quality indicator CQI of each initial beam is obtained, including:
  • the user equipment performs CSI measurement on each second beam indicated by the second indication to obtain CQI of each second beam.
  • the CSI measurement of each initial beam is performed by performing channel state indication CSI measurement on the initial beam corresponding to each initial beam index information; the CSI measurement report is generated according to the highest CQI, and the CSI measurement report is sent; the CSI measurement report is used to indicate
  • the base station communicates with the user equipment according to the CSI information and the initial beam corresponding to the CSI information, and can select the initial beam with the highest CQI to communicate with the base station, thereby improving communication efficiency.
  • the fifth application scenario is described in the scenario where the user equipment is used to adjust the bandwidth of the cell.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the fifth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5:
  • the base station when the traffic of each user equipment that is accessed by the cell changes, and the load of the cell changes, the base station needs to adjust the cell bandwidth of the cell, and the specific adjustment method is shown in the embodiment shown in FIG. 3 .
  • the description of the fifth application scenario is not described here.
  • the adjusted cell can use multiple channels such that multiple channels share the same HARQ entity.
  • the entire cell may be composed of a plurality of channels of the same bandwidth, the base station may transmit the common information on the channel located at the central frequency point, or the base station may transmit the common information on the center frequency of each channel.
  • the method further includes:
  • the user equipment receives the information of the adjusted cell bandwidth and the information of the center frequency point sent by the base station by broadcasting, or receives the RRC signaling sent by the base station, where the RRC signaling carries the information of the adjusted cell bandwidth and the center frequency point.
  • the adjusted cell bandwidth is adjusted by the base station according to the service volume of the user equipment, and the cell bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume.
  • the center frequency point is the center frequency or the frequency range within the frequency range corresponding to the adjusted cell bandwidth. frequency;
  • the user equipment receives the common information sent by the base station on the channel located at the central frequency point, or receives the transmission common information sent by the base station on the center frequency of each channel.
  • the user equipment may receive the adjusted information of the cell bandwidth and the information of the center frequency point in a manner corresponding to the manner in which the base station sends the information of the adjusted cell bandwidth and the information of the center frequency point, according to the center.
  • the information of the frequency points receives the common information on the channel located at the center frequency point, or receives the public information on the center frequency of each channel.
  • the adjusted cell bandwidth is adjusted by the base station according to the service volume of the user equipment, and the cell bandwidth is positively correlated with the traffic volume.
  • the center frequency point is the center frequency or the specified frequency within the frequency range corresponding to the adjusted cell bandwidth.
  • the cell bandwidth can be adjusted only without configuring other radio resource configuration parameters, which saves communication overhead in the process of configuring cell bandwidth.
  • the sixth application scenario is described in the example that the user equipment is used to adjust the bandwidth of the user.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the sixth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5:
  • the overall load of the cell does not change much, but the traffic of some user equipments varies greatly.
  • the demand for the cell bandwidth of the user equipment changes.
  • the user bandwidth can be adaptively reduced or increased; but from the perspective of the base station, the base station still transmits information according to the originally used cell bandwidth, but the frequency range used by different user equipments can be different.
  • the base station when the base station adjusts the user bandwidth, the base station can adjust the user bandwidth by adjusting the channel allocated to the user equipment according to the traffic volume.
  • the method further includes:
  • the user equipment receives the adjusted user bandwidth information sent by the base station by using at least one of the RRC signaling, the MAC CE, and the control channel, where the adjusted user bandwidth is adjusted by the base station according to the service volume of the user equipment, and the user bandwidth and the service are performed.
  • the quantity is positively correlated;
  • the user equipment listens to the control channel of the channel that constitutes the user bandwidth.
  • the user equipment may receive the adjusted user bandwidth information in a manner corresponding to the manner in which the base station sends the adjusted user bandwidth information, and listen to the channel that constitutes the user bandwidth.
  • the remaining bandwidth after adjusting the user bandwidth adjustment may be continuous or discontinuous in the frequency domain.
  • the adjusted user bandwidth is adjusted by the base station according to the service volume of the user equipment, and the user bandwidth and the traffic volume are positive.
  • the related relationship can adjust the user bandwidth in real time according to the service volume of the user equipment, and ensure the normal operation of the user equipment.
  • the seventh application scenario is described in the scenario where the user equipment is applied to the SPS.
  • the application scenario corresponds to the seventh application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5:
  • the receiver 801 is configured to receive SPS resource information sent by the base station.
  • the user equipment may determine the beam according to the beam index information; when the SPS resource information does not include the beam index information, the user equipment may determine the beam according to the beam index information carried in the RRM measurement report, where the beam may be It is either a transmit beam or a receive beam.
  • the base station may indicate beam index information when the user equipment is configured through RRC signaling or when the SPS resource is activated by using the control channel.
  • the user equipment further includes a processor 803, configured to determine, according to the SPS resource information, resource information and beam index information allocated by the base station for the user equipment.
  • the base station may agree with the user equipment to use a better quality beam or use a preset beam according to the measurement result. At this time, the user equipment can transmit/receive information on a beam with better quality. Correspondingly, the base station receives/transmits information on the beam. Or, the user equipment simultaneously transmits/receives information on the preset at least one beam, and correspondingly, the base station simultaneously receives/transmits information on the at least one beam.
  • the user equipment selects a beam with better signal condition when transmitting/receiving information in the SPS manner, or simultaneously transmits and/or receives on one or more predetermined beams.
  • the base station can receive/transmit information in SPS mode on one or more predetermined beams.
  • the base station and the user equipment can preferentially select one or more beams with good signal conditions in a plurality of predetermined beam ranges according to the measurement result.
  • the base station when the base station re-instructs the beam index information according to the measurement result or the recommended beam index information of the user equipment, only the beam index information in the SPS resource information needs to be modified, and the resource information does not need to be modified. At this time, the base station may re-instruct the user equipment of the beam index information through RRC signaling or a MAC CE or a control channel.
  • the resource information and the beam index information allocated by the base station for the user equipment are determined according to the SPS resource information, and the resource and the beam can be configured by receiving the SPS resource information, and the resource and the beam can be dynamically configured for the user equipment.
  • the problem of wasted communication overhead is achieved, and the effect of saving communication overhead is achieved.
  • the eighth application scenario is described in the scenario where the user equipment is applied to the D2D.
  • the usage scenario corresponds to the eighth application scenario in the embodiment shown in FIG. 5:
  • the base station allocates initial beam index information of the beam of the D2D communication to the user equipment.
  • the receiver 801 receives resource indication information sent by the base station, where the resource indication information includes D2D resource information and initial beam index information.
  • the user equipment further includes a processor 803, configured to determine, according to the resource indication information received by the receiver 801, resources and initial beams used when D2D communication is adopted with other user equipments.
  • the beam index information allocated by the base station may be set by the base station, or may be, after the user equipment determines the beam index information of the beam with good quality according to the measurement result, requesting the initial beam index information allocated to the base station, for the user equipment and D2D communication between other user equipments.
  • the D2D resource information includes time domain resource information and frequency domain resource information.
  • the cellular communication used between the base station and the user equipment and the D2D communication used between the user equipment and other user equipment can reuse time domain resources and frequency domain resources on different initial beams.
  • the beam configuration method receives the initial beam index information sent by the base station, and the initial beam index information is used to indicate the initial beam of the millimeter wave band allocated by the base station for the user equipment;
  • the RRM measurement report is obtained by the user equipment performing RRM measurement on the initial beam indicated by the initial beam index information, where the RRM measurement report is used to indicate that the base station determines initial beam index information for communicating with the user equipment, which can be
  • the RRM measurement report reports the signal quality of the initial beam to the base station, so that the base station selects a beam with better signal quality to communicate with the user equipment, and uses the beamforming technology to solve the short transmission distance of the existing millimeter wave band, which cannot meet the cellular communication environment.
  • the problem of the data communication requirement of the user equipment reaches the effect of extending the transmission distance of the millimeter wave band.
  • the base station and the user equipment provided by the foregoing embodiments are only illustrated by the division of the foregoing functional modules. In actual applications, the function allocation may be completed by different functional modules as needed. , dividing the internal structure of the base station and user equipment into different Functional modules to perform all or part of the functions described above.
  • the base station and the user equipment provided by the foregoing embodiments are in the same concept as the beam configuration method, and the specific implementation process is described in detail in the method embodiment, and details are not described herein again.
  • the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other manners.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the unit may be only a logical function division.
  • there may be another division manner for example, multiple units or components may be combined. Or it can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored or not executed.
  • the mutual coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be in an electrical, mechanical or other form.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present invention may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions may be stored in a computer readable storage medium if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as a standalone product.
  • the technical solution of the present invention which is essential or contributes to the prior art, or a part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product, which is stored in a storage medium, including Several instructions are used to make a computer device (which can be a personal computer, server, or network device) All or part of the steps of the method described in various embodiments of the invention are performed.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk, or an optical disk, and the like, which can store program codes. .

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本发明公开了一种波束配置方法、基站及用户设备，涉及通信领域，所述方法包括：将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给用户设备；接收来源于用户设备的RRM测量报告，RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的；根据RRM测量报告确定与UE进行通信的初始波束索引信息。所述装置，包括：发送模块、接收模块和确定模块。本发明可解决现有的毫米波频段的衰减严重，导致传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，达到了延长毫米波频段的传输距离的效果。

Description

波束配置方法、基站及用户设备 技术领域
本发明涉及通信领域，特别涉及一种波束配置方法、基站及用户设备。
背景技术
随着分组业务和智能终端的迅速发展，高速、大数据量业务对频谱的需求不断增加。现有的蜂窝通信，如长期演进(英文：Long Term Evolution；简称：LTE)一般利用2GHz左右或更低的频段来进行数据传输；如长期演进高级(英文，Long Term Evolution Advanced；简称LTE-A)所支持的最大带宽为100MHz，且可利用的频谱范围有限。
为了满足业务对频谱的需求，IEEE的802.11ad标准将60GHz频段用于无线局域网(英文，Wireless Local Area Network；简称WLAN)，一般用于10米左右的短距离室内通信。其中，60GHz频段属于毫米波频段，广义上，毫米波频段包括3GHz～300GHz范围的频谱，一般，毫米波通信主要研究大于6GHz至100GHz之间的频段。毫米波频段存在较大的自由空间衰减，且空气吸收、雨、雾、建筑物或其它物体的吸收和散射等因素导致信号的衰减非常严重。
发明人在实现本发明的过程中，发现现有技术中至少存在以下缺陷：由于现有的毫米波频段的衰减严重，导致传输距离较短，且现有技术较少考虑将毫米波用于蜂窝通信，因此，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下UE的数据通信需求。
发明内容
为了解决现有的毫米波频段的衰减严重，导致传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，本发明实施例提供了一种波束配置方法、基站及用户设备。所述技术方案如下：
第一方面，本发明实施例提供了一种基站，所述基站包括：
发送模块，用于将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给所述用户设备；
接收模块，用于接收来源于所述用户设备的无线资源管理RRM测量报告， 所述RRM测量报告是所述用户设备对所述发送模块发送的所述初始波束索引信息所指示的初始所述波束进行RRM测量后得到的；
确定模块，用于根据所述接收模块接收到的所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息。
在第一方面的第一种可能的实现方式中，
所述确定模块，具体用于从所述RRM测量报告中每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息中，确定所述参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息，所述参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率RSRP和参考信号接收质量RSRQ中的至少一种；
所述发送模块，还用于通过所述确定模块确定的所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送控制信息，所述用户设备用于从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，通过确定的所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束监听所述控制信息。
在第一方面的第二种可能的实现方式中，所述确定模块，具体用于通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体接入控制层控制元MAC CE中的至少一种，从所述RRM测量报告中的各个初始波束索引信息中指定第二初始波束索引信息，指定的所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束用于在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送所述控制信息。
在第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式中，
所述发送模块，还用于将为所述用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束的备选波束索引信息发送给所述用户设备；
所述接收模块，还用于接收所述用户设备从所述发送模块发送的各个备选波束索引信息中选择并发送的第一备选波束索引信息，所述第一备选波束索引信息是所述初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值，且对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量后，确定出的参考信号信息大于第三阈值的备选波束索引信息，所述参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；
所述基站还包括通信模块，用于根据所述接收模块接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式，在第一方面的第四种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收模块，用于接收所述用户设备发送的第一随机接入请求；
所述基站还包括生成模块，用于根据所述第一随机接入请求生成上行时间提前TA；
所述通信模块，用于根据接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述生成模块生成的所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第一方面的第三种可能的实现方式，在第一方面的第五种可能的实现方式中，
所述确定模块，用于利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为所述用户设备分配的所述备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信；
所述发送模块，还用于在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送随机接入指令；
所述接收模块，还用于接收所述用户设备根据所述发送模块发送的所述随机接入指令发送的第二随机接入请求；
所述基站还包括生成模块，用于根据所述第二随机接入请求生成上行TA；
所述通信模块，还用于根据分配的第二备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述生成模块生成的所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第一方面或第一方面的第四种可能的实现方式或第一方面的第五种可能的实现方式，在第一方面的第六种可能的实现方式中，
所述确定模块，还用于在与所述用户设备进行通信的波束中，将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，所述波束包括所述初始波束和所述备选波束中的至少一种；
所述生成模块，还用于根据所述确定模块得到的每个分组生成一个TA组，所述TA组包括TA组标识、所述分组中各个波束的波束索引信息、所述分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT；
所述发送模块，还用于将所述生成模块生成的所述TA组发送给所述用户设备。
在第一方面的第七种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收模块，还用于所述确定模块根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，接收来源于所述用户设备的功率余量报告PHR，所述PHR中包括功率余量PH，所述PH是对各个初始波束的RSRP进行测量得到路损信息，根据最小的路损信息生成的；
所述基站还包括分配模块，用于根据所述接收模块接收到的所述PH和与所述PH对应的初始波束为所述用户设备分配上行资源；
所述通信模块，具体用于通过与所述PH对应的初始波束在所述分配模块分配的对应的上行资源上与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第一方面的第七种可能的实现方式，在第一方面的第八种可能的实现方式中，
所述发送模块，还用于所述接收模块接收来源于所述用户设备的功率余量报告PHR之前，向所述用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示，所述第一指示用于指示所述用户设备对所述第一波束的RSRP进行测量。
在第一方面的第九种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收模块，用于所述确定模块根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，接收来源于所述用户设备的信道状态指示CSI测量报告，所述CSI测量报告中包括CSI信息，所述CSI信息是对各个初始波束进行CSI测量得到信道质量指示CQI，根据最高的CQI生成的；
所述通信模块，具体用于根据所述接收模块接收到的所述CSI信息和与所述CSI信息对应的初始波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第一方面的第九种可能的实现方式，在第一方面的第十种可能的实现方式中，
所述发送模块，还用于所述接收模块接收来源于所述用户设备的信道状态指示CSI测量报告之前，向所述用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示，所述第二指示用于指示所述用户设备对所述第二波束进行CSI测量。
在第一方面的第十一种可能的实现方式中，
所述基站还包括调整模块，用于所述确定模块根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，根据至少一个用户设备的业务量调整小区带宽，所述小区带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；
所述发送模块，还用于将所述调整模块调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息广播给各个用户设备，或，通过RRC信令将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息发送给各个用户设备，所述中心频点是所述调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或所述频率范围内的指定频率。
结合第一方面的第十一种可能的实现方式，在第一方面的第十二种可能的 实现方式中，若所述调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成，
所述发送模块，还用于在位于所述中心频点的信道上向各个用户设备发送公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上向各个用户设备发送公共信息。
在第一方面的第十三种可能的实现方式中，
所述基站还包括调整模块，用于所述确定模块根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，根据所述用户设备的业务量调整所述用户设备的用户带宽，所述用户带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；
所述发送模块，还用于通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种将所述调整模块调整后的用户带宽的信息发送给所述用户设备。
结合第一方面的第十三种可能的实现方式，在第一方面的第十四种可能的实现方式中，所述调整模块，具体用于根据所述用户设备的业务量调整为所述用户设备分配的信道，得到所述用户带宽。
第二方面，本发明实施例提供了一种用户设备，所述用户设备包括：
接收模块，用于接收基站发送的初始波束索引信息，所述初始波束索引信息用于指示所述基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束；
发送模块，用于发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告，所述RRM测量报告是所述用户设备对所述初始波束索引信息所指示的所述初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的，所述RRM测量报告用于所述基站确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息。
在第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式中，若所述RRM测量报告包括每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息，所述参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率RSRP和参考信号接收质量RSRQ中的至少一种，则所述用户设备，还包括：
确定模块，用于所述发送模块发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，在所述用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，确定所述参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息；
监听模块，用于通过所述确定模块确定的所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
在第二方面的第二种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收模块，还用于接收所述基站通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体 接入控制层控制元MAC CE中的至少一种从所述RRM测量报告中的各个初始波束索引信息中指定的第二波束索引信息；
所述用户设备还包括监听模块，用于通过所述接收模块接收到的所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
结合第二方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第二方面的第二种可能的实现方式，在第二方面的第三种可能的实现方式中，
所述监听模块，具体用于以全向方式接收所述控制信息，或，以大于等于所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息，或，以小于所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息；或，
所述监听模块，具体用于以全向方式接收所述控制信息，或，以大于等于所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息，或，以小于所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息。
在第二方面的第四种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收模块，还用于接收所述基站发送的备选波束索引信息，所述备选波束索引信息用于指示所述基站为所述用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束；
所述用户设备还包括：
测量模块，用于在所述初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值时，对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量，所述参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；
确定模块，用于根据所述测量模块进行的所述RRM测量确定出参考信号信息大于第三阈值的第一备选波束索引信息；
所述发送模块，还用于将所述确定模块确定出的所述第一备选波束索引信息发送给所述基站，所述基站用于根据所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第二方面的第四种可能的实现方式，在第二方面的第五种可能的实现方式中，
所述发送模块，还用于自动向所述基站发送第一随机接入请求，所述第一随机接入请求用于指示所述基站生成上行时间提前TA，并根据分配的第二备 选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信；或，
所述接收模块，还用于在控制信道上接收所述基站发送的随机接入指令，所述随机接入指令是所述基站利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为所述用户设备分配的所述备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信后发送的，根据所述随机接入指令向所述基站发送第二随机接入请求，所述第二随机接入请求用于指示所述基站生成上行TA，并根据接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第二方面的第四种可能的实现方式，在第二方面的第六种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收模块，还用于接收所述基站发送的TA组，所述TA组是所述基站在与所述用户设备进行通信的波束中，将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，根据每个分组生成的，所述TA组包括TA组标识、所述分组中各个波束的波束索引信息、所述分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT，所述波束包括所述初始波束和所述备选波束中的至少一种；
所述测量模块，还用于在所述接收模块接收到的所述TA组中的TAT超时，则检测所述TA组中的所述小区标识是否对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT未超时；
所述用户设备还包括：
维护模块，用于在所述测量模块检测出所述TA组中的所述小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT未超时时，确定所述波束索引信息所对应的小区，维护所述小区所对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ缓冲区和探测参考信号SRS资源；
释放模块，用于在所述测量模块检测出所述TA组中的所述小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT超时时，确定所述波束索引信息所对应的小区，释放所述小区所对应的HARQ缓冲区和SRS资源。
在第二方面的第七种可能的实现方式中，所述用户设备，还包括：
测量模块，用于所述发送模块发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个初始波束的路损信息；
生成模块，用于根据所述测量模块测出的最小的路损信息生成至少一个功率余量PH，得到功率余量报告PHR；
所述发送模块，具体用于发送所述生成模块生成的所述PHR，所述PHR用于指示所述基站根据所述PH和与所述PH对应的初始波束为所述用户设备分配上行资源，通过与所述PH对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第二方面的第七种可能的实现方式，在第二方面的第八种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收模块，还用于接收所述基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示；
所述生成模块，还用于对所述接收模块接收到的所述第一指示所指示的各个第一波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个第一波束的路损信息。
在第二方面的第九种可能的实现方式中，所述用户设备，还包括：
测量模块，用于所述发送模块发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束进行信道状态指示CSI测量，得到各个初始波束的信道质量指示CQI；
生成模块，用于根据所述测量模块测出的最高的CQI生成至少一个信道状态指示CSI信息，得到CSI测量报告；
所述发送模块，用于发送所述生成模块生成的所述CSI测量报告，所述CSI测量报告用于指示所述基站根据所述CSI信息和与所述CSI信息对应的初始波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第二方面的第九种可能的实现方式，在第二方面的第十种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收模块，还用于接收所述基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示；
所述生成模块，还用于对所述接收模块接收到的所述第二指示所指示的各个第二波束进行CSI测量，得到各个第二波束的CQI。
在第二方面的第十一种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收模块，用于通过广播接收所述基站发送的调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息，或，接收所述基站发送的RRC信令，所述RRC信令中携带有调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息；所述调整后的小区带宽是 所述基站根据至少一个用户设备的业务量调整的，且所述小区带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系，所述中心频点是所述调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或所述频率范围内的指定频率；
在所述调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成时，在位于所述中心频点的信道上接收所述基站发送的公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上接收所述基站发送的发送公共信息。
在第二方面的第十二种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收模块，还用于通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种接收所述基站发送的调整后的用户带宽的信息，所述调整后的用户带宽是所述基站根据所述用户设备的业务量调整的，且所述用户带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；
所述用户设备还包括监听模块，用于对组成所述接收模块接收到的所述用户带宽的信道的控制信道进行监听。
第三方面，本发明实施例提供了一种基站，所述基站包括：
发射机，用于将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给所述用户设备；
接收机，用于接收来源于来源于所述用户设备的无线资源管理RRM测量报告，所述RRM测量报告是所述用户设备对所述发射机发送的所述初始波束索引信息所指示的所述初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的；
处理器，用于根据所述接收机接收到的所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息。
在第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式中，
所述处理器，具体用于从所述RRM测量报告中每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息中，确定所述参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息，所述参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率RSRP和参考信号接收质量RSRQ中的至少一种；
所述发射机，用于通过所述处理器确定的所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送控制信息，所述用户设备用于从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，通过确定的所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束监听所述控制信息。
在第三方面的第二种可能的实现方式中，所述发射机，还用于通过无线资 源控制RRC信令和媒体接入控制层控制元MAC CE中的至少一种，从所述RRM测量报告中的各个初始波束索引信息中指定第二初始波束索引信息，指定的所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束用于在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送所述控制信息。
在第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式中，
所述发射机，还用于将为所述用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束的备选波束索引信息发送给所述用户设备；
所述接收机，还用于接收所述用户设备从所述发射机发送的各个备选波束索引信息中选择并发送的第一备选波束索引信息，所述第一备选波束索引信息是所述初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值，且对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量后，确定出的参考信号信息大于第三阈值的备选波束索引信息，所述参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；
所述处理器，还用于根据所述接收机接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式，在第三方面的第四种可能的实现方式中，所述发射机，还用于接收所述用户设备发送的第一随机接入请求；
所述处理器，具体用于根据所述第一随机接入请求生成上行时间提前TA；根据接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式，在第三方面的第五种可能的实现方式中，
所述处理器，还用于利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为所述用户设备分配的所述备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信；
所述发射机，还用于在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送随机接入指令；
所述接收机，还用于接收所述用户设备根据所述发射机发送的所述随机接入指令发送的第二随机接入请求；
所述处理器，具体用于根据所述接收机接收到的所述第二随机接入请求生成上行TA；根据分配的第二备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第三方面或第三方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第三方面的第二种可能的实现方式或第三方面的第三种可能的实现方式或第三方面的第四种可 能的实现方式或第三方面的第五种可能的实现方式，在第三方面的第六种可能的实现方式中，
所述处理器，还用于在与所述用户设备进行通信的波束中，将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，所述波束包括所述初始波束和所述备选波束中的至少一种；根据每个分组生成一个TA组，所述TA组包括TA组标识、所述分组中各个波束的波束索引信息、所述分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT；
所述发射机，还用于将所述处理器生成的所述TA组发送给所述用户设备。
在第三方面的第七种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收机，用于所述处理器根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，接收来源于所述用户设备的功率余量报告PHR，所述PHR中包括功率余量PH，所述PH是对各个初始波束的RSRP进行测量得到路损信息，根据最小的路损信息生成的；
所述处理器，用于根据所述接收机接收到的所述PH和与所述PH对应的初始波束为所述用户设备分配上行资源；通过与所述PH对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第三方面的第七种可能的实现方式，在第三方面的第八种可能的实现方式中，所述发射机，还用于所述接收机接收来源于所述用户设备的功率余量报告PHR之前，向所述用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示，所述第一指示用于指示所述用户设备对所述第一波束的RSRP进行测量。
在第三方面的第九种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收机，用于所述处理器根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，接收来源于所述用户设备的信道状态指示CSI测量报告，所述CSI测量报告中包括CSI信息，所述CSI信息是对各个初始波束进行CSI测量得到信道质量指示CQI，根据最高的CQI生成的；
所述处理器，用于根据所述接收机接收到的所述CSI信息和与所述CSI信息对应的初始波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第三方面的第九种可能的实现方式，在第三方面的第十种可能的实现方式中，所述发射机，还用于所述接收机接收来源于所述用户设备的信道状态指示CSI测量报告之前，向所述用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围 内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示，所述第二指示用于指示所述用户设备对所述第二波束进行CSI测量。
在第三方面的第十一种可能的实现方式中，
所述处理器，还用于根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，根据至少一个用户设备的业务量调整小区带宽，所述小区带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；
所述发射机，还用于将所述处理器调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息广播给各个用户设备，或，通过RRC信令将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息发送给各个用户设备，所述中心频点是所述调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或所述频率范围内的指定频率。
结合第三方面的第十一种可能的实现方式，在第三方面的第十二种可能的实现方式中，若所述调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成，则所述发射机，还用于在位于所述中心频点的信道上向各个用户设备发送公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上向各个用户设备发送公共信息。
在第三方面的第十三种可能的实现方式中，
所述处理器，还用于根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，根据所述用户设备的业务量调整所述用户设备的用户带宽，所述用户带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；
所述发射机，还用于通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种将所述处理器调整后的用户带宽的信息发送给所述用户设备。
结合第三方面的第十三种可能的实现方式，在第三方面的第十四种可能的实现方式中，所述处理器，具体用于根据所述用户设备的业务量调整为所述用户设备分配的信道，得到所述用户带宽。
第四方面，本发明实施例提供了一种用户设备，所述用户设备包括：
接收机，用于接收基站发送的初始波束索引信息，所述初始波束索引信息用于指示所述基站为用户设备用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束；
发射机，用于发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告，所述RRM测量报告是所述用户设备对所述初始波束索引信息所指示的所述初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的，所述RRM测量报告用于指示所述基站确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息。
在第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式中，若所述RRM测量报告包括每个 初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息，所述参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率RSRP和参考信号接收质量RSRQ中的至少一种，则
所述用户设备还包括处理器，用于所述发射机发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，在所述用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，确定所述参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息；
所述接收机，还用于通过所述处理器确定的所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
在第四方面的第二种可能的实现方式中，所述接收机，还用于接收所述基站通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体接入控制层控制元MAC CE中的至少一种从所述RRM测量报告中的各个初始波束索引信息中指定的第二初始波束索引信息；通过所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
结合第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第四方面的第二种可能的实现方式，在第四方面的第三种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收机，具体用于以全向方式接收所述控制信息，或，以大于等于所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息，或，以小于所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息；或，
所述接收机，具体用于以全向方式接收所述控制信息，或，以大于等于所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息，或，以小于所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息。
在第四方面的第四种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收机，还用于接收所述基站发送的备选波束索引信息，所述备选波束索引信息用于指示所述基站为所述用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束；
所述用户设备还包括处理器，用于在所述初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值时，对所述接收机接收到的各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量，所述参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；根据所述RRM测量确定出参考信号信息大于第三阈值的第一备选波束索引信息；
所述发射机，还用于将所述处理器确定出的第一备选波束索引信息发送给所述基站，所述基站用于根据所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的与备选波束 所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第四方面的第四种可能的实现方式，在第四方面的第五种可能的实现方式中，所述发射机，还用于自动向所述基站发送第一随机接入请求，所述第一随机接入请求用于指示所述基站生成上行时间提前TA，并根据分配的第二备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信，或，在控制信道上接收所述基站发送的随机接入指令，所述随机接入指令是所述基站利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为所述用户设备分配的所述备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信后发送的，根据所述随机接入指令向所述基站发送第二随机接入请求，所述第二随机接入请求用于指示所述基站生成上行TA，并根据接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第四方面或第四方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第四方面的第二种可能的实现方式或第四方面的第三种可能的实现方式或第四方面的第四种可能的实现方式或第四方面的第五种可能的实现方式，在第四方面的第六种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收机，还用于接收所述基站发送的TA组，所述TA组是所述基站在与所述用户设备进行通信的波束中，将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，根据每个分组生成的，所述TA组包括TA组标识、所述分组中各个波束的波束索引信息、所述分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT，所述波束包括所述初始波束和所述备选波束中的至少一种；
所述处理器，还用于在所述接收机接收到的所述TA组中的TAT超时，则检测所述TA组中的所述小区标识是否对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT未超时；在检测出所述TA组中的所述小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT未超时时，确定所述波束索引信息所对应的小区，维护所述小区所对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ缓冲区和探测参考信号SRS资源；在检测出所述TA组中的所述小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT超时时，确定所述波束索引信息所对应的小区，释放所述小区所对应的HARQ缓冲区和SRS资源。
在第四方面的第七种可能的实现方式中，
所述用户设备还包括处理器，用于所述发射机发送无线资源管理RRM测 量报告之后，对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个初始波束的路损信息；根据最小的路损信息生成至少一个功率余量PH，得到功率余量报告PHR；
所述发射机，还用于发送所述处理器生成的所述PHR，所述PHR用于指示所述基站根据所述PH和与所述PH对应的初始波束为所述用户设备分配上行资源，通过与所述PH对应的波束在对应的上行资源上与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第四方面的第七种可能的实现方式，在第四方面的第八种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收机，还用于接收所述基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示；
所述处理器，还用于对所述接收机接收到的所述第一指示所指示的各个第一波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个第一波束的路损信息。
在第四方面的第九种可能的实现方式中，
所述用户设备还包括处理器，用于所述发射机发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束进行信道状态指示CSI测量，得到各个初始波束的信道质量指示CQI；根据最高的CQI生成至少一个信道状态指示CSI信息，得到CSI测量报告；
所述发射机，还用于发送所述处理器生成的所述CSI测量报告，所述CSI测量报告用于指示所述基站根据所述CSI信息和与所述CSI信息对应的初始波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第四方面的第九种可能的实现方式，在第四方面的第十种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收机，还用于接收所述基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示；
所述处理器，还用于对所述接收机接收到的所述第二指示所指示的各个第二波束进行CSI测量，得到各个第二波束的CQI。
在第四方面的第十一种可能的实现方式中，所述接收机，还用于通过广播接收所述基站发送的调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息，或，接收所述基站发送的RRC信令，所述RRC信令中携带有调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息；所述调整后的小区带宽是所述基站根据至少一个用户设备的 业务量调整的，且所述小区带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系，所述中心频点是所述调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或所述频率范围内的指定频率；若所述调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成，则在位于所述中心频点的信道上接收所述基站发送的公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上接收所述基站发送的发送公共信息。
在第四方面的第十二种可能的实现方式中，
所述接收机，还用于通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种接收所述基站发送的调整后的用户带宽的信息，所述调整后的用户带宽是所述基站根据所述用户设备的业务量调整的，且所述用户带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；对组成所述用户带宽的信道的控制信道进行监听。
第五方面，本发明实施例提供了一种波束配置方法，所述方法包括：
基站将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给所述用户设备；
所述基站接收来源于所述用户设备的无线资源管理RRM测量报告，所述RRM测量报告是所述用户设备对所述初始波束索引信息所指示的所述初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的；
所述基站根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息。
在第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式中，所述基站根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息，包括：
所述基站从所述RRM测量报告中每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息中，确定所述参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息，所述参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率RSRP和参考信号接收质量RSRQ中的至少一种；
所述基站通过确定的所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送控制信息，所述用户设备用于从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，通过确定的所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束监听所述控制信息。
在第五方面的第二种可能的实现方式中，所述方法，还包括：
所述基站通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体接入控制层控制元MAC CE中的至少一种，从所述RRM测量报告中的各个波束索引信息中指定第二初始 波束索引信息，指定的所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束用于在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送所述控制信息。
在第五方面的第三种可能的实现方式中，所述方法，还包括：
所述基站将为所述用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束的备选波束索引信息发送给所述用户设备；
所述基站接收所述用户设备从各个备选波束索引信息中选择并发送的第一备选波束索引信息，所述第一备选波束索引信息是所述初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值，且对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量后，确定出的参考信号信息大于第三阈值的至少一个备选波束索引信息，所述参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；
所述基站根据接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第五方面的第三种可能的实现方式，在第五方面的第四种可能的实现方式中，所述基站根据接收到的所述备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信，包括：
所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的第一随机接入请求，根据所述第一随机接入请求生成上行时间提前TA；
所述基站根据接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第五方面的第三种可能的实现方式，在第五方面的第五种可能的实现方式中，所述方法，还包括：
所述基站利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为所述用户设备分配的所述备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信；
所述基站在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送随机接入指令；
所述基站接收所述用户设备根据所述随机接入指令发送的第二随机接入请求，根据所述第二随机接入请求生成上行TA；
所述基站根据分配的第二备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第五方面或第五方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第五方面的第二种可能的实现方式或第五方面的第三种可能的实现方式或第五方面的第四种可能的实现方式或第五方面的第五种可能的实现方式，所述方法，还包括：
在与所述用户设备进行通信的波束中，所述基站将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，所述波束包括所述初始波束和所述备选波束中的至少一种；
所述基站根据每个分组生成一个TA组，所述TA组包括TA组标识、所述分组中各个波束的波束索引信息、所述分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT；
所述基站将生成的所述TA组发送给所述用户设备。
在第五方面的第七种可能的实现方式中，所述基站根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，还包括：
所述基站接收来源于所述用户设备的功率余量报告PHR，所述PHR中包括功率余量PH，所述PH是对各个初始波束的RSRP进行测量得到路损信息，根据最小的路损信息生成的；
所述基站根据所述PH和与所述PH对应的初始波束为所述用户设备分配上行资源；
所述基站通过与所述PH对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第五方面的第七种可能的实现方式，在第五方面的第八种可能的实现方式中，所述基站接收来源于所述用户设备的功率余量报告PHR之前，还包括：
所述基站向所述用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示，所述第一指示用于指示所述用户设备对所述第一波束的RSRP进行测量。
在第五方面的第九种可能的实现方式中，所述基站根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，还包括：
所述基站接收来源于所述用户设备的信道状态指示CSI测量报告，所述CSI测量报告中包括CSI信息，所述CSI信息是对各个初始波束进行CSI测量得到信道质量指示CQI，根据最高的CQI生成的；
所述基站根据所述CSI信息和与所述CSI信息对应的初始波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第五方面的第九种可能的实现方式，在第五方面的第十种可能的实现方式中，所述基站接收来源于所述用户设备的信道状态指示CSI测量报告之前，还包括：
所述基站向所述用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示，所述第二指示用于指示所述用户设备对所述第二波束进行CSI测量。
在第五方面的第十一种可能的实现方式中，所述基站根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，还包括：
所述基站根据至少一个用户设备的业务量调整小区带宽，所述小区带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；
所述基站将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息广播给各个用户设备，或，通过RRC信令将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息发送给各个用户设备，所述中心频点是所述调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或所述频率范围内的指定频率。
结合第五方面的第十一种可能的实现方式，在第五方面的第十二种可能的实现方式中，若所述调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成，则所述方法，还包括：
所述基站在位于所述中心频点的信道上向各个用户设备发送公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上向各个用户设备发送公共信息。
在第五方面的第十三种可能的实现方式中，所述基站根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，还包括：
所述基站根据所述用户设备的业务量调整所述用户设备的用户带宽，所述用户带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；
所述基站通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种将调整后的用户带宽的信息发送给所述用户设备。
结合第五方面的第十三种可能的实现方式，在第五方面的第十四种可能的实现方式中，所述基站根据所述用户设备的业务量调整所述用户设备的用户带宽，包括：
所述基站根据所述用户设备的业务量调整为所述用户设备分配的信道，得到所述用户带宽。
第六方面，本发明实施例提供了一种波束配置方法，所述方法包括：
用户设备接收基站发送的初始波束索引信息，所述初始波束索引信息用于指示所述基站为用户设备用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束；
所述用户设备发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告，所述RRM测量报告是 所述用户设备对所述初始波束索引信息所指示的所述初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的，所述RRM测量报告用于指示所述基站确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息。
在第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式中，若所述RRM测量报告包括每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息，所述参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率RSRP和参考信号接收质量RSRQ中的至少一种，则所述用户设备发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，还包括：
在所述用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，所述用户设备确定所述参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息；
所述用户设备通过所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
在第六方面的第二种可能的实现方式中，所述方法，还包括：
所述用户设备接收所述基站通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体接入控制层控制元MAC CE中的至少一种从所述RRM测量报告中的各个初始波束索引信息中指定的第二初始波束索引信息；
所述用户设备通过所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
结合第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第六方面的第二种可能的实现方式，在第六方面的第三种可能的实现方式中，
所述用户设备通过所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息，包括：所述用户设备以全向方式接收所述控制信息，或，以大于等于所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息，或，以小于所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息；
所述用户设备通过所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息，包括：所述用户设备以全向方式接收所述控制信息，或，以大于等于所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息，或，以小于所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息。
在第六方面的第四种可能的实现方式中，所述方法，还包括：
所述用户设备接收所述基站发送的备选波束索引信息，所述备选波束索引 信息用于指示所述基站为所述用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束；
若所述初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值，则所述用户设备对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量，所述参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；
所述用户设备根据所述RRM测量确定出参考信号信息大于第三阈值的第一备选波束索引信息；
所述用户设备将确定出的所述第一备选波束索引信息发送给所述基站，所述基站用于根据所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第六方面的第四种可能的实现方式，在第六方面的第五种可能的实现方式中，所述方法，还包括：
所述用户设备自动向所述基站发送第一随机接入请求，所述第一随机接入请求用于指示所述基站生成上行时间提前TA，并根据分配的第二备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信；或，
所述用户设备在控制信道上接收所述基站发送的随机接入指令，所述随机接入指令是所述基站利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为所述用户设备分配的所述备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信后发送的，根据所述随机接入指令向所述基站发送第二随机接入请求，所述第二随机接入请求用于指示所述基站生成上行TA，并根据接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第六方面或第六方面的第一种可能的实现方式或第六方面的第二种可能的实现方式或第六方面的第三种可能的实现方式或第六方面的第四种可能的实现方式或第六方面的第五种可能的实现方式，在第六方面的第六种可能的实现方式中，所述方法，还包括：
所述用户设备接收所述基站发送的TA组，所述TA组是所述基站在与所述用户设备进行通信的波束中，将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，根据每个分组生成的，所述TA组包括TA组标识、所述分组中各个波束的波束索引信息、所述分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT，所述波束包括所述初始波束和所述备选波束中的至少一种；
若所述TA组中的TAT超时，则所述用户设备检测所述TA组中的所述小区标识是否对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT 未超时；
若检测出所述TA组中的所述小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT未超时，则所述用户设备确定所述波束索引信息所对应的小区，维护所述小区所对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ缓冲区和探测参考信号SRS资源；
若检测出所述TA组中的所述小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT超时，则所述用户设备确定所述波束索引信息所对应的小区，释放所述小区所对应的HARQ缓冲区和SRS资源。
在第六方面的第七种可能的实现方式中，所述用户设备发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，还包括：
所述用户设备对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个初始波束的路损信息；
所述用户设备根据最小的路损信息生成功率余量PH，得到功率余量报告PHR；
所述用户设备发送所述PHR，所述PHR用于指示所述基站根据所述PH和与所述PH对应的初始波束为所述用户设备分配上行资源，通过与所述PH对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第六方面的第七种可能的实现方式，在第六方面的第八种可能的实现方式中，所述用户设备对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个波束的路损信息，包括：
所述用户设备接收所述基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示；
所述用户设备对所述第一指示所指示的各个第一波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个第一波束的路损信息。
在第六方面的第九种可能的实现方式中，所述用户设备发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，还包括：
所述用户设备对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束进行信道状态指示CSI测量，得到各个初始波束的信道质量指示CQI；
所述用户设备根据最高的CQI生成信道状态指示CSI信息，得到CSI测量报告；
所述用户设备发送所述CSI测量报告，所述CSI测量报告用于指示所述基 站根据所述CSI信息和与所述CSI信息对应的初始波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
结合第六方面的第九种可能的实现方式，在第六方面的第十种可能的实现方式中，所述用户设备对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束进行信道状态指示CSI测量，得到各个初始波束的信道质量指示CQI，包括：
所述用户设备接收所述基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示；
所述用户设备对所述第二指示所指示的各个第二波束进行CSI测量，得到各个第二波束的CQI。
在第六方面的第十一种可能的实现方式中，所述方法，还包括：
所述用户设备通过广播接收所述基站发送的调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息，或，接收所述基站发送的RRC信令，所述RRC信令中携带有调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息；所述调整后的小区带宽是所述基站根据至少一个用户设备的业务量调整的，且所述小区带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系，所述中心频点是所述调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或所述频率范围内的指定频率；
若所述调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成，则所述用户设备在位于所述中心频点的信道上接收所述基站发送的公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上接收所述基站发送的发送公共信息。
在第六方面的第十二种可能的实现方式中，所述方法，还包括：
所述用户设备通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种接收所述基站发送的调整后的用户带宽的信息，所述调整后的用户带宽是所述基站根据所述用户设备的业务量调整的，且所述用户带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；
所述用户设备对组成所述用户带宽的信道的控制信道进行监听。
本发明实施例提供的技术方案的有益效果是：
通过将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给UE；接收来源于用户设备的RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的；根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息，可以根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与用户设备通 信，利用波束赋形技术解决了现有的毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，达到了延长毫米波频段的传输距离的效果。
附图说明
为了更清楚地说明本发明实施例中的技术方案，下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍，显而易见地，下面描述中的附图仅仅是本发明的一些实施例，对于本领域普通技术人员来讲，在不付出创造性劳动的前提下，还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。
图1是本发明实施例提供的波束配置系统的组成示意图；
图2是本发明一个实施例提供的基站的结构框架图；
图3是本发明再一实施例提供的基站的结构框架图；
图4是本发明再一实施例提供的用户设备的结构框架图；
图5是本发明再一实施例提供的用户设备的结构框架图；
图6是本发明再一实施例提供的基站的结构框架图；
图7是本发明再一实施例提供的用户设备的结构框架图；
图8是本发明再一实施例提供的用户设备的结构框架图；
图9是本发明再一实施例提供的波束配置方法的方法流程图；
图10是本发明再一实施例提供的波束配置方法的方法流程图；。
具体实施方式
为使本发明的目的、技术方案和优点更加清楚，下面将结合附图对本发明实施方式作进一步地详细描述。
本发明实施例涉及一种波束配置方法，该波束配置方法以现有LTE-A载波聚合为背景，将LTE-A技术较低频段载波和毫米波频段载波进行聚合，为用户提供更大带宽和更高容量。本发明实施例将较低频段载波作为主载波PCell，将毫米波频段载波作为辅载波SCell为例，也适用于将毫米波频段载波作为主载波的情况。本发明各实施例中涉及的波束赋形技术既可以指水平面的波束也可以指垂直面的波束。
其中，PCell和SCell可以共站址或非共站址，SCell位于PCell的覆盖范 围内或PCell和SCell覆盖有重叠区域。当PCell和SCell非共站址时，提供PCell的LTE-A基站和提供一个或多个SCell的一个或多个毫米波小基站或远端射频头(英文，Remote Radio Head；简称，RRH)以光纤或者无线相连进行无线回程通信。无线回程可以使用微波或毫米波，当无线回程使用毫米波时，无线回程使用的毫米波的频段可以与SCell所在的频段相同或不同。请参考图1所示的波束配置系统的组成示意图，图1包括一个LTE演进型基站(英文：evolved Node B；简称：eNB)、三个毫米波蜂窝通信演进基站(英文：millimeter wave eNB)eNB1、eNB2、eNB3和一个用户设备(英文：User Equipment；简称：UE)，eNB1～3提供毫米波频段覆盖。在图1中，eNB1～eNB3可以是一个eNB或多个eNB，它们和LTE eNB可以不共站址，或者共站址。eNB1～eNB3也可以是与LTE eNB有回程连接的远端射频单元RRH。
请参考图2，其示出了本发明一个实施例提供的基站的结构框架图。该基站可以是图1所示的LTE eNB、millimeter wave eNB1、eNB2、eNB3，本发明各实施例以LTE eNB和其中一个millimeter wave eNB如eNB1为例进行说明；以下各实施例如无特别说明，基站均指millimeter wave eNB。基站可以包括发送模块201、接收模块202和确定模块203。
发送模块201，用于将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给用户设备。
其中，初始波束索引信息用于指示基站向用户设备发送下行信息时所使用的初始波束，由基站预先配置给用户设备。该初始波束索引信息关联基站发送下行信息时所使用的天线权值或码本信息，以确定初始波束的方向和宽度等信息。其中，初始波束的方向是指初始波束相对于水平方向和/或垂直方向的角度信息。该初始波束索引信息还关联初始波束的特征信息，基站在不同的初始波束上发送该初始波束特定的特征信息，以便用户设备根据不同的特征信息识别不同的初始波束。基站在不同的初始波束使用不同的参考信号序列或者在不同的初始波束广播该初始波束的初始波束索引信息，用户设备可以根据初始波束索引信息和该初始波束的特征信息唯一确定一个特定的初始波束。初始波束索引信息也可以作为虚拟小区标识，即把同一个小区进一步按照多个较宽的初始波束划分为不同的扇区或子扇区。本发明下文各实施例中初始波束索引信息的作用和使用方法同本实施例的说明，下文不再赘述。
其中，LTE eNB和millimeter wave eNB都可以为用户设备配置无线资源管理(Radio Resource Management，RRM)测量的初始波束索引信息。当LTE eNB为用户设备配置RRM测量的初始波束索引信息时，millimeter wave eNB将初始波束索引信息的配置发送给LTE eNB，由LTE eNB发送给用户设备。本发明下文各实施例中初始波束索引信息的配置方法同本实施例的说明，下文不再赘述。这里RRM测量可以指通常意义下的用于移动性管理的测量，是经过无线资源控制(英文：Radio Resource Control；简称：RRC)层过滤的(filtered)测量方法。例如在LTE系统中所使用的过滤方法：Fn＝(1-a)·Fn-1+a·Mn。其中：Fn为最新过滤后的测量结果，用于评估触发测量报告的准则；Fn-1是前一次计算的过滤后的测量结果；Mn是物理层最新的测量结果，a是根据不同测量需求确定的系数。在毫米波小区中，用户设备可能较快的在不同的波束间移动，因此，用于波束更新的RRM测量需求可能比现有LTE系统中更为严格，例如每数十毫秒进行一次评估以判断是否满足测量报告的准则。
这里RRM测量也可以指通过波束训练的方式进行的测量。例如基站和用户设备各自在小区范围内的多个波束分别发送和接收以找到最佳匹配波束对，在这样一对发送波束和接收波束间进行通信时，接收效率最高，传输数据也最可靠，这种情况下的测量可以经过RRC层过滤但测量需求更严格，或者不需要经过RRC层过滤，而是直接使用当前测量结果。例如，基站和用户设备之间可以以更小的发射功率来达到更佳的传输效果。本发明下文各实施例中RRM测量的含义同本实施例的说明，下文不再赘述。为了能够从基站分配的波束中选择信号质量较好的初始波束进行通信，以提高通信质量，UE还可以根据初始波束索引信息确定基站分配的初始波束，并对基站分配的初始波束进行RRM测量，根据测量结果生成RRM测量报告。
接收模块202，用于接收来源于用户设备的RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对发送模块201发送的初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的。
当用户设备将RRM测量报告发送给millimeter wave eNB时，millimeter wave eNB可以直接接收RRM测量报告；当用户设备将RRM测量报告发送给LTE eNB时，LTE eNB把接收到的RRM测量报告和波束索引信息转发给millimeter wave eNB。本发明下文各实施例中millimeter wave eNB接收RRM测量报告的方法同本实施例的说明，下文不再赘述。
确定模块203，用于根据接收模块202接收到的RRM测量报告确定与UE进行通信的初始波束索引信息。
基站根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与UE通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，能够延长毫米波频段的传输距离。
综上所述，本发明实施例提供的基站，通过将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给用户设备；接收来源于用户设备的RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的；根据RRM测量报告确定与UE进行通信的初始波束索引信息，可以根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与用户设备通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了现有的毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，达到了延长毫米波频段的传输距离的效果。
请参考图3，其示出了本发明再一实施例提供的基站的结构框架图。该基站可以包括图1所示的基站；基站可以包括发送模块301、接收模块302和确定模块303。
发送模块301，用于将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给用户设备。
其中，初始波束索引信息用于指示基站向用户设备发送下行信息时所使用的波束，由基站预先配置给用户设备。该初始波束索引信息关联基站发送下行信息时所使用的天线权值或码本信息，以确定初始波束的方向和宽度等信息。其中，初始波束的方向是指初始波束相对于水平方向和/或垂直方向的角度信息，比如，一个初始波束的波束方向为相对于水平方向的30°-60°方向，或，相对于垂直方向的20°-40°方向等。该初始波束索引信息还关联初始波束的特征信息，基站在不同的初始波束上发送该初始波束特定的特征信息，以便用户设备根据不同的特征信息识别不同的初始波束，具体详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
本实施例中，基站可以为用户设备配置至少一个初始波束，并将该至少一个初始波束中每个初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给用户设备，以便用户设 备明确在哪个初始波束上接收基站发送的下行信息。
这里RRM测量可以指通常意义下的用于移动性管理的测量，是经过RRC层过滤的测量方法，也可以是指通过波束训练的方式进行的测量，具体详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
接收模块302，用于接收来源于用户设备的RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对发送模块301发送的初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的。
确定模块303，用于根据接收模块302接收到的RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息。
基站根据RRM测量报告确定波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的波束与用户设备通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了现有的毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，达到了延长毫米波频段的传输距离的效果。
下面分别以不同的应用场景为例对波束配置方法进行详细说明，具体如下：
第一种应用场景，以基站应用于不连续接收的场景中为例进行说明：
用户设备存在休眠状态和激活状态，且处于激活状态的用户设备需要通过基站分配的波束监听控制信道，从而在控制信道上接收基站通过波束赋形技术发送的控制信息，该控制信息包括资源分配控制指令，该资源分配控制指令用于指示基站为用户设备分配的上行/下行资源。其中，控制信道包括物理下行控制信道(英文：Physical Downlink Control Channel；简称：PDCCH)和增强物理下行控制信道(英文：Enhanced Physical Downlink Control Channel；简称：EPDCCH)中的至少一种。
当用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态时，可能用户设备上一次处于激活状态时接收资源分配控制信令的波束已经不再适用，因此，用户设备还需要确定本次所需要监听的控制信道的波束。本实施例提供了两种确定需要监听的控制信道的波束的方法，下面分别对这两种方法进行具体描述：
第一种方法，确定模块303，具体用于从RRM测量报告中每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息中，确定参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息，该参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率(英文：Reference Signal Receiving Power；简称：RSRP)和参考信号接收质量(英文：Reference  Signal Receiving Quality；简称：RSRQ)中的至少一种；
发送模块301，还用于通过确定模块302确定的第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上向用户设备发送控制信息，该用户设备用于从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，通过确定的第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束监听控制信息。
在第一种确定波束的方法中，基站可以和用户设备约定使用RRM测量报告中信号质量较好的初始波束。具体地，基站从RRM测量报告中读取参考信号信息，将参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束确定为需要在控制信道上发送控制信息的波束。其中，参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种。当参考信号信息是RSRP时，第一阈值可以是RSRP阈值；当参考信号信息是RSRQ时，第一阈值可以是RSRQ阈值；当参考信号信息是RSRP和RSRQ时，第一阈值可以包括RSRP阈值和RSRQ阈值。
比如，当参考信号信息是RSRP时，基站可以从RRM测量报告中筛选出至少一个大于RSRP阈值的RSRP，确定该至少一个RSRP对应的至少一个初始波束索引信息，根据该至少一个初始波束索引信息确定至少一个初始波束。或，当参考信号是RSRP和RSRQ时，基站可以从RRM测量报告中筛选出至少一个大于RSRP阈值的RSRP和至少一个大于RSRQ阈值的RSRQ，从该至少一个RSRP和至少一个RSRQ中确定出属于同一个初始波束的RSRP和RSRQ，确定对应的至少一个初始波束索引信息，根据该至少一个初始波束索引信息确定至少一个初始波束。
第二种方法，确定模块303，还用于通过RRC信令和媒体介入控制(英文：Media Access Control；简称：MAC)控制元(英文：Control Element；简称：CE)中的至少一种，从RRM测量报告中的各个初始波束索引信息中指定第二初始波束索引信息，该指定的第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束用于在控制信道上向用户设备发送控制信息。
在第二种确定波束的方法中，基站可以从分配的初始波束中指定用于在控制信道上发送资源分配控制信令的初始波束，再将指定的初始波束的第二初始波束索引信息通过RRC信令或MAC CE发送给用户设备。
需要补充说明的是，还可以通过上述第一种方法和第二种方法共同确定波束索引信息。比如，基站首先通过RRC信令和MAC CE中的至少一种指定第二初始波束索引信息，在间隔一定时间段之后，基站再根据参考信号信息从 RRM测量报告中选择第一初始波束索引信息；或，基站首先根据参考信号信息从RRM测量报告中选择第一初始波束索引信息，在间隔一定时间段之后，再通过RRC信令和MAC CE中的至少一种指定第二初始波束索引信息。当然，还可以通过其它方法确定波束索引信息，本实施例不作限定。
通过从RRM测量报告中每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息中，确定参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息，通过第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上向用户设备发送控制信息，可以使用RRM测量报告中信号质量较好的初始波束来传输控制信息，提高通信效率。
第二种应用场景，以基站应用于定时提前(英文：Time Advance；简称：TA)的场景中为例进行说明：
由于用户设备与基站之间存在的障碍物会降低初始波束的通信质量，因此，基站可以预先为用户设备配置备选波束，以通过避开障碍物来提高通信质量。因此，发送模块301，还用于将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束的备选波束索引信息发送给用户设备；
接收模块302，还用于接收用户设备从发送模块301发送的各个备选波束索引信息中选择并发送的第一备选波束索引信息，第一备选波束索引信息是初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值，且对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量后，确定出的参考信号信息大于第三阈值的备选波束索引信息，参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；
基站还包括通信模块304，用于根据接收模块302接收到的第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与用户设备进行通信。
其中，基站可以单独将备选波束索引信息发送给用户设备，也可以在向用户设备发送初始波束索引信息时，将备选波束索引信息和初始波束索引信息一起发送给用户设备，以节省传输开销。下文中各个实施例发送备选波束索引信息的方法与本实施例中发送备选波束索引信息的方法相同，不再赘述。
在用户设备通过基站分配的初始波束与基站通信时，用户设备可以定时或周期性地对初始波束的参考信号信息进行测量，当用户设备测量出参考信号信息小于第二阈值时，用户设备确定初始波束的质量较差，此时可以读取预存的备选波束索引信息，使用各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束与基站通 信。其中，参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种。当参考信号信息是RSRP时，第二阈值是RSRP阈值；当参考信号信息是RSRQ时，参考信号信息是RSRQ阈值；当参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ时，第二阈值包括RSRP阈值和RSRQ阈值。
在使用至少一个备选波束与基站通信之前，用户设备还需要对至少一个备选波束进行RRM测量，从得到的各个备选波束的参考信号信息中筛选出大于第三阈值的参考信号信息，从而根据筛选出的参考信号信息确定对应的备选波束。其中，对备选波束进行RRM测量可以是在用户设备检测出初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值后触发的，也可以是周期性触发的，本实施例不作限定。
当参考信号信息大于第三阈值时，可以确定与该参考信号信息对应的备选波束的质量较好，可以用来与基站进行通信。其中，检测参考信号信息是否大于第三阈值的方法与检测参考信号信息是否大于第二阈值的方法相同，此处不作赘述。第三阈值可以与第二阈值相同，也可以与第二阈值不同。
在用户设备筛选出质量较好的至少一个备选波束后，将该至少一个备选波束的第一备选波束索引信息发送给基站。基站根据接收到的至少一个备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与用户设备通信。
进一步地，除了用户设备主动对初始波束进行RRM测量，通过参考信号信息确定是否使用备选波束进行通信之外，基站还可以利用波束跟踪技术检测用户设备是否即将进入障碍物区域，当基站检测出用户设备即将进入障碍区区域，则触发用户设备对备选波束进行RRM测量。
本实施例中，由于不同的用户设备与基站之间的距离不同，因此，不同用户设备的信号传输时延不同。若需要使得不同用户设备发送的上行信息同时达到基站，则基站需要根据用户设备与基站之间的距离为不同的用户设备配置不同的TA。比如，当用户设备距离基站较远时，可以为该用户设备配置较小的上行TA；当用户设备距离基站较近时，可以为该用户设备配置较小的上行TA。
通常，备选波束与基站分配的初始波束相比，其传播路径较长，导致传播时延较大，此时，会导致上行TA发生突变，因此，用户设备需要重新确定上行TA。其中，上行TA的确定需要通过随机接入过程实现。
当用户设备主动触发随机接入过程时，用户设备主动向基站发送第一随机接入请求，此时，接收模块302，还用于接收用户设备发送的第一随机接入请 求；
基站还包括生成模块305，用于根据第一随机接入请求生成上行TA；
通信模块304，用于根据接收到的第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及生成模块304生成的上行TA与用户设备进行通信。
当用户设备在随机接入指令的指示下触发随机接入过程时，用户设备向基站发送第二随机接入请求，此时，确定模块303，还用于利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为用户设备分配的备选波束与用户设备进行通信；
发送模块301，用于在控制信道上向用户设备发送随机接入指令；
接收模块302，还用于接收用户设备根据发送模块301发送的随机接入指令发送的第二随机接入请求；
基站还包括生成模块305，用于根据第二随机接入请求生成上行TA；
通信模块304，还用于根据分配的第二备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及生成模块305生成的上行TA与用户设备进行通信。
其中，随机接入指令可以应用于非基于竞争的随机接入过程，基站通过该随机接入指令指示专用随机接入前导(preamble)和物理随机接入信道资源(PRACH resource)，此时，用户设备发送的第二随机接入请求指用户设备在基站指示的PRACH resource上向基站发送随机接入前导。对于基于竞争的随机接入过程，用户设备自己选择随机接入前导和PRACH resource，用户设备在自己所选择的PRACH resource上向基站发送随机接入前导。本发明下文各实施例中的随机接入过程同本实施例中的说明，下文不再赘述。
对应的，当用户设备检测出每个备选波束的参考信号信息均小于第三阈值且检测出至少一个初始波束的参考信号信息大于第二阈值时，确定初始波束的质量较好，将至少一个初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给基站，基站使用至少一个初始波束与基站通信。或，基站利用波束波形技术确定出用户设备即将离开障碍物区域且检测出至少一个初始波束的参考信号信息大于第二阈值时，确定使用至少一个初始波束与基站通信。此时，用户设备可以重新确定上行TA，也可以不确定上行TA。
本实施例中，用户设备所使用的波束可能存在不同的TA，这些TA可能针对同一毫米波基站，也可能针对不同毫米波基站。因此，基站还可以为每个用户设备设置至少一个TA组，每个TA组包括至少一个波束索引信息，且每个波束索引信息所对应的上行TA相同。波束索引信息可以是初始波束的初始波 束索引信息，也可以是备选波束的备选波束索引信息。其中，一个TA组中的波束索引信息所指示的波束可以属于同一个小区，也可以属于不同的小区，因此，还可以在TA组中标识每个波束所关联的小区的小区标识。
可选的，确定模块303，还用于在与用户设备进行通信的波束中，将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，该波束包括初始波束和备选波束中的至少一种；
生成模块305，用于根据确定模块303得到的每个分组生成一个TA组，TA组包括TA组标识、分组中各个波束的波束索引信息、分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT；
发送模块301，用于将生成模块305生成的TA组发送给用户设备。
需要补充说明的是，当用户设备移动导致上行TA变化时，基站可以根据新的上行TA重新为用户设备配置TA组以及分配在该TA组的波束索引信息和波束索引信息所关联的小区。其中，基站可以通过TA cmd调整上行TA以及TA组。
通过接收用户设备从发送的各个备选波束索引信息中选择并发送的第一备选波束索引信息，第一备选波束索引信息是初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值，且对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量后，确定出的参考信号信息大于第三阈值的备选波束索引信息；根据第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与用户设备进行通信，可以在分配的初始波束的质量较差时，使用质量较好的备选波束与用户设备通信，达到了提高通信效率的效果。
第三种应用场景，以基站应用于功率控制的场景中为例进行说明：
由于基站采用了波束赋形技术，在不同波束方向的路损可能不同，因此，需要从所分配的初始波束中选择出路损最小的至少一个初始波束，在选择出的至少一个初始波束上进行通信。
因此，接收模块302，用于确定模块303根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息之后，接收来源于用户设备的PHR，PHR中包括PH，PH是对各个初始波束的RSRP进行测量得到路损信息，根据最小的路损信息生成的；
基站还包括分配模块306，用于根据接收模块302接收到的PH和与该PH 对应的初始波束为用户设备分配上行资源；
通信模块304，具体用于通过与PH对应的初始波束在分配模块306分配的对应的上行资源上与用户设备进行通信。
当用户设备将PHR发送给millimeter wave eNB时，millimeter wave eNB可以直接接收PHR；当用户设备将PHR发送给LTE eNB时，LTE eNB把接收到的PHR转发给millimeter wave eNB。本发明下文各实施例中millimeter wave eNB接收PHR的方法同本实施例的说明，下文不再赘述。
基站在接收到PHR后，根据PHR中初始波束索引信息和PH为用户设备分配上行资源，使得用户设备在相应的初始波束上使用适宜且不超过用户设备最大允许发射功率的功率发送上行信息。
需要补充说明的是，当用户设备发送了一个初始波束的PH且基站确定用户设备支持同时使用至少两个初始波束通信时，可以通过测量用户设备的SRS确定出调度的至少两个初始波束。
若基站希望在更细的波束范围内对用户设备进行上行调度以获取更好的方向增益和更精确的功率控制，则可以动态通过MAC CE指示波束索引信息，使得用户设备报告其中路损最小的波束的PH。具体地，发送模块301，用于接收模块302接收来源于用户设备的功率余量报告PHR之前，向用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示，第一指示用于指示用户设备对第一波束的RSRP进行测量。
其中，单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束是指一个初始波束中的细化波束。比如，当单个初始波束的波束范围是30°-60°时，第一波束是指30°-60°之间的波束，比如，30°至40°的第一波束，或，35°-55°的第一波束等。
进一步地，由于不同波束上的路损信息不同，因此，在为波束分配发射功率时，还需要考虑该波束的路损信息。可选的，基站在为用户设备的多个波束分配上行资源时，可以对每个波束方向分别进行功率控制，比如，为需要消耗不同上行功率的波束分配不同的上行资源。
通过接收来源于用户设备的PHR，PHR中包括PH，PH是对各个初始波束的RSRP进行测量得到路损信息，根据最小的路损信息生成的；根据PH和与该PH对应的初始波束为用户设备分配上行资源；通过与PH对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与用户设备进行通信，可以选择在路损最小的初始波束 对应的上行资源上与用户设备通信，节省了发射功率。
第四种应用场景，以基站应用于信道状态指示(英文：Channel State Information；简称：CSI)测量的场景中为例进行说明：
本实施例中，用户设备还需要对初始波束进行CSI测量，得到CSI信息，以根据CSI信息确定初始波束的质量。其中，CSI信息包括信道质量指示(英文：Channel Quality Indication；简称：CQI)、预编码矩阵索引(英文：Precoding Matrix Index；简称PMI)、秩指示(英文：Rank Indication；简称：RI)。
因此，接收模块302，用于确定模块303根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息之后，接收来源于用户设备的CSI测量报告，CSI测量报告中包括CSI信息，CSI信息是对各个初始波束进行CSI测量得到CQI，根据最高的CQI生成的；
通信模块304，用于根据接收模块302接收到的CSI信息和该CSI信息对应的初始波束与用户设备进行通信。
当用户设备将CSI测量报告发送给millimeter wave eNB时，millimeter wave eNB可以直接接收CSI测量报告；当用户设备将CSI测量报告发送给LTE eNB时，LTE eNB把接收到的CSI测量报告转发给millimeter wave eNB。本发明下文各实施例中millimeter wave eNB接收CSI测量报告的方法同本实施例的说明，下文不再赘述。
基站接收到CSI测量报告后，根据CSI测量报告中的CSI信息选择质量较好的初始波束，利用选择出的初始波束与用户设备通信。
若基站希望在更细的波束范围内对用户设备进行上行调度以获取更好的方向增益，则可以动态通过MAC CE指示初始波束索引信息，使得用户设备报告其中CQI最高的CSI信息。具体地，发送模块301，用于接收模块302接收来源于用户设备的CSI测量报告之前，向用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示，第二指示用于指示用户设备对第二波束进行CSI测量。
其中，单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束是指一个初始波束中的细化波束。比如，当单个初始波束的波束范围是30°-60°时，单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束是指30°-60°之间的波束，比如，30°至40°的第二波束，或，35°-55°的第二波束等。
通过接收来源于用户设备的CSI测量报告，CSI测量报告中包括CSI信息，CSI信息是对各个初始波束进行CSI测量得到CQI，根据最高的CQI生成的；根据CSI信息和与该CSI信息对应的初始波束与用户设备进行通信，可以选择CQI最高的初始波束与用户设备通信，提高通信效率。
第五种应用场景，以基站应用于调整小区带宽的场景中为例进行说明：
本实施例中，当小区所接入的各个用户设备的业务量产生变化，导致小区的负荷产生变化时，基站需要对小区的小区带宽进行调整。比如，当负荷降低时，可能不再需要500MHz的最大带宽，此时可以减少小区带宽到例如200MHz；当负荷升高时，可能需要增加小区带宽，例如增加到400MHz或500MHz。如果每次调节无线资源时均需要删除原来的小区，再增加新的小区，则会导致信令开销和延迟都较大，而实际上可能仅小区带宽信息变化了，而其它无线资源配置参数不需要变化。因此，基站可以在用户设备的业务量产生变化时调整小区带宽。
具体地，基站还包括：
调整模块307，用于确定模块303根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息之后，根据至少一个用户设备的业务量调整小区带宽，小区带宽与业务量呈正相关关系；
发送模块301，用于将调整模块307调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息广播给各个用户设备，或，通过RRC信令将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息发送给各个用户设备，中心频点是调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或频率范围内的指定频率。
其中，基站在调整小区带宽时，可以使用以下方法之一：保持中心频点不变，从两侧对称缩减或增加，比如，小区带宽是100MHz至300MHz，中心频点是200MHz，则可以从两侧各增加50MHz，得到调整后的小区带宽是50MHz至350MHz；或，从单侧缩减或增加，比如，小区带宽是200MHz至300MHz，从单侧缩减100MHz，得到调整后的小区带宽是100MHz至300MHz；或，动态截取某一段连续频率范围，比如，小区带宽是100MHz至300MHz，从中截取出200MHz至300MHz作为调整后的小区带宽。其中，调整后的小区带宽为连续频率范围。
本实施例中，基站可以通过多次调整小区带宽，此时还可以设置每次可以 调节的粒度或单位信息，比如，一次缩减或增加20MHz等。其中，粒度或单位信息可以事先规定或者通过操作-管理-维护(英文：Operation Administration and Maintenance；简称：OAM)配置。
进一步地，基站可以直接通知所有的用户设备调整后的小区带宽和中心频点，或，基站通过LTE-A基站通知所有的用户设备新的小区带宽和中心频点。比如，基站在BCH或系统信息广播(英文：System Information Broadcast；简称：SIB)或通过RRC信令通知所有用户设备。
调整后的小区可以使用多信道，使得多信道共用同一个HARQ实体。此时，整个小区可以由多个相同带宽的信道组成，基站可以在位于中心频点的信道上发送公共信息，或，基站可以在每个信道的中心频率上均发送上述公共信息。即，若调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成，则发送模块301，用于在位于中心频点的信道上向各个用户设备发送公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上向各个用户设备发送公共信息。
其中，公共信息可以是PSS和SSS、广播信道(英文：Broadcast Channel；简称：BCH)、物理随机接入信道(英文：Physical Random Access Channel；简称：PRACH)等。
需要补充说明的是，当调整后的小区带宽的中心频点相对于调整前的小区带宽的中心频点发生变化时，基站还需要对仅在中心频点附近频率范围发送的公共信息的发送方式进行调整。比如，对于PSS和SSS、BCH、PRACH等，基站可以在调整后的小区带宽的中心频点上发送公共信息。其中，调整后的小区带宽的中心频点为调整后的小区带宽所对应的频率范围的中心位置。
通过根据至少一个用户设备的业务量调整小区带宽，小区带宽与业务量呈正相关关系；将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息广播给各个用户设备，或，通过RRC信令将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息发送给各个用户设备，可以仅调整小区带宽，而不需要配置其它无线资源配置参数，节省了配置小区带宽过程中的通信开销。
第六种应用场景，以基站应用于调整用户带宽的场景中为例进行说明：
有时候，小区的整体负荷情况变化不大但某些用户设备的业务量变化很大，导致这些用户设备对小区带宽的需求发生变化，此时仅需要调整这些用户设备所需要的小区带宽。从用户设备的角度看，其用户带宽可以自适应缩减或 增加；但从基站的角度看，基站仍然以原来使用的小区带宽发送信息，但不同用户设备所使用的频率范围可以不同。
因此，基站还包括：
调整模块307，用于确定模块303根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息之后，根据用户设备的业务量调整用户设备的用户带宽，用户带宽与业务量呈正相关关系；
发送模块301，用于通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种将调整模块307调整后的用户带宽的信息发送给用户设备。
由于用户带宽是由信道组成的，因此，基站在调整用户带宽时，可以根据业务量通过调整分配给用户设备的信道来调整用户带宽。具体地，调整模块307，具体用于根据用户设备的业务量调整为用户设备分配的信道，得到用户带宽。
比如，当业务量增加导致需要增加用户带宽时，可以激活处于去激活状态或休眠状态的信道，将该信道分配给用户设备；当业务量减少导致需要缩减用户带宽时，可以将处于激活状态的信道修改为去激活状态或休眠状态，此时用户设备无法使用该信道。
在确定出用户带宽后，基站可以使用RRC信令或MAC CE或控制信道将调整后的用户带宽指示给用户设备。
通过根据用户设备的业务量调整用户设备的用户带宽，用户带宽与业务量呈正相关关系；通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种将调整后的用户带宽的信息发送给用户设备，可以根据用户设备的业务量实时调整用户带宽，保证了用户设备的正常工作。
第七种应用场景，以基站应用于半持久调度(英文：Semi-Sersistent Scheduling；简称：SPS)的场景中为例进行说明：
发送模块301，用于向用户设备发送SPS资源信息，该SPS资源信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的资源信息和波束索引信息；
当SPS资源信息包括初始波束索引信息时，用户设备可以根据初始波束索引信息确定初始波束；当SPS资源信息不包括初始波束索引信息时，用户设备可以根据RRM测量报告所携带的初始波束索引信息确定初始波束，该初始波束可以是发送波束，也可以是接收波束。其中，基站可以在通过RRC信令配 置用户设备或在使用控制信道激活SPS资源时指示初始波束索引信息。
通信模块304，用于根据与SPS信息所指示的波束索引信息对应的波束与用户设备通信。
当SPS资源信息指示了至少两个波束索引信息时，基站可以与用户设备约定根据测量结果使用质量较好的波束或使用预设的波束。此时，用户设备可以在质量较好的波束上发送/接收信息，对应的，基站在该波束上接收/发送信息。或，用户设备在预设的至少一个波束上同时发送/接收信息，对应的，基站在该至少一个波束上同时接收/发送信息。
用户设备以SPS方式发送/接收信息时选择信号条件较好的波束进行，或者在一个或多个预先确定的波束上同时进行发送和/或接收。相应的，基站可以在一个或多个预先确定的波束上以SPS方式接收/发送信息。基站和用户设备可以根据测量结果在多个预先确定的波束范围内优先选择信号条件好的一个或多个波束。
需要补充说明的是，当基站根据测量结果或用户设备的建议的波束索引信息重新指示波束索引信息时，仅需要修改SPS资源信息中的波束索引信息，而不需要修改资源信息。此时，基站可以通过RRC信令或MAC CE或控制信道向用户设备重新指示波束索引信息。
通过向用户设备发送SPS资源信息，该SPS资源信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的资源信息和波束索引信息；根据与SPS信息所指示的波束索引信息对应的波束与用户设备通信，可以通过发送SPS资源信息的方式为用户设备配置资源和波束，可以解决动态为用户设备配置资源和波束造成的浪费通信开销的问题，达到了节省通信开销的效果。
第八种应用场景，以基站应用于点对点(英文：Device to Device；简称：D2D)的场景中为例进行说明：
为了避免D2D通信相互干扰或D2D通信干扰小区内其它用户设备的正常通信，基站为用户设备分配D2D通信的初始波束的初始波束索引信息。
分配模块306，用于向用户设备发送D2D通信时使用的资源指示信息，该资源指示信息包括D2D资源信息和初始波束索引信息，用于指示用户设备与其它用户设备之间采用D2D通信时使用的资源和初始波束。
其中，基站分配的波束索引信息可以是基站设置的，也可以是用户设备根 据测量结果确定出质量较好的波束的波束索引信息后，向基站请求分配的初始波束索引信息，用于用户设备与其它用户设备之间进行D2D通信。D2D资源信息包括时域资源信息和频域资源信息。
需要补充说明的是，基站与用户设备之间采用的蜂窝通信和用户设备与其它用户设备之间采用的D2D通信在不同的初始波束上可以重用时域资源和频域资源。
通过向用户设备发送D2D通信时使用的资源指示信息，该资源指示信息包括D2D资源信息和波束索引信息，用于指示用户设备与其它用户设备之间采用D2D通信时使用的资源和波束，可以根据基站分配的初始波束与其它用户设备通信，解决D2D通信之间相互干扰的问题，达到了提高通信质量的效果。
综上所述，本发明实施例提供的基站，通过将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给UE；接收来源于用户设备的RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的；根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息，可以根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与用户设备通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了现有的毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，达到了延长毫米波频段的传输距离的效果。。
请参考图4，其示出了本发明一个实施例提供的用户设备的结构框架图。该用户设备可以为图1所示的UE，UE可以包括：接收模块401和发送模块402。
接收模块401，用于接收基站发送的初始波束索引信息，该初始波束索引信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束。
其中，初始波束索引信息详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
发送模块402，用于发送RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的，该RRM测量报告用于指示基站确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息。
为了能够从基站分配的初始波束中选择信号质量较好的初始波束进行通信，以提高通信质量，用户设备还可以对确定出的基站分配的初始波束进行 RRM测量，根据测量结果生成RRM测量报告。
其中，用户设备可以将RRM测量报告发送给LTE eNB，由LTE eNB将RRM测量报告转发给millimeter wave eNB；也可以将RRM测量报告发送给millimeter wave eNB本实施例不限定用户设备对RRM测量报告的发送方式。本发明下文各实施例中用户设备发送RRM测量报告的方法同本实施例的说明，下文不再赘述。
这里RRM测量可以指通常意义下的用于移动性管理的测量，是经过RRC层过滤的测量方法，也可以是指通过波束训练的方式进行的测量，具体详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
基站根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与UE通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，能够延长毫米波频段的传输距离。
综上所述，本发明实施例提供的用户设备，通过接收基站送的初始波束索引信息，该初始波束索引信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束；发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的，该RRM测量报告用于指示基站确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息，可以通过RRM测量报告向基站报告初始波束的信号质量，使基站选择信号质量较好的波束与用户设备通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了现有的毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，达到了延长毫米波频段的传输距离的效果。
请参考图5，其示出了本发明一个实施例提供的用户设备的结构框架图。该用户设备可以为图1所示的UE，UE可以包括：接收模块501和发送模块502。
接收模块501，用于接收基站发送的初始波束索引信息，该初始波束索引信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束。
其中，初始波束索引信息详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
发送模块502，用于发送RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的，该RRM测量 报告用于指示基站确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息。
为了能够从基站分配的初始波束中选择信号质量较好的初始波束进行通信，以提高通信质量，用户设备还可以对确定出的基站分配的初始波束进行RRM测量，根据测量结果生成RRM测量报告。这里RRM测量可以指通常意义下的用于移动性管理的测量，是经过RRC层过滤的测量方法，也可以是指通过波束训练的方式进行的测量，具体详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
其中，用户设备发送RRM测量报告的方法详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，下文不再赘述。
基站根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与UE通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，能够延长毫米波频段的传输距离。
下面分别以不同的应用场景为例对波束配置方法进行详细说明，具体如下：
第一种应用场景，以用户设备应用于不连续接收的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第一种应用场景：
用户设备存在休眠状态和激活状态，且处于激活状态的用户设备需要通过基站分配的波束监听控制信道，从而在控制信道上接收基站通过波束赋形技术发送的控制信息，该控制信息包括资源分配控制指令，该资源分配控制指令用于指示基站为用户设备分配的上行/下行资源。当用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态时，可能用户设备上一次处于激活状态时接收资源分配控制信令的波束已经不再适用，因此，用户设备还需要确定本次所需要监听的控制信道的波束。本实施例提供了两种确定需要监听的控制信道的波束的方法，下面分别对这两种方法进行具体描述：
第一种方法，用户设备需要根据RRM测量报告确定出需要监听控制信道的波束，因此，若RRM测量报告包括每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息，该参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率RSRP和参考信号接收质量RSRQ中的至少一种，则用户设备，还包括：
确定模块403，用于发送模块402发送RRM测量报告之后，在用户设备 从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，确定参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息；
监听模块404，用于通过确定模块403确定的第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
在用户设备发送RRM测量报告后，若用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态，则可以根据上述方法从RRM测量报告中确定至少一个初始波束，并通过确定的该至少一个初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
其中，用户设备确定第一初始波束索引信息的流程与基站确定第一初始波束索引信息的流程相同，详见图3所示的实施例中第一种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
第二种方法，用户设备需要接收指定的波束索引信息，则接收模块401，还用于接收基站通过RRC信令和MAC CE中的至少一种从RRM测量报告中的各个初始波束索引信息中指定的第二初始波束索引信息；
用户设备还包括监听模块404，用于通过接收模块401接收到的第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
需要补充说明的是，还可以通过上述第一种方法和第二种方法共同确定波束索引信息。比如，基站首先通过RRC信令和MAC CE中的至少一种指定第二初始波束索引信息，在间隔一定时间段之后，基站再根据参考信号信息从RRM测量报告中选择第一初始波束索引信息；或，基站首先根据参考信号信息从RRM测量报告中选择第一初始波束索引信息，在间隔一定时间段之后，再通过RRC信令和MAC CE中的至少一种指定第二初始波束索引信息。当然，还可以通过其它方法确定波束索引信息，本实施例不作限定。
在确定控制信道的初始波束后，用户设备还可以通过以下至少一种方式对控制信道进行监听。其中，监听模块404，具体用于以全向方式接收控制信息，或，以大于等于第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收控制信息，或，以小于第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收控制信息；或，监听模块404，具体用于以全向方式接收控制信息，或，以大于等于第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收控制信息，或，以小于第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收控制信息。
本实施例中，用户设备可以以全向方式接收控制信息，此时，也可以不必确定控制信道的初始波束。由于波束范围越小，增益越大，因此，以全向方式 接收接收控制信息会导致增益较小，因此，用户设备还可以根据第一初始波束索引信息或第二初始波束索引信息确定波束范围，根据该波束范围接收控制信息。
以根据第一初始波束索引信息确定波束范围为例进行说明，则在确定了波束范围后，用户设备可以以大于等于该初始波束的波束范围接收控制信息。比如，第一初始波束索引信息所指示的波束范围是20°-30°，则用户设备可以以15°-35°的波束范围接收控制信息。或者，用户设备可以以小于该波束范围的波束范围接收控制信息。比如，第一初始波束索引信息所指示的波束范围是10°-30°，则用户设备可以以15°-25°的波束范围接收控制信息。
需要补充说明的是，根据第二初始波束索引信息确定波束范围的方法与根据第一初始索引信息确定波束范围的方法相同，此处不赘述。
通过若RRM测量报告包括每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息，参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率RSRP和参考信号接收质量RSRQ中的至少一种，则在用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，用户设备确定参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息；通过第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息，可以使用RRM测量报告中信号质量较好的初始波束来接收控制信息，提高通信效率。
第二种应用场景，以用户设备应用于TA的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第二种应用场景：
由于用户设备与基站之间存在的障碍物会降低初始波束的通信质量，因此，基站可以预先为用户设备配置备选波束，以通过避开障碍物来提高通信质量。因此，接收模块401，还用于接收基站发送的备选波束索引信息，备选波束索引信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束；
用户设备还包括测量模块405，用于在初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值时，对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量，参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；
确定模块403，用于根据测量模块405进行的RRM测量确定出参考信号信息大于第三阈值的第一备选波束索引信息；
发送模块402，用于将确定模块403确定出的第一备选波束索引信息发送给基站，基站用于根据第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与用户设备进 行通信。
其中，基站可以单独将备选波束索引信息发送给用户设备，也可以在向用户设备发送初始波束索引信息时，将备选波束索引信息和初始波束索引信息一起发送给用户设备，以节省传输开销。下文中各个实施例发送备选波束索引信息的方法与本实施例中发送备选波束索引信息的方法相同，不再赘述。
本实施例中，用户设备确定第一备选波束索引信息的方法详见图3所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
进一步地，除了用户设备主动对初始波束进行RRM测量，通过参考信号信息确定是否使用备选波束进行通信之外，基站还可以利用波束跟踪技术检测用户设备是否即将进入障碍物区域，当基站检测出用户设备即将进入障碍区区域，则触发用户设备对备选波束进行RRM测量。
本实施例中，由于不同的用户设备与基站之间的距离不同，因此，不同用户设备的信号传输时延不同。若需要使得不同用户设备发送的上行信息同时达到基站，则基站需要根据用户设备与基站之间的距离为不同的用户设备配置不同的TA。通常，备选波束与基站分配的初始波束相比，其传播路径较长，导致传播时延较大，此时，会导致上行TA发生突变，因此，用户设备需要重新确定上行TA。其中，上行TA的确定需要通过随机接入过程实现。
本实施例中，用户设备可以接收基站发送的随机接入指令，在随机接入指令的指示下触发随机接入过程，以重新获取上行TA，也可以主动触发随机接入过程，以重新获取上行TA。具体地，发送模块402，还用于自动向基站发送第一随机接入请求，第一随机接入请求用于指示基站生成上行TA，并根据分配的第二备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及上行TA与用户设备进行通信；或，
接收模块401，还用于在控制信道上接收基站发送的随机接入指令，随机接入指令是基站利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为用户设备分配的备选波束与用户设备进行通信后发送的，根据随机接入指令向基站发送第二随机接入请求，第二随机接入请求用于指示基站生成上行TA，并根据接收到的第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及上行TA与用户设备进行通信。
对应的，当用户设备检测出每个备选波束的参考信号信息均小于第三阈值且检测出至少一个初始波束的参考信号信息大于第二阈值时，确定初始波束的质量较好，将至少一个初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给基站，基站使用至 少一个初始波束与基站通信。或，基站利用波束波形技术确定出用户设备即将离开障碍物区域且检测出至少一个初始波束的参考信号信息大于第二阈值时，确定使用至少一个初始波束与基站通信。此时，用户设备可以重新确定上行TA，也可以不确定上行TA。
本实施例中，用户设备所使用的波束可能存在不同的TA，这些TA可能针对同一毫米波基站，也可能针对不同毫米波基站。因此，基站还可以为每个用户设备设置至少一个TA组，每个TA组包括至少一个波束索引信息，且每个波束索引信息所对应的上行TA相同。波束索引信息可以是初始波束的初始波束索引信息，也可以是备选波束的备选波束索引信息。其中，一个TA组中的波束索引信息所指示的波束可以属于同一个小区，也可以属于不同的小区，因此，还可以在TA组中标识每个波束所关联的小区的小区标识。
对应的，接收模块401，用于接收基站发送的TA组，TA组是基站在与用户设备进行通信的波束中，将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，根据每个分组生成的，TA组包括TA组标识、分组中各个波束的波束索引信息、分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT，波束包括初始波束和备选波束中的至少一种；
测量模块405，用于在接收模块401接收到的TA组中的TAT超时，则检测TA组中的小区标识是否对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且其它TA组的TAT未超时；
用户设备还包括：维护模块406，用于在测量模块405检测出TA组中的小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且其它TA组的TAT未超时时，确定波束索引信息所对应的小区，维护小区所对应的混合自动重传请求(英文：Hybrid Automatic Repeat Req用户设备st；简称：HARQ)缓冲区和探测参考信号(英文：Sounding Reference Signal；简称：SRS)资源；
释放模块407，用于在测量模块405检测出TA组中的小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且其它TA组的TAT超时时，确定波束索引信息所对应的小区，释放小区所对应的HARQ缓冲区和SRS资源。
比如，TA组1包括波束1和波束2且波束1对应于小区1，用户设备在检测出TAT超时后，若检测出小区1关联的波束3还存在TA组2中且TA组2中的TAT未超时，则用户设备维护小区所对应的HARQ缓冲区和SRS资源且在波束1不发送SRS、HARQ ACK/NACK；若检测出小区1关联的波束3存在 TA组2且TA组2中的TAT超时时，则用户设备释放小区所对应的HARQ缓冲区和SRS资源。
通过接收基站发送的备选波束索引信息，备选波束索引信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束；若初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值，则对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量；根据RRM测量确定出参考信号信息大于第三阈值的第一备选波束索引信息；将确定出的第一备选波束索引信息发送给基站，可以在分配的初始波束的质量较差时，使用质量较好的备选波束与基站通信，达到了提高通信效率的效果。
第三种应用场景，以用户设备应用于功率控制的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第三种应用场景：
由于基站采用了波束赋形技术，在不同波束方向的路损可能不同，因此，需要从所分配的初始波束中选择出路损最小的至少一个初始波束，在选择出的至少一个初始波束上进行通信。
可选的，用户设备还包括：
测量模块405，用于发送模块402发送RRM测量报告之后，对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个初始波束的路损信息；
生成模块408，用于根据测量模块407测出的最小的路损信息生成功率余量(英文：Power Headroom；简称：PH)，得到功率余量报告(英文：Power Headroom Report；简称：PHR)；
发送模块402，用于发送生成模块408生成的PHR，该PHR用于指示基站根据PH和与该PH对应的初始波束为用户设备分配上行资源，通过与PH对应的波束在对应的上行资源上与用户设备进行通信。
其中，基站所发送的波束索引信息可以对应于位于RRM测量报告对应的波束范围外的波束，也可以对应于位于RRM测量报告对应的波束范围内的初始波束，还可以是自适应确定的波束，本实施例不作限定。
当用户设备支持同时发送至少两个初始波束的PH以支持多波束并行功率控制时，用户设备可以从该至少两个初始波束的PH中筛选出满足预定条件的至少两个PH，将该至少两个初始波束的PH添加到PHR中。其中，满足预定条件可以是PH大于固定阈值，或，PH与该至少两个初始波束中某一个初始波 束的PH的差值大于固定阈值等。
其中，用户设备可以将PHR发送给LTE eNB，由LTE eNB将PHR转发给millimeter wave eNB；也可以将PHR发送给millimeter wave eNB，本实施例不限定用户设备对PHR的发送方式。本发明下文各实施例中用户设备发送PHR的方法同本实施例的说明，下文不再赘述。
若基站希望在更细的波束范围内对用户设备进行上行调度以获取更好的方向增益和更精确的功率控制，则可以动态通过MAC CE指示波束索引信息，使得用户设备报告其中路损最小的波束的PH。
因此，接收模块401，还用于接收基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示；
生成模块408，还用于对接收模块401接收到的第一指示所指示的各个第一波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个第一波束的路损信息。
用户设备在测得各个初始波束索引信息的PH后，若检测出测得的初始波束索引信息的路损信息与RRM测量报告所包括的初始波束索引信息的路损信息的差值小于预定阈值，则用户设备可以将RRM测量报告所包括的初始波束索引信息的PH添加到PHR中进行发送。
需要补充说明的是，当基站未限制用户设备的上行发射功率时，用户设备可以在上行支持多波束发送以提高空口效率。具体地，用户设备可以在多个波束上发送相同或不同的信息、发送相同或者不同的HARQ冗余版本(英文：Redundancy Version；简称：RV)、在部分波束上发送控制信息，部分波束上发送数据信息等。
进一步地，当用户设备使用多波束通信时，还需要对波束之间的上行发射功率进行分配。比如，当多个波束之间的路损差别不大时，用户设备可以将总发射功率在多个波束之间平均分配。
若用户设备同时支持多波束且一定程度功率受限时，还需要对至少一个波束的发射功率进行下调。比如，用户设备可以按照相同的因子或系数平均下调每个波束的发射功率；或，用户设备可以对不同的波束设置不同的因子或系数，根据各自的因子或系数下调波束的发射功率；或，用户设备可以按照不同波束上承载的信息内容区分优先级，根据优先级下调每个波束的发射功率。其中，控制信息和数据信息同时发送时，承载控制信息的波束优先级高于承载数据信息的波束优先级。
通过对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个初始波束的路损信息；根据最小的路损信息生成PH，得到PHR；发送PHR，PHR用于指示基站根据PH和与PH对应的初始波束为用户设备分配上行资源，通过与PH对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与用户设备进行通信，可以选择在路损最小的初始波束对应的上行资源上与基站通信，节省了发射功率。
第四种应用场景，以用户设备应用于CSI测量的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第四种应用场景：
本实施例中，用户设备还需要对初始波束进行CSI测量，得到CSI信息，以根据CSI信息确定初始波束的质量。
具体地，用户设备还包括：
测量模块405，用于发送模块403发送RRM测量报告之后，对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束进行CSI测量，得到各个初始波束的信道质量指示(英文：Channel Quality Information；简称：CQI)；
生成模块408，用于根据测量模块405测出的最高的CQI生成至少一个信道状态指示CSI信息，得到CSI测量报告；
发送模块402，用于发送生成模块408生成的CSI测量报告，该CSI测量报告用于指示基站根据CSI信息和与该CSI信息对应的初始波束与用户设备进行通信。
其中，用户设备测量的波束可以是RRM测量报告范围内的初始波束，则用户设备首先需要获取RRM测量报告所对应的初始波束。比如，RRM测量默认对应于用户设备接入基站时对应的主同步信号(英文：Primary Synchronization Signal；简称：PSS)和辅同步信号(英文：Secondary Synchronization Signal；简称：SSS)的波束；或，用户设备在RRM测量报告中包含初始波束的标识信息，用户设备根据标识信息确定波束；或，用户设备根据下行参考信号的测量结果决定初始波束索引信息，并在RRM测量报告中包含该初始波束索引信息。
用户设备在测量出各个初始波束的CSI信息后，可以从各个CSI信息中筛选出包括最高CQI的CSI信息，并根据筛选出的至少一个CSI信息生成CSI测量报告。其中，CSI信息包括CQI、PMI和RI中的至少一种，用户设备可以同时或在不同的时刻将CQI、PMI和RI中的至少一种进行发送。
其中，用户设备可以将CSI测量报告发送给LTE eNB，由LTE eNB将CSI测量报告转发给millimeter wave eNB；也可以将CSI测量报告发送给millimeter wave eNB，本实施例不限定用户设备对CSI测量报告的发送方式。本发明下文各实施例中用户设备发送CSI测量报告的方法同本实施例的说明，下文不再赘述。
若基站希望在更细的波束范围内对用户设备进行上行调度以获取更好的方向增益，则可以动态通过MAC CE指示初始波束索引信息，使得用户设备报告其中CQI最高的CSI信息。具体地，
接收模块401，还用于接收基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示；
生成模块408，还用于对接收模块401接收到的第二指示所指示的各个第二波束进行CSI测量，得到各个第二波束的CQI。
通过对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束进行信道状态指示CSI测量，得到各个初始波束的CQI；根据最高的CQI生成CSI信息，得到CSI测量报告；发送CSI测量报告，CSI测量报告用于指示基站根据CSI信息和与CSI信息对应的初始波束与用户设备进行通信，可以选择CQI最高的初始波束与基站通信，提高通信效率。
第五种应用场景，以用户设备应用于调整小区带宽的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第五种应用场景：
本实施例中，当小区所接入的各个用户设备的业务量产生变化，导致小区的负荷产生变化时，基站需要对小区的小区带宽进行调整。其中，基站调整小区带宽的方式详见图3所示的实施例中第五种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
因此，接收模块401，还用于通过广播接收基站发送的调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息，或，接收基站发送的RRC信令，RRC信令中携带有调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息；调整后的小区带宽是基站根据至少一个用户设备的业务量调整的，且小区带宽与业务量呈正相关关系，中心频点是调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或频率范围内的指定频率；
在调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成时，在位于中心频点的信道上接收基站发送的公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上接收基站发送的发送公共 信息。
用户设备可以以与基站发送调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息的方式对应的方式接收调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息，根据中心频点的信息在位于中心频点的信道上接收公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上接收公共信息。
通过广播接收基站发送的调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息，或，接收基站发送的RRC信令，RRC信令中携带有调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息；调整后的小区带宽是基站根据用户设备的业务量调整的，且小区带宽与业务量呈正相关关系，中心频点是调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或频率范围内的指定频率，可以仅调整小区带宽，而不需要配置其它无线资源配置参数，节省了配置小区带宽过程中的通信开销。
第六种应用场景，以用户设备应用于调整用户带宽的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第六种应用场景：
有时候，小区的整体负荷情况变化不大但某些用户设备的业务量变化很大，导致这些用户设备对小区带宽的需求发生变化，此时仅需要调整这些用户设备所需要的小区带宽。从用户设备的角度看，其用户带宽可以自适应缩减或增加；但从基站的角度看，基站仍然以原来使用的小区带宽发送信息，但不同用户设备所使用的频率范围可以不同。
由于用户带宽是由信道组成的，因此，基站在调整用户带宽时，可以根据业务量通过调整分配给用户设备的信道来调整用户带宽。
因此，接收模块401，用于通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种接收基站发送的调整后的用户带宽的信息，调整后的用户带宽是基站根据用户设备的业务量调整的，且用户带宽与业务量呈正相关关系；
用户设备还包括监听模块404，用于对组成接收模块401接收到的用户带宽的信道的控制信道进行监听。
用户设备可以以与基站发送调整后的用户带宽的信息的方式对应的方式接收调整后的用户带宽的信息，对组成用户带宽的信道进行监听。其中，调整用户带宽调整后所剩余的带宽在频域上可以是连续的或非连续的。
通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种接收基站发送的调整后的用户带宽的信息，调整后的用户带宽是基站根据用户设备的业务量调整 的，且用户带宽与业务量呈正相关关系，可以根据用户设备的业务量实时调整用户带宽，保证了用户设备的正常工作。
第七种应用场景，以用户设备应用于SPS的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第七种应用场景：
接收模块401，用于接收基站发送的SPS资源信息；
确定模块403，用于根据SPS资源信息确定基站为用户设备分配的资源信息和波束索引信息。
当SPS资源信息包括初始波束索引信息时，用户设备可以根据初始波束索引信息确定初始波束；当SPS资源信息不包括初始波束索引信息时，用户设备可以根据RRM测量报告所携带的初始波束索引信息确定初始波束，该初始波束可以是发送波束，也可以是接收波束。其中，基站可以在通过RRC信令配置用户设备或在使用控制信道激活SPS资源时指示初始波束索引信息。
当SPS资源信息指示了至少两个波束索引信息时，基站可以与用户设备约定根据测量结果使用质量较好的波束或使用预设的波束。此时，用户设备可以在质量较好的波束上发送/接收信息，对应的，基站在该波束上接收/发送信息。或，用户设备在预设的至少一个波束上同时发送/接收信息，对应的，基站在该至少一个波束上同时接收/发送信息。
用户设备以SPS方式发送/接收信息时选择信号条件较好的波束进行，或者在一个或多个预先确定的波束上同时进行发送和/或接收。相应的，基站可以在一个或多个预先确定的波束上以SPS方式接收/发送信息。基站和用户设备可以根据测量结果在多个预先确定的波束范围内优先选择信号条件好的一个或多个波束。
通过接收基站发送的SPS资源信息，根据SPS资源信息确定基站为用户设备分配的资源信息和波束索引信息，可以通过接收SPS资源信息的方式配置资源和波束，可以解决动态为用户设备配置资源和波束造成的浪费通信开销的问题，达到了节省通信开销的效果。
第八种应用场景，以用户设备应用于D2D的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第八种应用场景：
为了避免D2D通信相互干扰或D2D通信干扰小区内其它用户设备的正常 通信，基站为用户设备分配D2D通信的初始波束的初始波束索引信息。
接收模块401，用于接收基站发送的资源指示信息，该资源指示信息包括D2D资源信息和初始波束索引信息；
用户设备还包括通信模块409，用于根据接收模块401接收到的资源指示信息确定与其它用户设备之间采用D2D通信时使用的资源和初始波束。
其中，基站分配的初始波束索引信息可以是基站设置的，也可以是用户设备根据测量结果确定出质量较好的波束的波束索引信息后，向基站请求分配的初始波束索引信息，用于用户设备与其它用户设备之间进行D2D通信。D2D资源信息包括时域资源信息和频域资源信息。
需要补充说明的是，基站与用户设备之间采用的蜂窝通信和用户设备与其它用户设备之间采用的D2D通信在不同的初始波束上可以重用时域资源和频域资源。
通过接收基站发送的资源指示信息，该资源指示信息包括D2D资源信息和波束索引信息；根据资源指示信息确定与其它用户设备之间采用D2D通信时使用的资源和波束，可以根据基站分配的波束与其它用户设备通信，解决D2D通信之间相互干扰的问题，达到了提高通信质量的效果。
综上所述，本发明实施例提供的用户设备，通过接收基站送的初始波束索引信息，该初始波束索引信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束；发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的，该RRM测量报告用于指示基站确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息，可以通过RRM测量报告向基站报告初始波束的信号质量，使基站选择信号质量较好的波束与用户设备通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了现有的毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，达到了延长毫米波频段的传输距离的效果。
请参考图6，其示出了本发明一个实施例提供的基站的结构框架图。该基站可以是图1所示的基站；基站可以包括：发射机601、接收机602和处理器603。
发射机601，用于将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给用户设备。
其中，初始波束索引信息用于指示基站向用户设备发送下行信息时所使用的初始波束，由基站预先配置给用户设备。该初始波束索引信息关联基站发送下行信息时所使用的天线权值或码本信息，以确定初始波束的方向和宽度等信息。其中，初始波束的方向是指初始波束相对于水平方向和/或垂直方向的角度信息。该初始波束索引信息还关联初始波束的特征信息，基站在不同的初始波束上发送该初始波束特定的特征信息，以便用户设备根据不同的特征信息识别不同的初始波束，具体详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
接收机602，用于接收来源于用户设备的RRM测量报告，RRM测量报告是用户设备对发射机601发送的初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的。
处理器603，用于根据接收机602接收到的RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息。
基站根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与UE通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，能够延长毫米波频段的传输距离。
综上所述，本发明实施例提供的基站，通过将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给UE；接收来源于用户设备的RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的；根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息，可以根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与用户设备通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了现有的毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，达到了延长毫米波频段的传输距离的效果。
本发明又一实施例提供了一种基站。该基站可以是图1所示的基站；基站可以包括：发射机601、接收机602和处理器603。
发射机601，用于将为用户设备用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给用户设备。
其中，初始波束索引信息用于指示基站向用户设备发送下行信息时所使用的波束，由基站预先配置给用户设备。该初始波束索引信息关联基站发送下行 信息时所使用的天线权值或码本信息，以确定初始波束的方向和宽度等信息。其中，初始波束的方向是指初始波束相对于水平方向和/或垂直方向的角度信息，比如，一个初始波束的波束方向为相对于水平方向的30°-60°方向，或，相对于垂直方向的20°-40°方向等。该初始波束索引信息还关联初始波束的特征信息，基站在不同的初始波束上发送该初始波束特定的特征信息，以便用户设备根据不同的特征信息识别不同的初始波束，具体详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
本实施例中，基站可以为用户设备配置至少一个初始波束，并将该至少一个初始波束中每个初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给用户设备，以便用户设备明确在哪个初始波束上接收基站发送的下行信息。
接收机602，用于接收来源于用户设备的无线资源管理RRM测量报告，RRM测量报告是用户设备对发射机601发送的初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的。
处理器603，用于根据接收机602接收到的RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息。
基站根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与UE通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，能够延长毫米波频段的传输距离。
下面分别以不同的应用场景为例对波束配置方法进行详细说明，具体如下：
第一种应用场景，以基站应用于不连续接收的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第一种应用场景：
用户设备存在休眠状态和激活状态，且处于激活状态的用户设备需要通过基站分配的波束监听控制信道，从而在控制信道上接收基站通过波束赋形技术发送的控制信息，该控制信息包括资源分配控制指令，该资源分配控制指令用于指示基站为用户设备分配的上行/下行资源。当用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态时，可能用户设备上一次处于激活状态时接收资源分配控制信令的波束已经不再适用，因此，用户设备还需要确定本次所需要监听的控制信道的波束。本实施例提供了两种确定需要监听的控制信道的波束的方法，下面分别对这两种方法进行具体描述：
第一种方法，处理器603，具体用于从RRM测量报告中每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息中，确定参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息，参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率RSRP和参考信号接收质量RSRQ中的至少一种；
发射机601，还用于通过处理器603确定的第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上向用户设备发送控制信息，用户设备用于从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，通过确定的第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束监听控制信息。
在第一种确定波束的方法中，基站可以和用户设备约定使用RRM测量报告中信号质量较好的初始波束，具体流程详见图3所示的实施例中第一种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
第二种方法，发射机601，还用于通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体接入控制层控制元MAC CE中的至少一种，从RRM测量报告中的各个初始波束索引信息中指定第二初始波束索引信息，指定的第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束用于在控制信道上向用户设备发送控制信息。
在第二种确定波束的方法中，基站可以从分配的初始波束中指定用于在控制信道上发送资源分配控制信令的初始波束，再将指定的初始波束的第二初始波束索引信息通过RRC信令或MAC CE发送给用户设备。
需要补充说明的是，还可以通过上述第一种方法和第二种方法共同确定波束索引信息，详见图3所示的实施例中第一种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
通过从RRM测量报告中每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息中，确定参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息，通过第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上向用户设备发送控制信息，可以使用RRM测量报告中信号质量较好的初始波束来传输控制信息，提高通信效率。
第二种应用场景，以基站应用于TA的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第二种应用场景：
由于用户设备与基站之间存在的障碍物会降低波束的通信质量，因此，基站可以预先为用户设备配置备选波束，以通过避开障碍物来提高通信质量，因此，具体地，发射机601，还用于将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束 的备选波束索引信息发送给用户设备；
接收机602，还用于接收用户设备从发射机601发送的各个备选波束索引信息中选择并发送的第一备选波束索引信息，第一备选波束索引信息是初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值，且对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量后，确定出的参考信号信息大于第三阈值的备选波束索引信息，参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；
处理器603，还用于根据接收机602接收到的第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与用户设备进行通信。
基站为用户设备配置备选波束的流程详见图3所示的实施例中第二种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。基站根据接收到的至少一个备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与用户设备通信。
进一步地，除了用户设备主动对初始波束进行RRM测量，通过参考信号信息确定是否使用备选波束进行通信之外，基站还可以利用波束跟踪技术检测用户设备是否即将进入障碍物区域，当基站检测出用户设备即将进入障碍区区域，则触发用户设备对备选波束进行RRM测量。
本实施例中，由于不同的用户设备与基站之间的距离不同，因此，不同用户设备的信号传输时延不同。若需要使得不同用户设备发送的上行信息同时达到基站，则基站需要根据用户设备与基站之间的距离为不同的用户设备配置不同的TA。通常，备选波束与基站分配的初始波束相比，其传播路径较长，导致传播时延较大，此时，会导致上行TA发生突变，因此，用户设备需要重新确定上行TA。其中，上行TA的确定需要通过随机接入过程实现。
当用户设备主动触发随机接入过程时，用户设备主动向基站发送第一随机接入请求，此时，发射机601，还用于接收用户设备发送的第一随机接入请求；
处理器603，具体用于根据第一随机接入请求生成上行时间提前TA；根据接收到的至第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及上行TA与用户设备进行通信。
当用户设备在随机接入指令的指示下触发随机接入过程时，用户设备向基站发送第二随机接入请求，此时，处理器603，还用于利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为用户设备分配的备选波束与用户设备进行通信；
发射机601，还用于在控制信道上向用户设备发送随机接入指令；
接收机602，还用于接收用户设备根据发射机601发送的随机接入指令发 送的第二随机接入请求；
处理器603，还用于根据接收机602接收到的第二随机接入请求生成上行TA；根据分配的第二备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及上行TA与用户设备进行通信。
本实施例中，用户设备所使用的波束可能存在不同的TA，这些TA可能针对同一毫米波基站，也可能针对不同毫米波基站。因此，基站还可以为每个用户设备设置至少一个TA组，每个TA组包括至少一个波束索引信息，且每个波束索引信息所对应的上行TA相同。波束索引信息可以是初始波束的初始波束索引信息，也可以是备选波束的备选波束索引信息。其中，一个TA组中的波束索引信息所指示的波束可以属于同一个小区，也可以属于不同的小区，因此，还可以在TA组中标识每个波束所关联的小区的小区标识。
可选的，处理器603，还用于在与用户设备进行通信的波束中，将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，波束包括初始波束和备选波束中的至少一种；根据每个分组生成一个TA组，TA组包括TA组标识、分组中各个波束的波束索引信息、分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT；
发射机601，还用于将处理器603生成的TA组发送给用户设备。
需要补充说明的是，当用户设备移动导致上行TA变化时，基站可以根据新的上行TA重新为用户设备配置TA组以及分配在该TA组的波束索引信息和波束索引信息所关联的小区。其中，基站可以通过TA cmd调整上行TA以及TA组。
通过接收用户设备从发送的各个备选波束索引信息中选择并发送的第一备选波束索引信息，第一备选波束索引信息是初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值，且对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量后，确定出的参考信号信息大于第三阈值的备选波束索引信息；根据第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与用户设备进行通信，可以在分配的初始波束的质量较差时，使用质量较好的备选波束与用户设备通信，达到了提高通信效率的效果。
第三种应用场景，以基站应用于功率控制的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第三种应用场景：
由于基站采用了波束赋形技术，在不同波束方向的路损可能不同，因此， 需要从所分配的初始波束中选择出路损最小的初始波束，在选择出的初始波束上进行通信。
可选的，接收机602，用于处理器603根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息之后，接收来源于用户设备的功率余量报告PHR，PHR中包括功率余量PH，PH是对各个初始波束的RSRP进行测量得到路损信息，根据最小的路损信息生成的；
处理器603，用于根据接收机602接收到的PH和与该PH对应的初始波束为用户设备分配上行资源；通过与PH对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与用户设备进行通信。
其中，基站所发送的波束索引信息可以对应于位于RRM测量报告对应的波束范围外的波束，也可以对应于位于RRM测量报告对应的波束范围内的初始波束，还可以是自适应确定的波束，本实施例不作限定。
基站在接收到PHR后，根据PHR中波束索引信息和PH为用户设备分配上行资源，使得用户设备在相应的初始波束上使用适宜且不超过用户设备最大允许发射功率的功率发送上行信息。
若基站希望在更细的波束范围内对用户设备进行上行调度以获取更好的方向增益和更精确的功率控制，则可以动态通过MAC CE指示初始波束索引信息，使得用户设备报告其中路损最小的波束的PH。
可选的，发射机601，还用于接收机602接收来源于用户设备的功率余量报告PHR之前，向用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示，第一指示用于指示用户设备对第一波束的RSRP进行测量。
需要补充说明的是，当基站未限制用户设备的上行发射功率时，用户设备可以在上行支持多波束发送以提高空口效率。若用户设备同时支持多波束且一定程度功率受限时，还需要对至少一个波束的发射功率进行下调，具体下调方法详见图3所示的实施例中第三种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
通过接收来源于用户设备的PHR，PHR中包括PH，PH是对各个初始波束的RSRP进行测量得到路损信息，根据最小的路损信息生成的；根据PH和与该PH对应的初始波束为用户设备分配上行资源；通过与该PH对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与用户设备进行通信，可以选择在路损最小的初始波束对应的上行资源上与用户设备通信，节省了发射功率。
第四种应用场景，以基站应用于CSI测量的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第四种应用场景：
本实施例中，用户设备还需要对初始波束进行CSI测量，得到CSI信息，以根据CSI信息确定初始波束的质量。其中，用户设备测量的波束可以是RRM测量报告范围内的波束，则用户设备首先需要获取RRM测量报告所对应的初始波束，具体获取方法详见图3所示的实施例中第四种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
可选的，接收机602，用于处理器603根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息之后，接收来源于用户设备的信道状态指示CSI测量报告，CSI测量报告中包括CSI信息，CSI信息是对各个初始波束进行CSI测量得到信道质量指示CQI，根据最高的CQI生成的；
处理器603，用于根据接收机602接收到的CSI信息和与该CSI信息对应的初始波束与用户设备进行通信。
若基站希望在更细的波束范围内对用户设备进行上行调度以获取更好的方向增益，则可以动态通过MAC CE指示波束索引信息，使得用户设备报告其中CQI最高的CSI信息。具体地，发射机601，还用于接收机602接收来源于用户设备的信道状态指示CSI测量报告之前，向用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示，第二指示用于指示用户设备对第二波束进行CSI测量。
通过接收来源于用户设备的CSI测量报告，CSI测量报告中包括CSI信息，CSI信息是对各个初始波束进行CSI测量得到CQI，根据最高的CQI生成的；根据CSI信息和与该CSI信息对应的初始波束与用户设备进行通信，可以选择CQI最高的初始波束与用户设备通信，提高通信效率。
第五种应用场景，以基站应用于调整小区带宽的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第五种应用场景：
本实施例中，当小区所接入的各个用户设备的业务量产生变化，导致小区的负荷产生变化时，基站需要对小区的小区带宽进行调整，具体调整方法详见图3所示的实施例中第五种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
可选的，处理器603，还用于根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通 信的初始波束索引信息之后，根据至少一个用户设备的业务量调整小区带宽，小区带宽与业务量呈正相关关系；
发射机601，还用于将处理器603调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息广播给各个用户设备，或，通过RRC信令将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息发送给各个用户设备，中心频点是调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或频率范围内的指定频率。
调整后的小区可以使用多信道，使得多信道共用同一个HARQ实体。此时，整个小区可以由多个相同带宽的信道组成，基站可以在位于中心频点的信道上发送公共信息，或，基站可以在每个信道的中心频率上均发送上述公共信息。即，若调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成，则发射机601，还用于在位于中心频点的信道上向各个用户设备发送公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上向各个用户设备发送公共信息。
通过根据至少一个用户设备的业务量调整小区带宽，小区带宽与业务量呈正相关关系；将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息广播给各个用户设备，或，通过RRC信令将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息发送给各个用户设备，可以仅调整小区带宽，而不需要配置其它无线资源配置参数，节省了配置小区带宽过程中的通信开销。
第六种应用场景，以基站应用于调整用户带宽的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第六种应用场景：
有时候，小区的整体负荷情况变化不大但某些用户设备的业务量变化很大，导致这些用户设备对小区带宽的需求发生变化，此时仅需要调整这些用户设备所需要的小区带宽。从用户设备的角度看，其用户带宽可以自适应缩减或增加；但从基站的角度看，基站仍然以原来使用的小区带宽发送信息，但不同用户设备所使用的频率范围可以不同。
可选的，处理器603，还用于根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息之后，根据用户设备的业务量调整用户设备的用户带宽，用户带宽与业务量呈正相关关系；
发射机601，还用于通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种将处理器603调整后的用户带宽的信息发送给用户设备。
由于用户带宽是由信道组成的，因此，基站在调整用户带宽时，可以根据 业务量通过调整分配给用户设备的信道来调整用户带宽。具体地，处理器603，具体用于根据用户设备的业务量调整为用户设备分配的至少一个信道，得到用户带宽。
具体地，详见图3所示的实施例中第六种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
通过根据用户设备的业务量调整用户设备的用户带宽，用户带宽与业务量呈正相关关系；通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种将调整后的用户带宽的信息发送给用户设备，可以根据用户设备的业务量实时调整用户带宽，保证了用户设备的正常工作。
第七种应用场景，以基站应用于SPS的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第七种应用场景：
发射机601，用于向用户设备发送SPS资源信息，该SPS资源信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的资源信息和波束索引信息；
当SPS资源信息包括波束索引信息时，用户设备可以根据波束索引信息确定波束；当SPS资源信息不包括波束索引信息时，用户设备可以根据RRM测量报告所携带的波束索引信息确定波束，该波束可以是发送波束，也可以是接收波束。其中，基站可以在通过RRC信令配置用户设备或在使用控制信道激活SPS资源时指示波束索引信息。
处理器603，用于根据与SPS信息所指示的波束索引信息对应的波束与用户设备通信。
当SPS资源信息指示了至少两个波束索引信息时，基站可以与用户设备约定根据测量结果使用质量较好的波束或使用预设的波束。此时，用户设备可以在质量较好的波束上发送/接收信息，对应的，基站在该波束上接收/发送信息。或，用户设备在预设的至少一个波束上同时发送/接收信息，对应的，基站在该至少一个波束上同时接收/发送信息。
用户设备以SPS方式发送/接收信息时选择信号条件较好的波束进行，或者在一个或多个预先确定的波束上同时进行发送和/或接收。相应的，基站可以在一个或多个预先确定的波束上以SPS方式接收/发送信息。基站和用户设备可以根据测量结果在多个预先确定的波束范围内优先选择信号条件好的一个或多个波束。
需要补充说明的是，当基站根据测量结果或用户设备的建议的波束索引信 息重新指示波束索引信息时，仅需要修改SPS资源信息中的波束索引信息，而不需要修改资源信息。此时，基站可以通过RRC信令或MAC CE或控制信道向用户设备重新指示波束索引信息
通过向用户设备发送SPS资源信息，该SPS资源信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的资源信息和波束索引信息；根据与SPS信息所指示的波束索引信息对应的波束与用户设备通信，可以通过发送SPS资源信息的方式为用户设备配置资源和波束，可以解决动态为用户设备配置资源和波束造成的浪费通信开销的问题，达到了节省通信开销的效果。
第八种应用场景，以基站应用于D2D的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第八种应用场景：
为了避免D2D通信相互干扰或D2D通信干扰小区内其它用户设备的正常通信，基站为用户设备分配D2D通信的波束的初始波束索引信息。
发射机601，用于向用户设备发送D2D通信时使用的资源指示信息，该资源指示信息包括D2D资源信息和初始波束索引信息，用于指示用户设备与其它用户设备之间采用D2D通信时使用的资源和初始波束。
其中，基站分配的初始波束索引信息可以是基站设置的，也可以是用户设备根据测量结果确定出质量较好的波束的波束索引信息后，向基站请求分配的初始波束索引信息，用于用户设备与其它用户设备之间进行D2D通信。D2D资源信息包括时域资源信息和频域资源信息。
需要补充说明的是，基站与用户设备之间采用的蜂窝通信和用户设备与其它用户设备之间采用的D2D通信在不同的初始波束上可以重用时域资源和频域资源。
通过接收基站发送的资源指示信息，该资源指示信息包括D2D资源信息和波束索引信息；根据资源指示信息确定与其它用户设备之间采用D2D通信时使用的资源和波束，可以根据基站分配的初始波束与其它用户设备通信，解决D2D通信之间相互干扰的问题，得到了提高通信质量的效果。
综上所述，本发明实施例提供的基站，通过将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给UE；接收来源于用户设备的RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的；根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的 初始波束索引信息，可以根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与用户设备通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了现有的毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，达到了延长毫米波频段的传输距离的效果。
请参考图7，其示出了本发明一个实施例提供的用户设备的结构框架图。该用户设备可以为图1所示的UE，UE可以包括：接收机701和发射机702。
接收机701，用于接收基站发送的初始波束索引信息，该初始波束索引信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束。
其中，初始波束索引信息详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
发射机702，用于发送RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的，该RRM测量报告用于指示基站确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息。
为了能够从基站分配的初始波束中选择信号质量较好的初始波束进行通信，以提高通信质量，用户设备还可以对确定出的基站分配的初始波束进行RRM测量，根据测量结果生成RRM测量报告。
其中，用户设备可以将RRM测量报告发送给LTE eNB，由LTE eNB将RRM测量报告转发给millimeter wave eNB；也可以将RRM测量报告发送给millimeter wave eNB本实施例不限定用户设备对RRM测量报告的发送方式。本发明下文各实施例中用户设备发送RRM测量报告的方法同本实施例的说明，下文不再赘述。
这里RRM测量可以指通常意义下的用于移动性管理的测量，是经过RRC层过滤的测量方法，也可以是指通过波束训练的方式进行的测量，具体详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
基站根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与UE通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，能够延长毫米波频段的传输距离。
综上所述，本发明实施例提供的用户设备，通过接收基站送的初始波束索引信息，该初始波束索引信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束；发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对 初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的，该RRM测量报告用于指示基站确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息，可以通过RRM测量报告向基站报告初始波束的信号质量，使基站选择信号质量较好的波束与用户设备通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了现有的毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，达到了延长毫米波频段的传输距离的效果。
请参考图8，其示出了本发明一个实施例提供的用户设备的结构框架图。该用户设备可以为图1所示的UE，UE可以包括：接收机801和发射机802。
接收机801，用于接收基站发送的初始波束索引信息，该初始波束索引信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束。
其中，初始波束索引信息详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
发射机802，用于发送RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的，该RRM测量报告用于指示基站确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息。
为了能够从基站分配的初始波束中选择信号质量较好的初始波束进行通信，以提高通信质量，用户设备还可以对确定出的基站分配的初始波束进行RRM测量，根据测量结果生成RRM测量报告。这里RRM测量可以指通常意义下的用于移动性管理的测量，是经过RRC层过滤的测量方法，也可以是指通过波束训练的方式进行的测量，具体详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
其中，用户设备发送RRM测量报告的方法详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，下文不再赘述。
基站根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与UE通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，能够延长毫米波频段的传输距离。
下面分别以不同的应用场景为例对波束配置方法进行详细说明，具体如下：
第一种应用场景，以用户设备应用于不连续接收的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图5所示的实施例中的第一种应用场景：
用户设备存在休眠状态和激活状态，且处于激活状态的用户设备需要通过基站分配的波束监听控制信道，从而在控制信道上接收基站通过波束赋形技术发送的控制信息，该控制信息包括资源分配控制指令，该资源分配控制指令用于指示基站为用户设备分配的上行/下行资源。当用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态时，可能用户设备上一次处于激活状态时接收资源分配控制信令的波束已经不再适用，因此，用户设备还需要确定本次所需要监听的控制信道的波束。本实施例提供了两种确定需要监听的控制信道的波束的方法，下面分别对这两种方法进行具体描述：
第一种方法，若RRM测量报告包括每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息，参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种，则用户设备还包括处理器803，还用于发射机802发送RRM测量报告之后，在用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，确定参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息；
接收机801，还用于通过处理器803确定的第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
在第一种确定波束的方法中，基站可以和用户设备约定使用RRM测量报告中信号质量较好的初始波束，具体流程详见图3所示的实施例中第一种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
若用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态，则可以根据上述方法从RRM测量报告中确定至少一个初始波束，并通过确定的该至少一个初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
第二种方法，接收机801，还用于接收基站通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体接入控制层控制元MAC CE中的至少一种从RRM测量报告中的各个初始波束索引信息中指定的第二初始波束索引信息；通过第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
在第二种确定波束的方法中，基站可以从分配的初始波束中指定用于在控制信道上发送资源分配控制信令的初始波束，再将指定的初始波束的第二初始波束索引信息通过RRC信令或MAC CE发送给用户设备。
需要补充说明的是，还可以通过上述第一种方法和第二种方法共同确定波束索引信息，详见图3所示的实施例中第一种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
在确定控制信道的波束后，用户设备还可以通过以下至少一种方式对控制 信道进行监听。其中，接收机801，具体用于以全向方式接收控制信息，或，以大于等于第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收控制信息，或，以小于第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收控制信息；或，接收机801，具体用于以全向方式接收控制信息，或，以大于等于第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收控制信息，或，以小于第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收控制信息。
本实施例中，用户设备监听控制信息的流程详见图3所示的实施例中第一种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
通过若RRM测量报告包括每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息，参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率RSRP和参考信号接收质量RSRQ中的至少一种，则在用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，用户设备确定参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息；通过第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息，可以使用RRM测量报告中信号质量较好的初始波束来接收控制信息，提高通信效率。
第二种应用场景，以用户设备应用于TA的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图5所示的实施例中的第二种应用场景：
由于用户设备与基站之间存在的障碍物会降低波束的通信质量，因此，基站可以预先为用户设备配置备选波束，以通过避开障碍物来提高通信质量，因此，可选的，接收机801，还用于接收基站发送的备选波束索引信息，备选波束索引信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束；
用户设备还包括处理器803，还用于在初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值时，对接收机801接收到的各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量，参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；根据RRM测量确定出参考信号信息大于第三阈值的第一备选波束索引信息；
发射机802，还用于将处理器803确定出的第一备选波束索引信息发送给基站，基站用于根据第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与用户设备进行通信。
基站为用户设备配置备选波束的流程详见图3所示的实施例中第二种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
本实施例中，由于不同的用户设备与基站之间的距离不同，因此，不同用 户设备的信号传输时延不同。若需要使得不同用户设备发送的上行信息同时达到基站，则基站需要根据用户设备与基站之间的距离为不同的用户设备配置不同的TA。通常，备选波束与基站分配的初始波束相比，其传播路径较长，导致传播时延较大，此时，会导致上行TA发生突变，因此，用户设备需要重新确定上行TA。其中，上行TA的确定需要通过随机接入过程实现。
本实施例中，发射机802，还用于自动向基站发送第一随机接入请求，第一随机接入请求用于指示基站生成上行TA，并根据分配的第二备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及上行TA与用户设备进行通信，或，在控制信道上接收基站发送的随机接入指令，随机接入指令是基站利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为用户设备分配的备选波束与用户设备进行通信后发送的，根据随机接入指令向基站发送第二随机接入请求，第二随机接入请求用于指示基站生成上行TA，并根据接收到的第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及上行TA与用户设备进行通信。
当用户设备主动触发随机接入过程时，用户设备主动向基站发送第一随机接入请求，当用户设备在随机接入指令的指示下触发随机接入过程时，用户设备向基站发送第二随机接入请求，具体流程详见图3所示的实施例中第二种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
对应的，当用户设备检测出每个备选波束的参考信号信息均小于第三阈值且检测出至少一个初始波束的参考信号信息大于第二阈值时，确定初始波束的质量较好，将至少一个初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给基站，基站使用至少一个初始波束与基站通信。或，基站利用波束波形技术确定出用户设备即将离开障碍物区域且检测出至少一个初始波束的参考信号信息大于第二阈值时，确定使用至少一个初始波束与基站通信。此时，用户设备可以重新确定上行TA，也可以不确定上行TA。
本实施例中，用户设备所使用的波束可能存在不同的TA，这些TA可能针对同一毫米波基站，也可能针对不同毫米波基站。因此，基站还可以为每个用户设备设置至少一个TA组，每个TA组包括至少一个波束索引信息，且每个波束索引信息所对应的上行TA相同。波束索引信息可以是初始波束的初始波束索引信息，也可以是备选波束的备选波束索引信息。其中，一个TA组中的波束索引信息所指示的波束可以属于同一个小区，也可以属于不同的小区，因此，还可以在TA组中标识每个波束所关联的小区的小区标识。
接收机801，还用于接收基站发送的TA组，TA组是基站在与用户设备进行通信的波束中，将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，根据每个分组生成的，TA组包括TA组标识、分组中各个波束的波束索引信息、分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT，所述波束包括所述初始波束和所述备选波束中的至少一种；
用户设备还包括处理器803，还用于在接收机801接收到的TA组中的TAT超时，则检测TA组中的小区标识是否对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且其它TA组的TAT未超时；在检测出TA组中的小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且其它TA组的TAT未超时时，确定波束索引信息所对应的小区，维护小区所对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ缓冲区和探测参考信号SRS资源；在检测出TA组中的小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且其它TA组的TAT超时时，确定波束索引信息所对应的小区，释放小区所对应的HARQ缓冲区和SRS资源。
通过接收基站发送的备选波束索引信息，备选波束索引信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束；若初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值，则对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量；根据RRM测量确定出参考信号信息大于第三阈值的第一备选波束索引信息；将确定出的第一备选波束索引信息发送给基站，可以在分配的初始波束的质量较差时，使用质量较好的备选波束与基站通信，达到了提高通信效率的效果。
第三种应用场景，以用户设备应用于功率控制的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图5所示的实施例中的第三种应用场景：
由于基站采用了波束赋形技术，在不同波束方向的路损可能不同，因此，需要从所分配的初始波束中选择出路损最小的初始波束，在选择出的初始波束上进行通信。
可选的，用户设备还包括处理器803，用于发射机802发送RRM测量报告之后，对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个初始波束的路损信息；根据最小的路损信息生成至少一个功率余量PH，得到功率余量报告PHR；
发射机802，还用于发送处理器803生成的PHR，该PHR用于指示基站用于根据PH和与该PH对应的初始波束为用户设备分配上行资源，通过与PH 对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与用户设备进行通信。
其中，基站所发送的波束索引信息可以对应于位于RRM测量报告对应的波束范围外的波束，也可以对应于位于RRM测量报告对应的波束范围内的初始波束，还可以是自适应确定的波束，本实施例不作限定。
若基站希望在更细的波束范围内对用户设备进行上行调度以获取更好的方向增益和更精确的功率控制，则可以动态通过MAC CE指示初始波束索引信息，使得用户设备报告其中路损最小的波束的PH。
可选的，接收机801，还用于接收基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示；
处理器803，还用于对接收机801接收到的第一指示所指示的各个第一波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个第一波束的路损信息。
需要补充说明的是，当基站未限制用户设备的上行发射功率时，用户设备可以在上行支持多波束发送以提高空口效率。若用户设备同时支持多波束且一定程度功率受限时，还需要对至少一个波束的发射功率进行下调，具体下调方法详见图3所示的实施例中第三种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
通过对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个初始波束的路损信息；根据最小的路损信息生成PH，得到PHR；发送PHR，PHR用于指示基站根据PH和与PH对应的初始波束为用户设备分配上行资源，通过与PH对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与用户设备进行通信，可以选择在路损最小的初始波束对应的上行资源上与基站通信，节省了发射功率。
第四种应用场景，以用户设备应用于CSI测量的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图5所示的实施例中的第四种应用场景：
本实施例中，用户设备还需要对初始波束进行CSI测量，得到CSI信息，以根据CSI信息确定初始波束的质量。
可选的，用户设备还包括处理器803，用于发射机802发送RRM测量报告之后，对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束进行信道状态指示CSI测量，得到各个初始波束的信道质量指示CQI；根据最高的CQI生成至少一个信道状态指示CSI信息，得到CSI测量报告；
发射机802，还用于发送处理器803生成的CSI测量报告，该CSI测量报告用于指示基站根据CSI信息和与CSI信息对应的初始波束与用户设备进行通 信。
其中，用户设备测量的波束可以是RRM测量报告范围内的波束，则用户设备首先需要获取RRM测量报告所对应的初始波束，具体获取方法详见图3所示的实施例中第四种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
用户设备在测量出各个初始波束的CSI信息后，可以从各个CSI信息中筛选出包括最高CQI的CSI信息，并根据筛选出的至少一个CSI信息生成CSI测量报告。其中，CSI信息包括CQI、PMI和RI中的至少一种，用户设备可以同时或在不同的时刻将CQI、PMI和RI中的至少一种发送给基站。
若基站希望在更细的波束范围内对用户设备进行上行调度以获取更好的方向增益，则可以动态通过MAC CE指示波束索引信息，使得用户设备报告其中CQI最高的CSI信息。
可选的，接收机801，还用于接收基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示；
处理器803，还用于对接收机801接收到的第二指示所指示的各个第二波束进行CSI测量，得到各个第二波束的CQI。
通过对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束进行信道状态指示CSI测量，得到各个初始波束的CQI；根据最高的CQI生成CSI信息，得到CSI测量报告；发送CSI测量报告，CSI测量报告用于指示基站根据CSI信息和与CSI信息对应的初始波束与用户设备进行通信，可以选择CQI最高的初始波束与基站通信，提高通信效率。
第五种应用场景，以用户设备应用于调整小区带宽的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图5所示的实施例中的第五种应用场景：
本实施例中，当小区所接入的各个用户设备的业务量产生变化，导致小区的负荷产生变化时，基站需要对小区的小区带宽进行调整，具体调整方法详见图3所示的实施例中第五种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
调整后的小区可以使用多信道，使得多信道共用同一个HARQ实体。此时，整个小区可以由多个相同带宽的信道组成，基站可以在位于中心频点的信道上发送公共信息，或，基站可以在每个信道的中心频率上均发送上述公共信息。
对应的，接收机801，还用于通过广播接收基站发送的调整后的小区带宽 的信息和中心频点的信息，或，接收基站发送的RRC信令，RRC信令中携带有调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息；调整后的小区带宽是基站根据至少一个用户设备的业务量调整的，且小区带宽与业务量呈正相关关系，中心频点是调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或频率范围内的指定频率；若调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成，则在位于中心频点的信道上接收基站发送的公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上接收基站发送的发送公共信息。
用户设备可以以与基站发送调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息的方式对应的方式接收调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息，根据中心频点的信息在位于中心频点的信道上接收公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上接收公共信息。
通过广播接收基站发送的调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息，或，接收基站发送的RRC信令，RRC信令中携带有调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息；调整后的小区带宽是基站根据用户设备的业务量调整的，且小区带宽与业务量呈正相关关系，中心频点是调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或频率范围内的指定频率，可以仅调整小区带宽，而不需要配置其它无线资源配置参数，节省了配置小区带宽过程中的通信开销。
第六种应用场景，以用户设备应用于调整用户带宽的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图5所示的实施例中的第六种应用场景：
有时候，小区的整体负荷情况变化不大但某些用户设备的业务量变化很大，导致这些用户设备对小区带宽的需求发生变化，此时仅需要调整这些用户设备所需要的小区带宽。从用户设备的角度看，其用户带宽可以自适应缩减或增加；但从基站的角度看，基站仍然以原来使用的小区带宽发送信息，但不同用户设备所使用的频率范围可以不同。
由于用户带宽是由信道组成的，因此，基站在调整用户带宽时，可以根据业务量通过调整分配给用户设备的信道来调整用户带宽。
对应的，接收机801，还用于通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种接收基站发送的调整后的用户带宽的信息，调整后的用户带宽是基站根据用户设备的业务量调整的，且用户带宽与业务量呈正相关关系；对组成用户带宽的信道的控制信道进行监听。
用户设备可以以与基站发送调整后的用户带宽的信息的方式对应的方式接收调整后的用户带宽的信息，对组成用户带宽的信道进行监听。其中，调整用户带宽调整后所剩余的带宽在频域上可以是连续的或非连续的。
具体地，详见图3所示的实施例中第六种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种接收基站发送的调整后的用户带宽的信息，调整后的用户带宽是基站根据用户设备的业务量调整的，且用户带宽与业务量呈正相关关系，可以根据用户设备的业务量实时调整用户带宽，保证了用户设备的正常工作。
第七种应用场景，以用户设备应用于SPS的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图5所示的实施例中的第七种应用场景：
接收机801，用于接收基站发送的SPS资源信息；
当SPS资源信息包括波束索引信息时，用户设备可以根据波束索引信息确定波束；当SPS资源信息不包括波束索引信息时，用户设备可以根据RRM测量报告所携带的波束索引信息确定波束，该波束可以是发送波束，也可以是接收波束。其中，基站可以在通过RRC信令配置用户设备或在使用控制信道激活SPS资源时指示波束索引信息。
用户设备还包括处理器803，用于根据SPS资源信息确定基站为用户设备分配的资源信息和波束索引信息。
当SPS资源信息指示了至少两个波束索引信息时，基站可以与用户设备约定根据测量结果使用质量较好的波束或使用预设的波束。此时，用户设备可以在质量较好的波束上发送/接收信息，对应的，基站在该波束上接收/发送信息。或，用户设备在预设的至少一个波束上同时发送/接收信息，对应的，基站在该至少一个波束上同时接收/发送信息。
用户设备以SPS方式发送/接收信息时选择信号条件较好的波束进行，或者在一个或多个预先确定的波束上同时进行发送和/或接收。相应的，基站可以在一个或多个预先确定的波束上以SPS方式接收/发送信息。基站和用户设备可以根据测量结果在多个预先确定的波束范围内优先选择信号条件好的一个或多个波束。
需要补充说明的是，当基站根据测量结果或用户设备的建议的波束索引信息重新指示波束索引信息时，仅需要修改SPS资源信息中的波束索引信息，而 不需要修改资源信息。此时，基站可以通过RRC信令或MAC CE或控制信道向用户设备重新指示波束索引信息
通过接收基站发送的SPS资源信息，根据SPS资源信息确定基站为用户设备分配的资源信息和波束索引信息，可以通过接收SPS资源信息的方式配置资源和波束，可以解决动态为用户设备配置资源和波束造成的浪费通信开销的问题，达到了节省通信开销的效果。
第八种应用场景，以用户设备应用于D2D的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图5所示的实施例中的第八种应用场景：
为了避免D2D通信相互干扰或D2D通信干扰小区内其它用户设备的正常通信，基站为用户设备分配D2D通信的波束的初始波束索引信息。
接收机801，接收基站发送的资源指示信息，该资源指示信息包括D2D资源信息和初始波束索引信息；
用户设备还包括处理器803，用于根据接收机801接收到的资源指示信息确定与其它用户设备之间采用D2D通信时使用的资源和初始波束。
其中，基站分配的波束索引信息可以是基站设置的，也可以是用户设备根据测量结果确定出质量较好的波束的波束索引信息后，向基站请求分配的初始波束索引信息，用于用户设备与其它用户设备之间进行D2D通信。D2D资源信息包括时域资源信息和频域资源信息。
需要补充说明的是，基站与用户设备之间采用的蜂窝通信和用户设备与其它用户设备之间采用的D2D通信在不同的初始波束上可以重用时域资源和频域资源。
通过接收基站发送的资源指示信息，该资源指示信息包括D2D资源信息和波束索引信息；根据资源指示信息确定与其它用户设备之间采用D2D通信时使用的资源和波束，可以根据基站分配的初始波束与其它用户设备通信，解决D2D通信之间相互干扰的问题，达到了提高通信质量的效果。
综上所述，本发明实施例提供的用户设备，通过接收基站送的初始波束索引信息，该初始波束索引信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束；发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的，该RRM测量报告用于指示基站确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息，可以通过 RRM测量报告向基站报告初始波束的信号质量，使基站选择信号质量较好的波束与用户设备通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了现有的毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，达到了延长毫米波频段的传输距离的效果。
请参见图9，其示出了本发明一个实施例提供的波束配置方法的方法流程图。该波束配置方法，可以包括：
步骤901，基站将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给用户设备。
其中，初始波束索引信息用于指示基站向用户设备发送下行信息时所使用的初始波束，由基站预先配置给用户设备。该初始波束索引信息关联基站发送下行信息时所使用的天线权值或码本信息，以确定初始波束的方向和宽度等信息。其中，初始波束的方向是指初始波束相对于水平方向和/或垂直方向的角度信息。该初始波束索引信息还关联初始波束的特征信息，基站在不同的初始波束上发送该初始波束特定的特征信息，以便用户设备根据不同的特征信息识别不同的初始波束，具体详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
步骤902，基站接收来源于用户设备的RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的。
步骤903，基站根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息。
基站根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与UE通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，能够延长毫米波频段的传输距离。
综上所述，本发明实施例提供的波束配置方法，通过将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给UE；接收来源于用户设备的RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的；根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息，可以根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与用户设备通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了现有的毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数 据通信需求的问题，达到了延长毫米波频段的传输距离的效果。
本发明另一实施例提供了一种波束配置方法，该波束配置方法，可以包括：
步骤901，基站将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给用户设备。
其中，初始波束索引信息用于指示基站向用户设备发送下行信息时所使用的波束，由基站预先配置给用户设备。该初始波束索引信息关联基站发送下行信息时所使用的天线权值或码本信息，以确定初始波束的方向和宽度等信息。其中，初始波束的方向是指初始波束相对于水平方向和/或垂直方向的角度信息，比如，一个初始波束的波束方向为相对于水平方向的30°-60°方向，或，相对于垂直方向的20°-40°方向等。该初始波束索引信息还关联初始波束的特征信息，基站在不同的初始波束上发送该初始波束特定的特征信息，以便用户设备根据不同的特征信息识别不同的初始波束，具体详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
本实施例中，基站可以为用户设备配置至少一个初始波束，并将该至少一个初始波束中每个初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给用户设备，以便用户设备明确在哪个初始波束上接收基站发送的下行信息。
步骤902，基站接收来源于用户设备的RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的。
步骤903，基站根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息。
基站根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与UE通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，能够延长毫米波频段的传输距离。
下面分别以不同的应用场景为例对波束配置方法进行详细说明，具体如下：
第一种应用场景，以基站应用于不连续接收的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第一种应用场景：
用户设备存在休眠状态和激活状态，且处于激活状态的用户设备需要通过基站分配的波束监听控制信道，从而在控制信道上接收基站通过波束赋形技术 发送的控制信息，该控制信息包括资源分配控制指令，该资源分配控制指令用于指示基站为用户设备分配的上行/下行资源。当用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态时，可能用户设备上一次处于激活状态时接收资源分配控制信令的波束已经不再适用，因此，用户设备还需要确定本次所需要监听的控制信道的波束。本实施例提供了两种确定需要监听的控制信道的波束的方法，下面分别对这两种方法进行具体描述：
第一种方法，基站根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息，包括：
基站从RRM测量报告中每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息中，确定参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息，参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；
基站通过确定的第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上向用户设备发送控制信息，用户设备用于从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，通过确定的第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束监听控制信息。
在第一种确定波束的方法中，基站可以和用户设备约定使用RRM测量报告中信号质量较好的初始波束，具体流程详见图3所示的实施例中第一种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
第二种方法，基站通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体接入控制层控制元MAC CE中的至少一种，从RRM测量报告中的各个初始波束索引信息中指定第二初始波束索引信息，指定的第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束用于在控制信道上向用户设备发送控制信息。
在第二种确定波束的方法中，基站可以从分配的初始波束中指定用于在控制信道上发送资源分配控制信令的初始波束，再将指定的初始波束的第二初始波束索引信息通过RRC信令或MAC CE发送给用户设备。
需要补充说明的是，还可以通过上述第一种方法和第二种方法共同确定波束索引信息，详见图3所示的实施例中第一种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
通过从RRM测量报告中每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息中，确定参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息，通过第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上向用户设备发送控制信息，可以使用RRM测量报告中信号质量较好的初始波束来传输控制信息，提高通信效率。
第二种应用场景，以基站应用于TA的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第二种应用场景：
由于用户设备与基站之间存在的障碍物会降低波束的通信质量，因此，基站可以预先为用户设备配置备选波束，以通过避开障碍物来提高通信质量，因此，具体地，本实施例提供的波束配置方法，还包括：
基站将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束的备选波束索引信息发送给用户设备；
基站接收用户设备从各个备选波束索引信息中选择并发送的第一备选波束索引信息，第一备选波束索引信息是初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值，且对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量后，确定出的参考信号信息大于第三阈值的备选波束索引信息，参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；
基站根据接收到的第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与用户设备进行通信。
基站为用户设备配置备选波束的流程详见图3所示的实施例中第二种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。基站根据接收到的至少一个备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与用户设备通信。
进一步地，除了用户设备主动对初始波束进行RRM测量，通过参考信号信息确定是否使用备选波束进行通信之外，基站还可以利用波束跟踪技术检测用户设备是否即将进入障碍物区域，当基站检测出用户设备即将进入障碍区区域，则触发用户设备对备选波束进行RRM测量。
本实施例中，由于不同的用户设备与基站之间的距离不同，因此，不同用户设备的信号传输时延不同。若需要使得不同用户设备发送的上行信息同时达到基站，则基站需要根据用户设备与基站之间的距离为不同的用户设备配置不同的TA。通常，备选波束与基站分配的初始波束相比，其传播路径较长，导致传播时延较大，此时，会导致上行TA发生突变，因此，用户设备需要重新确定上行TA。其中，上行TA的确定需要通过随机接入过程实现。
当用户设备主动触发随机接入过程时，用户设备主动向基站发送第一随机接入请求，此时，基站根据接收到的第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与用户设备进行通信，包括：
基站接收用户设备发送的第一随机接入请求，根据第一随机接入请求生成上行时间提前TA；
基站根据接收到的第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及上行TA与用户设备进行通信。
当用户设备在随机接入指令的指示下触发随机接入过程时，用户设备向基站发送第二随机接入请求，此时，方法，还包括：
基站利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为用户设备分配的备选波束与用户设备进行通信；
基站在控制信道上向用户设备发送随机接入指令；
基站接收用户设备根据随机接入指令发送的第二随机接入请求，根据第二随机接入请求生成上行TA；
基站根据分配的第二备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及上行TA与用户设备进行通信。
本实施例中，用户设备所使用的波束可能存在不同的TA，这些TA可能针对同一毫米波基站，也可能针对不同毫米波基站。因此，基站还可以为每个用户设备设置至少一个TA组，每个TA组包括至少一个波束索引信息，且每个波束索引信息所对应的上行TA相同。波束索引信息可以是初始波束的初始波束索引信息，也可以是备选波束的备选波束索引信息。其中，一个TA组中的波束索引信息所指示的波束可以属于同一个小区，也可以属于不同的小区，因此，还可以在TA组中标识每个波束所关联的小区的小区标识。
可选的，方法，还包括：
在与用户设备进行通信的波束中，基站将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，波束包括初始波束和备选波束中的至少一种；
基站根据每个分组生成一个TA组，TA组包括TA组标识、分组中各个波束的波束索引信息、分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT；
基站将生成的TA组发送给用户设备。
需要补充说明的是，当用户设备移动导致上行TA变化时，基站可以根据新的上行TA重新为用户设备配置TA组以及分配在该TA组的波束索引信息和波束索引信息所关联的小区。其中，基站可以通过TA cmd调整上行TA以及TA组。
第三种应用场景，以基站应用于功率控制的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第三种应用场景：
由于基站采用了波束赋形技术，在不同波束方向的路损可能不同，因此，需要从所分配的初始波束中选择出路损最小的初始波束，在选择出的初始波束上进行通信。
可选的，基站根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息之后，还包括：
基站接收来源于用户设备的功率余量报告PHR，PHR中包括功率余量PH，PH是对各个初始波束的RSRP进行测量得到路损信息，根据最小的路损信息生成的；
基站根据PH和与PH对应的初始波束为用户设备分配上行资源；
基站通过与PH对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与用户设备进行通信。
其中，基站所发送的波束索引信息可以对应于位于RRM测量报告对应的波束范围外的波束，也可以对应于位于RRM测量报告对应的波束范围内的初始波束，还可以是自适应确定的波束，本实施例不作限定。
基站在接收到PHR后，根据PHR中波束索引信息和PH为用户设备分配上行资源，使得用户设备在相应的初始波束上使用适宜且不超过用户设备最大允许发射功率的功率发送上行信息。
若基站希望在更细的波束范围内对用户设备进行上行调度以获取更好的方向增益和更精确的功率控制，则可以动态通过MAC CE指示初始波束索引信息，使得用户设备报告其中路损最小的波束的PH。
可选的，基站接收来源于用户设备的功率余量报告PHR之前，还包括：
基站向用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示，第一指示用于指示用户设备对第一波束的RSRP进行测量。
需要补充说明的是，当基站未限制用户设备的上行发射功率时，用户设备可以在上行支持多波束发送以提高空口效率。若用户设备同时支持多波束且一定程度功率受限时，还需要对至少一个波束的发射功率进行下调，具体下调方法详见图3所示的实施例中第三种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
通过接收来源于用户设备的PHR，PHR中包括PH，PH是对各个初始波束的RSRP进行测量得到路损信息，根据最小的路损信息生成的；根据PH和与该PH对应的初始波束为用户设备分配上行资源；通过与该PH对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与用户设备进行通信，可以选择在路损最小的初始波束对应的上行资源上与用户设备通信，节省了发射功率。
第四种应用场景，以基站应用于CSI测量的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第四种应用场景：
本实施例中，用户设备还需要对初始波束进行CSI测量，得到CSI信息，以根据CSI信息确定初始波束的质量。其中，用户设备测量的波束可以是RRM测量报告范围内的波束，则用户设备首先需要获取RRM测量报告所对应的初始波束，具体获取方法详见图3所示的实施例中第四种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
可选的，基站根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息之后，还包括：
基站接收来源于用户设备的信道状态指示CSI测量报告，CSI测量报告中包括CSI信息，CSI信息是对各个初始波束进行CSI测量得到信道质量指示CQI，根据最高的CQI生成的；
基站根据CSI信息和与CSI信息对应的初始波束与用户设备进行通信。
若基站希望在更细的波束范围内对用户设备进行上行调度以获取更好的方向增益，则可以动态通过MAC CE指示波束索引信息，使得用户设备报告其中CQI最高的CSI信息。具体地，基站接收来源于用户设备的信道状态指示CSI测量报告之前，还包括：
基站向用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示，第二指示用于指示用户设备对第二波束进行CSI测量。
通过接收来源于用户设备的CSI测量报告，CSI测量报告中包括CSI信息，CSI信息是对各个初始波束进行CSI测量得到CQI，根据最高的CQI生成的；根据CSI信息和与该CSI信息对应的初始波束与用户设备进行通信，可以选择CQI最高的初始波束与用户设备通信，提高通信效率。
第五种应用场景，以基站应用于调整小区带宽的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第五种应用场景：
本实施例中，当小区所接入的各个用户设备的业务量产生变化，导致小区的负荷产生变化时，基站需要对小区的小区带宽进行调整，具体调整方法详见图3所示的实施例中第五种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
可选的，基站根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息之后，还包括：
基站根据用户设备的业务量调整小区带宽，小区带宽与业务量呈正相关关系；
基站将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息广播给各个用户设备，或，通过RRC信令将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息发送给各个用户设备，中心频点是调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或频率范围内的指定频率。
调整后的小区可以使用多信道，使得多信道共用同一个HARQ实体。此时，整个小区可以由多个相同带宽的信道组成，基站可以在位于中心频点的信道上发送公共信息，或，基站可以在每个信道的中心频率上均发送上述公共信息。即，若调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成，则方法，还包括：
基站在位于中心频点的信道上向各个用户设备发送公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上向各个用户设备发送公共信息。
通过根据至少一个用户设备的业务量调整小区带宽，小区带宽与业务量呈正相关关系；将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息广播给各个用户设备，或，通过RRC信令将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息发送给各个用户设备，可以仅调整小区带宽，而不需要配置其它无线资源配置参数，节省了配置小区带宽过程中的通信开销。
第六种应用场景，以基站应用于调整用户带宽的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第六种应用场景：
有时候，小区的整体负荷情况变化不大但某些用户设备的业务量变化很大，导致这些用户设备对小区带宽的需求发生变化，此时仅需要调整这些用户设备所需要的小区带宽。从用户设备的角度看，其用户带宽可以自适应缩减或增加；但从基站的角度看，基站仍然以原来使用的小区带宽发送信息，但不同 用户设备所使用的频率范围可以不同。
可选的，基站根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息之后，还包括：
基站根据用户设备的业务量调整用户设备的用户带宽，用户带宽与业务量呈正相关关系；
基站通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种将调整后的用户带宽的信息发送给用户设备。
由于用户带宽是由信道组成的，因此，基站在调整用户带宽时，可以根据业务量通过调整分配给用户设备的信道来调整用户带宽。具体地，基站根据用户设备的业务量调整用户设备的用户带宽，包括：
基站根据用户设备的业务量调整为用户设备分配的信道，得到用户带宽。
具体地，详见图3所示的实施例中第六种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
通过根据用户设备的业务量调整用户设备的用户带宽，用户带宽与业务量呈正相关关系；通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种将调整后的用户带宽的信息发送给用户设备，可以根据用户设备的业务量实时调整用户带宽，保证了用户设备的正常工作。
第七种应用场景，以基站应用于SPS的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第七种应用场景：
发射机601，用于向用户设备发送SPS资源信息，该SPS资源信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的资源信息和波束索引信息；
当SPS资源信息包括波束索引信息时，用户设备可以根据波束索引信息确定波束；当SPS资源信息不包括波束索引信息时，用户设备可以根据RRM测量报告所携带的波束索引信息确定波束，该波束可以是发送波束，也可以是接收波束。其中，基站可以在通过RRC信令配置用户设备或在使用控制信道激活SPS资源时指示波束索引信息。
处理器603，用于根据与SPS信息所指示的波束索引信息对应的波束与用户设备通信。
当SPS资源信息指示了至少两个波束索引信息时，基站可以与用户设备约定根据测量结果使用质量较好的波束或使用预设的波束。此时，用户设备可以在质量较好的波束上发送/接收信息，对应的，基站在该波束上接收/发送信息。 或，用户设备在预设的至少一个波束上同时发送/接收信息，对应的，基站在该至少一个波束上同时接收/发送信息。
用户设备以SPS方式发送/接收信息时选择信号条件较好的波束进行，或者在一个或多个预先确定的波束上同时进行发送和/或接收。相应的，基站可以在一个或多个预先确定的波束上以SPS方式接收/发送信息。基站和用户设备可以根据测量结果在多个预先确定的波束范围内优先选择信号条件好的一个或多个波束。
需要补充说明的是，当基站根据测量结果或用户设备的建议的波束索引信息重新指示波束索引信息时，仅需要修改SPS资源信息中的波束索引信息，而不需要修改资源信息。此时，基站可以通过RRC信令或MAC CE或控制信道向用户设备重新指示波束索引信息
通过向用户设备发送SPS资源信息，该SPS资源信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的资源信息和波束索引信息；根据与SPS信息所指示的波束索引信息对应的波束与用户设备通信，可以通过发送SPS资源信息的方式为用户设备配置资源和波束，可以解决动态为用户设备配置资源和波束造成的浪费通信开销的问题，达到了节省通信开销的效果。
第八种应用场景，以基站应用于D2D的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图3所示的实施例中的第八种应用场景：
为了避免D2D通信相互干扰或D2D通信干扰小区内其它用户设备的正常通信，基站为用户设备分配D2D通信的波束的初始波束索引信息。
发射机601，用于向用户设备发送D2D通信时使用的资源指示信息，该资源指示信息包括D2D资源信息和初始波束索引信息，用于指示用户设备与其它用户设备之间采用D2D通信时使用的资源和初始波束。
其中，基站分配的波束索引信息可以是基站设置的，也可以是用户设备根据测量结果确定出质量较好的波束的波束索引信息后，向基站请求分配的初始波束索引信息，用于用户设备与其它用户设备之间进行D2D通信。D2D资源信息包括时域资源信息和频域资源信息。
需要补充说明的是，基站与用户设备之间采用的蜂窝通信和用户设备与其它用户设备之间采用的D2D通信在不同的初始波束上可以重用时域资源和频域资源。
通过接收基站发送的资源指示信息，该资源指示信息包括D2D资源信息和波束索引信息；根据资源指示信息确定与其它用户设备之间采用D2D通信时使用的资源和波束，可以根据基站分配的初始波束与其它用户设备通信，解决D2D通信之间相互干扰的问题，得到了提高通信质量的效果。
综上所述，本发明实施例提供的波束配置方法，通过将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给UE；接收来源于用户设备的RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的；根据RRM测量报告确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息，可以根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与用户设备通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了现有的毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，达到了延长毫米波频段的传输距离的效果。
请参考图10，其示出了本发明一个实施例提供的波束配置方法的方法流程图。该波束配置方法，可以包括：
步骤1001，用户设备接收基站发送的初始波束索引信息，该初始波束索引信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束。
其中，初始波束索引信息详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
步骤1002，用户设备发送RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的，该RRM测量报告用于指示基站确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息。
为了能够从基站分配的初始波束中选择信号质量较好的初始波束进行通信，以提高通信质量，用户设备还可以对确定出的基站分配的初始波束进行RRM测量，根据测量结果生成RRM测量报告。
其中，用户设备可以将RRM测量报告发送给LTE eNB，由LTE eNB将RRM测量报告转发给millimeter wave eNB；也可以将RRM测量报告发送给millimeter wave eNB本实施例不限定用户设备对RRM测量报告的发送方式。本发明下文各实施例中用户设备发送RRM测量报告的方法同本实施例的说明，下文不再赘述。
这里RRM测量可以指通常意义下的用于移动性管理的测量，是经过RRC层过滤的测量方法，也可以是指通过波束训练的方式进行的测量，具体详见图 2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
基站根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与UE通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，能够延长毫米波频段的传输距离。
综上所述，本发明实施例提供的波束配置方法，通过接收基站送的初始波束索引信息，该初始波束索引信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束；发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的，该RRM测量报告用于指示基站确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息，可以通过RRM测量报告向基站报告初始波束的信号质量，使基站选择信号质量较好的波束与用户设备通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了现有的毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，达到了延长毫米波频段的传输距离的效果。
本发明又一实施例提供了一种波束配置方法，该波束配置方法，可以包括：
步骤1001，用户设备接收基站发送的初始波束索引信息，该初始波束索引信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束。
其中，初始波束索引信息详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
步骤1002，用户设备发送RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的，该RRM测量报告用于指示基站确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息。
为了能够从基站分配的初始波束中选择信号质量较好的初始波束进行通信，以提高通信质量，用户设备还可以对确定出的基站分配的初始波束进行RRM测量，根据测量结果生成RRM测量报告。
其中，用户设备可以将RRM测量报告发送给LTE eNB，由LTE eNB将RRM测量报告转发给millimeter wave eNB；也可以将RRM测量报告发送给millimeter wave eNB本实施例不限定用户设备对RRM测量报告的发送方式。本发明下文各实施例中用户设备发送RRM测量报告的方法同本实施例的说明，下文不再赘述。
这里RRM测量可以指通常意义下的用于移动性管理的测量，是经过RRC 层过滤的测量方法，也可以是指通过波束训练的方式进行的测量，具体详见图2所示的实施例中的描述，此处不赘述。
基站根据RRM测量报告确定初始波束的信号质量，再选择信号质量较好的初始波束与UE通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，能够延长毫米波频段的传输距离。
下面分别以不同的应用场景为例对波束配置方法进行详细说明，具体如下：
第一种应用场景，以用户设备应用于不连续接收的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图5所示的实施例中的第一种应用场景：
用户设备存在休眠状态和激活状态，且处于激活状态的用户设备需要通过基站分配的波束监听控制信道，从而在控制信道上接收基站通过波束赋形技术发送的控制信息，该控制信息包括资源分配控制指令，该资源分配控制指令用于指示基站为用户设备分配的上行/下行资源。当用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态时，可能用户设备上一次处于激活状态时接收资源分配控制信令的波束已经不再适用，因此，用户设备还需要确定本次所需要监听的控制信道的波束。本实施例提供了两种确定需要监听的控制信道的波束的方法，下面分别对这两种方法进行具体描述：
第一种方法，若RRM测量报告包括每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息，参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种，则用户设备发送RRM测量报告之后，还包括：
在用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，用户设备确定参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息；
用户设备通过第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
在第一种确定波束的方法中，基站可以和用户设备约定使用RRM测量报告中信号质量较好的初始波束，具体流程详见图3所示的实施例中第一种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
若用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态，则可以根据上述方法从RRM测量报告中确定至少一个初始波束，并通过确定的该至少一个初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
第二种方法，方法，还包括：
用户设备接收基站通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体接入控制层控制元MAC CE中的至少一种从RRM测量报告中的各个初始波束索引信息中指定的第二初始波束索引信息；
用户设备通过第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
在第二种确定波束的方法中，基站可以从分配的初始波束中指定用于在控制信道上发送资源分配控制信令的初始波束，再将指定的初始波束的第二初始波束索引信息通过RRC信令或MAC CE发送给用户设备。
需要补充说明的是，还可以通过上述第一种方法和第二种方法共同确定波束索引信息，详见图3所示的实施例中第一种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
在确定控制信道的波束后，用户设备还可以通过以下至少一种方式对控制信道进行监听。其中，用户设备通过第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息，包括：用户设备以全向方式接收控制信息，或，以大于等于第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收控制信息，或，以小于第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收控制信息；
用户设备通过第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息，包括：用户设备以全向方式接收控制信息，或，以大于等于第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收控制信息，或，以小于第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收控制信息。
本实施例中，用户设备监听控制信息的流程详见图3所示的实施例中第一种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
通过若RRM测量报告包括每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息，参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率RSRP和参考信号接收质量RSRQ中的至少一种，则在用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，用户设备确定参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息；通过第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息，可以使用RRM测量报告中信号质量较好的初始波束来接收控制信息，提高通信效率。
第二种应用场景，以用户设备应用于TA的场景中为例进行说明，该应用 场景对应于图5所示的实施例中的第二种应用场景：
由于用户设备与基站之间存在的障碍物会降低波束的通信质量，因此，基站可以预先为用户设备配置备选波束，以通过避开障碍物来提高通信质量，因此，可选的，方法，还包括：
用户设备接收基站发送的备选波束索引信息，备选波束索引信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束；
若初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值，则用户设备对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量，参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；
用户设备根据RRM测量确定出参考信号信息大于第三阈值的第一备选波束索引信息；
用户设备将确定出的第一备选波束索引信息发送给基站，基站用于根据第一备选波束索引信息所对应的与备选波束用户设备进行通信。
基站为用户设备配置备选波束的流程详见图3所示的实施例中第二种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
本实施例中，由于不同的用户设备与基站之间的距离不同，因此，不同用户设备的信号传输时延不同。若需要使得不同用户设备发送的上行信息同时达到基站，则基站需要根据用户设备与基站之间的距离为不同的用户设备配置不同的TA。通常，备选波束与基站分配的初始波束相比，其传播路径较长，导致传播时延较大，此时，会导致上行TA发生突变，因此，用户设备需要重新确定上行TA。其中，上行TA的确定需要通过随机接入过程实现。
本实施例中，方法，还包括：
用户设备自动向基站发送第一随机接入请求，第一随机接入请求用于指示基站生成上行时间提前TA，并根据分配的第二备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及上行TA与用户设备进行通信；或，
用户设备在控制信道上接收基站发送的随机接入指令，随机接入指令是基站利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为用户设备分配的备选波束与用户设备进行通信后发送的，根据随机接入指令向基站发送第二随机接入请求，第二随机接入请求用于指示基站生成上行TA，并根据接收到的第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及上行TA与用户设备进行通信。
当用户设备主动触发随机接入过程时，用户设备主动向基站发送第一随机 接入请求，当用户设备在随机接入指令的指示下触发随机接入过程时，用户设备向基站发送第二随机接入请求，具体流程详见图3所示的实施例中第二种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
对应的，当用户设备检测出每个备选波束的参考信号信息均小于第三阈值且检测出至少一个初始波束的参考信号信息大于第二阈值时，确定初始波束的质量较好，将至少一个初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给基站，基站使用至少一个初始波束与基站通信。或，基站利用波束波形技术确定出用户设备即将离开障碍物区域且检测出至少一个初始波束的参考信号信息大于第二阈值时，确定使用至少一个初始波束与基站通信。此时，用户设备可以重新确定上行TA，也可以不确定上行TA。
本实施例中，用户设备所使用的波束可能存在不同的TA，这些TA可能针对同一毫米波基站，也可能针对不同毫米波基站。因此，基站还可以为每个用户设备设置至少一个TA组，每个TA组包括至少一个波束索引信息，且每个波束索引信息所对应的上行TA相同。波束索引信息可以是初始波束的初始波束索引信息，也可以是备选波束的备选波束索引信息。其中，一个TA组中的波束索引信息所指示的波束可以属于同一个小区，也可以属于不同的小区，因此，还可以在TA组中标识每个波束所关联的小区的小区标识。
本实施例中，方法，还包括：
用户设备接收基站发送的TA组，TA组是基站在与用户设备进行通信的波束中，将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，根据每个分组生成的，TA组包括TA组标识、分组中各个波束的波束索引信息、分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT，波束包括初始波束和备选波束中的至少一种；
若TA组中的TAT超时，则用户设备检测TA组中的小区标识是否对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且其它TA组的TAT未超时；
若检测出TA组中的小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且其它TA组的TAT未超时，则用户设备确定波束索引信息所对应的小区，维护小区所对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ缓冲区和探测参考信号SRS资源；
若检测出TA组中的小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且其它TA组的TAT超时，则用户设备确定波束索引信息所对应的小区，释放小区所对应的HARQ缓冲区和SRS资源。
通过接收基站发送的备选波束索引信息，备选波束索引信息用于指示基站 为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束；若初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值，则对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量；根据RRM测量确定出参考信号信息大于第三阈值的第一备选波束索引信息；将确定出的第一备选波束索引信息发送给基站，可以在分配的初始波束的质量较差时，使用质量较好的备选波束与基站通信，达到了提高通信效率的效果。
第三种应用场景，以用户设备应用于功率控制的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图5所示的实施例中的第三种应用场景：
由于基站采用了波束赋形技术，在不同波束方向的路损可能不同，因此，需要从所分配的初始波束中选择出路损最小的初始波束，在选择出的初始波束上进行通信。
可选的，用户设备发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，还包括：
用户设备对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个初始波束的路损信息；
用户设备根据最小的路损信息生成功率余量PH，得到功率余量报告PHR；
用户设备发送PHR，PHR用于指示基站根据PH和与PH对应的初始波束为用户设备分配上行资源，通过与PH对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与用户设备进行通信。
其中，基站所发送的波束索引信息可以对应于位于RRM测量报告对应的波束范围外的波束，也可以对应于位于RRM测量报告对应的波束范围内的初始波束，还可以是自适应确定的波束，本实施例不作限定。
若基站希望在更细的波束范围内对用户设备进行上行调度以获取更好的方向增益和更精确的功率控制，则可以动态通过MAC CE指示初始波束索引信息，使得用户设备报告其中路损最小的波束的PH。
可选的，用户设备对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个初始波束的路损信息，包括：
用户设备接收基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示；
用户设备对第一指示所指示的各个第一波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个第一波束的路损信息。
需要补充说明的是，当基站未限制用户设备的上行发射功率时，用户设备 可以在上行支持多波束发送以提高空口效率。若用户设备同时支持多波束且一定程度功率受限时，还需要对至少一个波束的发射功率进行下调，具体下调方法详见图3所示的实施例中第三种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
通过对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个初始波束的路损信息；根据最小的路损信息生成PH，得到PHR；发送PHR，PHR用于指示基站根据PH和与PH对应的初始波束为用户设备分配上行资源，通过与PH对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与用户设备进行通信，可以选择在路损最小的初始波束对应的上行资源上与基站通信，节省了发射功率。
第四种应用场景，以用户设备应用于CSI测量的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图5所示的实施例中的第四种应用场景：
本实施例中，用户设备还需要对初始波束进行CSI测量，得到CSI信息，以根据CSI信息确定初始波束的质量。
可选的，用户设备发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，还包括：
用户设备对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束进行信道状态指示CSI测量，得到各个初始波束的信道质量指示CQI；
用户设备根据最高的CQI生成信道状态指示CSI信息，得到CSI测量报告；
用户设备发送CSI测量报告，CSI测量报告用于指示基站根据CSI信息和与CSI信息对应的初始波束与用户设备进行通信。
其中，用户设备测量的波束可以是RRM测量报告范围内的波束，则用户设备首先需要获取RRM测量报告所对应的初始波束，具体获取方法详见图3所示的实施例中第四种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
用户设备在测量出各个初始波束的CSI信息后，可以从各个CSI信息中筛选出包括最高CQI的CSI信息，并根据筛选出的至少一个CSI信息生成CSI测量报告。其中，CSI信息包括CQI、PMI和RI中的至少一种，用户设备可以同时或在不同的时刻将CQI、PMI和RI中的至少一种发送给基站。
若基站希望在更细的波束范围内对用户设备进行上行调度以获取更好的方向增益，则可以动态通过MAC CE指示波束索引信息，使得用户设备报告其中CQI最高的CSI信息。
可选的，用户设备对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束进行信道状 态指示CSI测量，得到各个初始波束的信道质量指示CQI，包括：
用户设备接收基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示；
用户设备对第二指示所指示的各个第二波束进行CSI测量，得到各个第二波束的CQI。
通过对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束进行信道状态指示CSI测量，得到各个初始波束的CQI；根据最高的CQI生成CSI信息，得到CSI测量报告；发送CSI测量报告，CSI测量报告用于指示基站根据CSI信息和与CSI信息对应的初始波束与用户设备进行通信，可以选择CQI最高的初始波束与基站通信，提高通信效率。
第五种应用场景，以用户设备应用于调整小区带宽的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图5所示的实施例中的第五种应用场景：
本实施例中，当小区所接入的各个用户设备的业务量产生变化，导致小区的负荷产生变化时，基站需要对小区的小区带宽进行调整，具体调整方法详见图3所示的实施例中第五种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
调整后的小区可以使用多信道，使得多信道共用同一个HARQ实体。此时，整个小区可以由多个相同带宽的信道组成，基站可以在位于中心频点的信道上发送公共信息，或，基站可以在每个信道的中心频率上均发送上述公共信息。
对应的，方法，还包括：
用户设备通过广播接收基站发送的调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息，或，接收基站发送的RRC信令，RRC信令中携带有调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息；调整后的小区带宽是基站根据用户设备的业务量调整的，且小区带宽与业务量呈正相关关系，中心频点是调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或频率范围内的指定频率；
若调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成，则用户设备在位于中心频点的信道上接收基站发送的公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上接收基站发送的发送公共信息。
用户设备可以以与基站发送调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息的方式对应的方式接收调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息，根据中心 频点的信息在位于中心频点的信道上接收公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上接收公共信息。
通过广播接收基站发送的调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息，或，接收基站发送的RRC信令，RRC信令中携带有调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息；调整后的小区带宽是基站根据用户设备的业务量调整的，且小区带宽与业务量呈正相关关系，中心频点是调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或频率范围内的指定频率，可以仅调整小区带宽，而不需要配置其它无线资源配置参数，节省了配置小区带宽过程中的通信开销。
第六种应用场景，以用户设备应用于调整用户带宽的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图5所示的实施例中的第六种应用场景：
有时候，小区的整体负荷情况变化不大但某些用户设备的业务量变化很大，导致这些用户设备对小区带宽的需求发生变化，此时仅需要调整这些用户设备所需要的小区带宽。从用户设备的角度看，其用户带宽可以自适应缩减或增加；但从基站的角度看，基站仍然以原来使用的小区带宽发送信息，但不同用户设备所使用的频率范围可以不同。
由于用户带宽是由信道组成的，因此，基站在调整用户带宽时，可以根据业务量通过调整分配给用户设备的信道来调整用户带宽。
对应的，方法，还包括：
用户设备通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种接收基站发送的调整后的用户带宽的信息，调整后的用户带宽是基站根据用户设备的业务量调整的，且用户带宽与业务量呈正相关关系；
用户设备对组成用户带宽的信道的控制信道进行监听。
用户设备可以以与基站发送调整后的用户带宽的信息的方式对应的方式接收调整后的用户带宽的信息，对组成用户带宽的信道进行监听。其中，调整用户带宽调整后所剩余的带宽在频域上可以是连续的或非连续的。
具体地，详见图3所示的实施例中第六种应用场景的描述，此处不赘述。
通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种接收基站发送的调整后的用户带宽的信息，调整后的用户带宽是基站根据用户设备的业务量调整的，且用户带宽与业务量呈正相关关系，可以根据用户设备的业务量实时调整用户带宽，保证了用户设备的正常工作。
第七种应用场景，以用户设备应用于SPS的场景中为例进行说明，该应用场景对应于图5所示的实施例中的第七种应用场景：
接收机801，用于接收基站发送的SPS资源信息；
当SPS资源信息包括波束索引信息时，用户设备可以根据波束索引信息确定波束；当SPS资源信息不包括波束索引信息时，用户设备可以根据RRM测量报告所携带的波束索引信息确定波束，该波束可以是发送波束，也可以是接收波束。其中，基站可以在通过RRC信令配置用户设备或在使用控制信道激活SPS资源时指示波束索引信息。
用户设备还包括处理器803，用于根据SPS资源信息确定基站为用户设备分配的资源信息和波束索引信息。
当SPS资源信息指示了至少两个波束索引信息时，基站可以与用户设备约定根据测量结果使用质量较好的波束或使用预设的波束。此时，用户设备可以在质量较好的波束上发送/接收信息，对应的，基站在该波束上接收/发送信息。或，用户设备在预设的至少一个波束上同时发送/接收信息，对应的，基站在该至少一个波束上同时接收/发送信息。
用户设备以SPS方式发送/接收信息时选择信号条件较好的波束进行，或者在一个或多个预先确定的波束上同时进行发送和/或接收。相应的，基站可以在一个或多个预先确定的波束上以SPS方式接收/发送信息。基站和用户设备可以根据测量结果在多个预先确定的波束范围内优先选择信号条件好的一个或多个波束。
需要补充说明的是，当基站根据测量结果或用户设备的建议的波束索引信息重新指示波束索引信息时，仅需要修改SPS资源信息中的波束索引信息，而不需要修改资源信息。此时，基站可以通过RRC信令或MAC CE或控制信道向用户设备重新指示波束索引信息
通过接收基站发送的SPS资源信息，根据SPS资源信息确定基站为用户设备分配的资源信息和波束索引信息，可以通过接收SPS资源信息的方式配置资源和波束，可以解决动态为用户设备配置资源和波束造成的浪费通信开销的问题，达到了节省通信开销的效果。
第八种应用场景，以用户设备应用于D2D的场景中为例进行说明，该应 用场景对应于图5所示的实施例中的第八种应用场景：
为了避免D2D通信相互干扰或D2D通信干扰小区内其它用户设备的正常通信，基站为用户设备分配D2D通信的波束的初始波束索引信息。
接收机801，接收基站发送的资源指示信息，该资源指示信息包括D2D资源信息和初始波束索引信息；
用户设备还包括处理器803，用于根据接收机801接收到的资源指示信息确定与其它用户设备之间采用D2D通信时使用的资源和初始波束。
其中，基站分配的波束索引信息可以是基站设置的，也可以是用户设备根据测量结果确定出质量较好的波束的波束索引信息后，向基站请求分配的初始波束索引信息，用于用户设备与其它用户设备之间进行D2D通信。D2D资源信息包括时域资源信息和频域资源信息。
需要补充说明的是，基站与用户设备之间采用的蜂窝通信和用户设备与其它用户设备之间采用的D2D通信在不同的初始波束上可以重用时域资源和频域资源。
通过接收基站发送的资源指示信息，该资源指示信息包括D2D资源信息和波束索引信息；根据资源指示信息确定与其它用户设备之间采用D2D通信时使用的资源和波束，可以根据基站分配的初始波束与其它用户设备通信，解决D2D通信之间相互干扰的问题，达到了提高通信质量的效果。
综上所述，本发明实施例提供的波束配置方法，通过接收基站送的初始波束索引信息，该初始波束索引信息用于指示基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束；发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告，该RRM测量报告是用户设备对初始波束索引信息所指示的初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的，该RRM测量报告用于指示基站确定与用户设备进行通信的初始波束索引信息，可以通过RRM测量报告向基站报告初始波束的信号质量，使基站选择信号质量较好的波束与用户设备通信，利用波束赋形技术解决了现有的毫米波频段的传输距离较短，无法满足蜂窝通信环境下用户设备的数据通信需求的问题，达到了延长毫米波频段的传输距离的效果。
需要说明的是：上述实施例提供的基站和用户设备在进行波束配置时，仅以上述各功能模块的划分进行举例说明，实际应用中，可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能模块完成，即将基站和用户设备的内部结构划分成不同 的功能模块，以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。另外，上述实施例提供的基站和用户设备与波束配置方法实施例属于同一构思，其具体实现过程详见方法实施例，这里不再赘述。
上述本发明实施例序号仅仅为了描述，不代表实施例的优劣。
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到，结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤，能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行，取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能，但是这种实现不应认为超出本发明的范围。
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到，为描述的方便和简洁，上述描述的系统、装置和单元的具体工作过程，可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程，在此不再赘述。
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中，应该理解到，所揭露的系统、装置和方法，可以通过其它的方式实现。例如，以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示意性的，例如，所述单元的划分，可以仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统，或一些特征可以忽略，或不执行。另一点，所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口，装置或单元的间接耦合或通信连接，可以是电性，机械或其它的形式。
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的，作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元，即可以位于一个地方，或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。
另外，在本发明各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是各个单元单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本发明的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设 备等)执行本发明各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
以上所述，仅为本发明的具体实施方式，但本发明的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本发明揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到变化或替换，都应涵盖在本发明的保护范围之内。因此，本发明的保护范围应所述以权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (84)

  1. 一种基站，其特征在于，所述基站包括：
    发送模块，用于将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给所述用户设备；
    接收模块，用于接收来源于所述用户设备的无线资源管理RRM测量报告，所述RRM测量报告是所述用户设备对所述发送模块发送的所述初始波束索引信息所指示的所述初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的；
    确定模块，用于根据所述接收模块接收到的所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的基站，其特征在于：
    所述确定模块，具体用于从所述RRM测量报告中每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息中，确定所述参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息，所述参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率RSRP和参考信号接收质量RSRQ中的至少一种；
    所述发送模块，还用于通过所述确定模块确定的所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送控制信息，所述用户设备用于从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，通过确定的所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束监听所述控制信息。
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的基站，其特征在于：
    所述确定模块，具体用于通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体接入控制层控制元MAC CE中的至少一种，从所述RRM测量报告中的各个初始波束索引信息中指定第二初始波束索引信息，指定的所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束用于在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送所述控制信息。
  4. 根据权利要求1所述的基站，其特征在于：
    所述发送模块，还用于将为所述用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束的备选波束索引信息发送给所述用户设备；
    所述接收模块，还用于接收所述用户设备从所述发送模块发送的各个备选 波束索引信息中选择并发送的第一备选波束索引信息，所述第一备选波束索引信息是所述初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值，且对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量后，确定出的参考信号信息大于第三阈值的备选波束索引信息，所述参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；
    所述基站还包括通信模块，用于根据所述接收模块接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的基站，其特征在于：
    所述接收模块，还用于接收所述用户设备发送的第一随机接入请求；
    所述基站还包括生成模块，用于根据所述第一随机接入请求生成上行时间提前TA；
    所述通信模块，还用于根据接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述生成模块生成的所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
  6. 根据权利要求4所述的基站，其特征在于：
    所述确定模块，还用于利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为所述用户设备分配的所述备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信；
    所述发送模块，还用于在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送随机接入指令；
    所述接收模块，还用于接收所述用户设备根据所述发送模块发送的所述随机接入指令发送的第二随机接入请求；
    所述基站还包括生成模块，用于根据所述第二随机接入请求生成上行TA；
    所述通信模块，还用于根据分配的第二备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述生成模块生成的所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
  7. 根据权利要求5或6所述的基站，其特征在于：
    所述确定模块，还用于在与所述用户设备进行通信的波束中，将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，所述波束包括所述初始波束和所述备选波束中的至少一种；
    所述生成模块，还用于根据所述确定模块得到的每个分组生成一个TA组，所述TA组包括TA组标识、所述分组中各个波束的波束索引信息、所述分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT；
    所述发送模块，还用于将所述生成模块生成的所述TA组发送给所述用户设备。
  8. 根据权利要求1所述的基站，其特征在于：
    所述接收模块，还用于所述确定模块根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，接收来源于所述用户设备的功率余量报告PHR，所述PHR中包括功率余量PH，所述PH是对各个初始波束的RSRP进行测量得到路损信息，根据最小的路损信息生成的；
    所述基站还包括分配模块，用于根据所述接收模块接收到的所述PH和与所述PH对应的初始波束为所述用户设备分配上行资源；
    所述通信模块，具体用于通过与所述PH对应的初始波束在所述分配模块分配的对应的上行资源上与所述用户设备进行通信。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的基站，其特征在于：
    所述发送模块，还用于所述接收模块接收来源于所述用户设备的功率余量报告PHR之前，向所述用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示，所述第一指示用于指示所述用户设备对所述第一波束的RSRP进行测量。
  10. 根据权利要求1所述的基站，其特征在于：
    所述接收模块，用于所述确定模块根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，接收来源于所述用户设备的信道状态指示CSI测量报告，所述CSI测量报告中包括CSI信息，所述CSI信息是对各个初始波束进行CSI测量得到信道质量指示CQI，根据最高的CQI生成的；
    所述通信模块，具体用于根据所述接收模块接收到的所述CSI信息和与所述CSI信息对应的初始波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的基站，其特征在于：
    所述发送模块，还用于所述接收模块接收来源于所述用户设备的信道状态指示CSI测量报告之前，向所述用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示，所述第二指示用于指示所述用 户设备对所述第二波束进行CSI测量。
  12. 根据权利要求1所述的基站，其特征在于：
    所述基站还包括调整模块，用于所述确定模块根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，根据至少一个用户设备的业务量调整小区带宽，所述小区带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；
    所述发送模块，还用于将所述调整模块调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息广播给各个用户设备，或，通过RRC信令将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息发送给各个用户设备，所述中心频点是所述调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或所述频率范围内的指定频率。
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的基站，其特征在于，若所述调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成：
    所述发送模块，还用于在位于所述中心频点的信道上向各个用户设备发送公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上向各个用户设备发送公共信息。
  14. 根据权利要求1所述的基站，其特征在于：
    所述基站还包括调整模块，用于所述确定模块根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，根据所述用户设备的业务量调整所述用户设备的用户带宽，所述用户带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；
    所述发送模块，还用于通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种将所述调整模块调整后的用户带宽的信息发送给所述用户设备。
  15. 根据权利要求14所述的基站，其特征在于，所述调整模块，具体用于根据所述用户设备的业务量调整为所述用户设备分配的信道，得到所述用户带宽。
  16. 一种用户设备，其特征在于，所述用户设备包括：
    接收模块，用于接收基站发送的初始波束索引信息，所述初始波束索引信息用于指示所述基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束；
    发送模块，用于发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告，所述RRM测量报告是所述用户设备对所述初始波束索引信息所指示的所述初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的，所述RRM测量报告用于指示所述基站确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息。
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的用户设备，其特征在于，若所述RRM测量报告包括每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息，所述参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率RSRP和参考信号接收质量RSRQ中的至少一种，则所述用户设备，还包括：
    确定模块，用于所述发送模块发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，在所述用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，确定所述参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息；
    监听模块，用于通过所述确定模块确定的所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
  18. 根据权利要求16所述的用户设备，其特征在于：
    所述接收模块，还用于接收所述基站通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体接入控制层控制元MAC CE中的至少一种从所述RRM测量报告中的各个初始波束索引信息中指定的第二初始波束索引信息；
    所述用户设备还包括监听模块，用于通过所述接收模块接收到的所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的用户设备，其特征在于，
    所述监听模块，具体用于以全向方式接收所述控制信息，或，以大于等于所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息，或，以小于所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息；或，
    所述监听模块，具体用于以全向方式接收所述控制信息，或，以大于等于所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息，或，以小于所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息。
  20. 根据权利要求16所述的用户设备，其特征在于：
    所述接收模块，还用于接收所述基站发送的备选波束索引信息，所述备选波束索引信息用于指示所述基站为所述用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束；
    所述用户设备还包括：
    测量模块，用于在所述初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值时，对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量，所述参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；
    确定模块，用于根据所述测量模块进行的所述RRM测量确定出参考信号信息大于第三阈值的第一备选波束索引信息；
    所述发送模块，还用于将所述确定模块确定出的所述第一备选波束索引信息发送给所述基站，所述基站用于根据所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的与备选波束所述用户设备进行通信。
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的用户设备，其特征在于：
    所述发送模块，还用于自动向所述基站发送第一随机接入请求，所述第一随机接入请求用于指示所述基站生成上行时间提前TA，并根据分配的第二备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信；或，
    所述接收模块，还用于在控制信道上接收所述基站发送的随机接入指令，所述随机接入指令是所述基站利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为所述用户设备分配的所述备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信后发送的，根据所述随机接入指令向所述基站发送第二随机接入请求，所述第二随机接入请求用于指示所述基站生成上行TA，并根据接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
  22. 根据权利要求20所述的用户设备，其特征在于：
    所述接收模块，还用于接收所述基站发送的TA组，所述TA组是所述基站在与所述用户设备进行通信的波束中，将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，根据每个分组生成的，所述TA组包括TA组标识、所述分组中各个波束的波束 索引信息、所述分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT，所述波束包括所述初始波束和所述备选波束中的至少一种；
    所述测量模块，还用于在所述接收模块接收到的所述TA组中的TAT超时，则检测所述TA组中的所述小区标识是否对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT未超时；
    所述用户设备还包括：
    维护模块，用于在所述测量模块检测出所述TA组中的所述小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT未超时时，确定所述波束索引信息所对应的小区，维护所述小区所对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ缓冲区和探测参考信号SRS资源；
    释放模块，用于在所述测量模块检测出所述TA组中的所述小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT超时时，确定所述波束索引信息所对应的小区，释放所述小区所对应的HARQ缓冲区和SRS资源。
  23. 根据权利要求16所述的用户设备，其特征在于：
    所述用户设备，还包括：
    测量模块，用于所述发送模块发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个初始波束的路损信息；
    生成模块，用于根据所述测量模块测出的最小的路损信息生成至少一个功率余量PH，得到功率余量报告PHR；
    所述发送模块，具体用于发送所述生成模块生成的所述PHR，所述PHR用于指示所述基站根据所述PH和与所述PH对应的初始波束为所述用户设备分配上行资源，通过与所述PH对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与所述用户设备进行通信。
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的用户设备，其特征在于：
    所述接收模块，还用于接收所述基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示；
    所述生成模块，还用于对所述接收模块接收到的所述第一指示所指示的各个第一波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个第一波束的路损信息。
  25. 根据权利要求16所述的用户设备，其特征在于：
    所述用户设备，还包括：
    测量模块，用于所述发送模块发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束进行信道状态指示CSI测量，得到各个初始波束的信道质量指示CQI；
    生成模块，用于根据所述测量模块测出的最高的CQI生成至少一个信道状态指示CSI信息，得到CSI测量报告；
    所述发送模块，还用于发送所述生成模块生成的所述CSI测量报告，所述CSI测量报告用于指示所述基站根据所述CSI信息和与所述CSI信息对应的初始波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的用户设备，其特征在于：
    所述接收模块，还用于接收所述基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示；
    所述生成模块，还用于对所述接收模块接收到的所述第二指示所指示的各个第二波束进行CSI测量，得到各个第二波束的CQI。
  27. 根据权利要求16所述的用户设备，其特征在于：
    所述接收模块，还用于：
    通过广播接收所述基站发送的调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息，或，接收所述基站发送的RRC信令，所述RRC信令中携带有调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息；所述调整后的小区带宽是所述基站根据至少一个用户设备的业务量调整的，且所述小区带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系，所述中心频点是所述调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或所述频率范围内的指定频率；
    在所述调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成时，在位于所述中心频点的信道上接收所述基站发送的公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上接收所述基站发送的发送公共信息。
  28. 根据权利要求16所述的用户设备，其特征在于：
    所述接收模块，还用于通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种接收所述基站发送的调整后的用户带宽的信息，所述调整后的用户带宽是所述基站根据所述用户设备的业务量调整的，且所述用户带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；
    所述用户设备还包括监听模块，用于对组成所述接收模块接收到的所述用户带宽的信道的控制信道进行监听。
  29. 一种基站，其特征在于，所述基站包括：
    发射机，用于将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给所述用户设备；
    接收机，用于接收来源于所述用户设备的无线资源管理RRM测量报告，所述RRM测量报告是所述用户设备对所述发射机发送的所述初始波束索引信息所指示的所述初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的；
    处理器，用于根据所述接收机接收到的所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息。
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的基站，其特征在于，
    所述处理器，具体用于从所述RRM测量报告中每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息中，确定所述参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息，所述参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率RSRP和参考信号接收质量RSRQ中的至少一种；
    所述发射机，还用于通过所述处理器确定的所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送控制信息，所述用户设备用于从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，通过确定的所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束监听所述控制信息。
  31. 根据权利要求29所述的基站，其特征在于，所述发射机，还用于通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体接入控制层控制元MAC CE中的至少一种，从所述RRM测量报告中的各个初始波束索引信息中指定第二初始波束索引信息，指定的所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束用于在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送所述控制信息。
  32. 根据权利要求29所述的基站，其特征在于，
    所述发射机，还用于将为所述用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束的备选波束索引信息发送给所述用户设备；
    所述接收机，还用于接收所述用户设备从所述发射机发送的各个备选波束索引信息中选择并发送的第一备选波束索引信息，所述第一备选波束索引信息是所述初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值，且对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量后，确定出的参考信号信息大于第三阈值的备选波束索引信息，所述参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；
    所述处理器，还用于根据所述接收机接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的基站，其特征在于：
    所述发射机，还用于接收所述用户设备发送的第一随机接入请求；
    所述处理器，具体用于根据所述第一随机接入请求生成上行时间提前TA，根据接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
  34. 根据权利要求32所述的基站，其特征在于，
    所述处理器，还用于利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为所述用户设备分配的所述备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信；
    所述发射机，还用于在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送随机接入指令；
    所述接收机，还用于接收所述用户设备根据所述发射机发送的所述随机接入指令发送的第二随机接入请求；
    所述处理器，具体用于根据所述接收机接收到的所述第二随机接入请求生成上行TA；并根据分配的第二备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
  35. 根据权利要求29至34任一项所述的基站，其特征在于，
    所述处理器，还用于在与所述用户设备进行通信的波束中，将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，所述波束包括所述初始波束和所述备选波束中的至少 一种；根据每个分组生成一个TA组，所述TA组包括TA组标识、所述分组中各个波束的波束索引信息、所述分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT；
    所述发射机，还用于将所述处理器生成的所述TA组发送给所述用户设备。
  36. 根据权利要求29所述的基站，其特征在于，
    所述接收机，还用于所述处理器根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，接收来源于所述用户设备的功率余量报告PHR，所述PHR中包括功率余量PH，所述PH是对各个初始波束的RSRP进行测量得到路损信息，根据最小的路损信息生成的；
    所述处理器，具体用于根据所述接收机接收到的所述PH和与所述PH对应的初始波束为所述用户设备分配上行资源；通过与所述PH对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与所述用户设备进行通信。
  37. 根据权利要求36所述的基站，其特征在于，所述发射机，还用于所述接收机接收来源于所述用户设备的功率余量报告PHR之前，向所述用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示，所述第一指示用于指示所述用户设备对所述第一波束的RSRP进行测量。
  38. 根据权利要求29所述的基站，其特征在于，
    所述接收机，还用于所述处理器根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，接收来源于所述用户设备的信道状态指示CSI测量报告，所述CSI测量报告中包括CSI信息，所述CSI信息是对各个初始波束进行CSI测量得到信道质量指示CQI，根据最高的CQI生成的；
    所述处理器，具体用于根据所述接收机接收到的所述CSI信息和与所述CSI信息对应的初始波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
  39. 根据权利要求38所述的基站，其特征在于，所述发射机，还用于所述接收机接收来源于所述用户设备的信道状态指示CSI测量报告之前，向所述用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示，所述第二指示用于指示所述用户设备对所述第二波束进行CSI测 量。
  40. 根据权利要求29所述的基站，其特征在于，
    所述处理器，还用于根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，根据至少一个用户设备的业务量调整小区带宽，所述小区带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；
    所述发射机，还用于将所述处理器调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息广播给各个用户设备，或，通过RRC信令将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息发送给各个用户设备，所述中心频点是所述调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或所述频率范围内的指定频率。
  41. 根据权利要求40所述的基站，其特征在于，若所述调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成，则所述发射机，还用于在位于所述中心频点的信道上向各个用户设备发送公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上向各个用户设备发送公共信息。
  42. 根据权利要求29所述的基站，其特征在于，
    所述处理器，还用于根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，根据所述用户设备的业务量调整所述用户设备的用户带宽，所述用户带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；
    所述发射机，还用于通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种将所述处理器调整后的用户带宽的信息发送给所述用户设备。
  43. 根据权利要求42所述的基站，其特征在于，所述处理器，还用于根据所述用户设备的业务量调整为所述用户设备分配的信道，得到所述用户带宽。
  44. 一种用户设备，其特征在于，所述用户设备包括：
    接收机，用于接收基站发送的初始波束索引信息，所述初始波束索引信息用于指示所述基站为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束；
    发射机，用于向所述基站发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告，所述RRM测量报告是所述用户设备对所述初始波束索引信息所指示的所述初始波束进行 RRM测量后得到的，所述RRM测量报告用于指示所述基站确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息。
  45. 根据权利要求44所述的用户设备，其特征在于，若所述RRM测量报告包括每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息，所述参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率RSRP和参考信号接收质量RSRQ中的至少一种，则
    所述用户设备还包括处理器，用于所述发射机发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，在所述用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，确定所述参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息；
    所述接收机，还用于通过所述处理器确定的所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
  46. 根据权利要求44所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述接收机，还用于接收所述基站通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体接入控制层控制元MAC CE中的至少一种从所述RRM测量报告中的各个初始波束索引信息中指定的第二初始波束索引信息；通过所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
  47. 根据权利要求45或46所述的用户设备，其特征在于，
    所述接收机，具体用于以全向方式接收所述控制信息，或，以大于等于所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息，或，以小于所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息；或，
    所述接收机，具体用于以全向方式接收所述控制信息，或，以大于等于所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息，或，以小于所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息。
  48. 根据权利要求44所述的用户设备，其特征在于，
    所述接收机，还用于接收所述基站发送的备选波束索引信息，所述备选波束索引信息用于指示所述基站为所述用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束；
    所述用户设备还包括处理器，用于在所述初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值时，对所述接收机接收到的各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量，所述参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；根据所述RRM测量确定出参考信号信息大于第三阈值第一备选波束索引信息；
    所述发射机，还用于将所述处理器确定出的所述第一备选波束索引信息发送给所述基站，所述基站用于根据所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
  49. 根据权利要求48所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述发射机，还用于自动向所述基站发送第一随机接入请求，所述第一随机接入请求用于指示所述基站生成上行时间提前TA，并根据分配的第二备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信，或，在控制信道上接收所述基站发送的随机接入指令，所述随机接入指令是所述基站利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为所述用户设备分配的所述备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信后发送的，根据所述随机接入指令向所述基站发送第二随机接入请求，所述第二随机接入请求用于指示所述基站生成上行TA，并根据接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
  50. 根据权利要求44至49任一项所述的用户设备，其特征在于，
    所述接收机，还用于接收所述基站发送的TA组，所述TA组是所述基站在与所述用户设备进行通信的波束中，将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，根据每个分组生成的，所述TA组包括TA组标识、所述分组中各个波束的波束索引信息、所述分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT，所述波束包括所述初始波束和所述备选波束中的至少一种；
    所述用户设备还包括处理器，用于在所述接收机接收到的所述TA组中的TAT超时，则检测所述TA组中的所述小区标识是否对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT未超时；在检测出所述TA组中的所述小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT未超时时，确定所述波束索引信息所对应的小区，维护所述小区所对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ缓冲区和探测参考信号SRS资源；在检测出所述TA组中的所述小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT超时 时，确定所述波束索引信息所对应的小区，释放所述小区所对应的HARQ缓冲区和SRS资源。
  51. 根据权利要求44所述的用户设备，其特征在于：
    所述用户设备还包括：
    处理器，用于所述发射机发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个初始波束的路损信息；根据最小的路损信息生成至少一个功率余量PH，得到功率余量报告PHR；
    所述发射机，还用于发送所述处理器生成的所述PHR，所述PHR用于指示所述基站根据所述PH和与所述PH对应的初始波束为所述用户设备分配上行资源，通过与所述PH对应的波束在对应的上行资源上与所述用户设备进行通信。
  52. 根据权利要求51所述的用户设备，其特征在于，
    接收机，还用于接收所述基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示；
    所述处理器，还用于对所述接收机接收到的所述第一指示所指示的各个第一波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个第一波束的路损信息。
  53. 根据权利要求44所述的用户设备，其特征在于：
    所述用户设备还包括处理器，用于所述发射机发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束进行信道状态指示CSI测量，得到各个初始波束的信道质量指示CQI；根据最高的CQI生成至少一个信道状态指示CSI信息，得到CSI测量报告；
    所述发射机，还用于发送所述处理器生成的所述CSI测量报告，所述CSI测量报告用于指示所述基站根据所述CSI信息和与所述CSI信息对应的初始波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
  54. 根据权利要求53所述的用户设备，其特征在于，
    所述接收机，还用于接收所述基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示；
    所述处理器，还用于对所述接收机接收到的所述第二指示所指示的各个第二波束进行CSI测量，得到各个第二波束的CQI。
  55. 根据权利要求44所述的用户设备，其特征在于，所述接收机，还用于通过广播接收所述基站发送的调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息，或，接收所述基站发送的RRC信令，所述RRC信令中携带有调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息；所述调整后的小区带宽是所述基站根据至少一个用户设备的业务量调整的，且所述小区带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系，所述中心频点是所述调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或所述频率范围内的指定频率；若所述调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成，则在位于所述中心频点的信道上接收所述基站发送的公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上接收所述基站发送的发送公共信息。
  56. 根据权利要求44所述的用户设备，其特征在于，
    所述接收机，还用于通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种接收所述基站发送的调整后的用户带宽的信息，所述调整后的用户带宽是所述基站根据所述用户设备的业务量调整的，且所述用户带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；对组成所述用户带宽的信道的控制信道进行监听。
  57. 一种波束配置方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    基站将为用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束的初始波束索引信息发送给所述用户设备；
    所述基站接收来源于所述用户设备的无线资源管理RRM测量报告，所述RRM测量报告是所述用户设备对所述初始波束索引信息所指示的所述初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的；
    所述基站根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息。
  58. 根据权利要求57所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基站根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息，包括：
    所述基站从所述RRM测量报告中每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信 号信息中，确定所述参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息，所述参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率RSRP和参考信号接收质量RSRQ中的至少一种；
    所述基站通过确定的所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送控制信息，所述用户设备用于从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，通过确定的所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束监听所述控制信息。
  59. 根据权利要求57所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法，还包括：
    所述基站通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体接入控制层控制元MAC CE中的至少一种，从所述RRM测量报告中的各个初始波束索引信息中指定第二初始波束索引信息，指定的所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束用于在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送所述控制信息。
  60. 根据权利要求57所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法，还包括：
    所述基站将为所述用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束的备选波束索引信息发送给所述用户设备；
    所述基站接收所述用户设备从各个备选波束索引信息中选择并发送的第一备选波束索引信息，所述第一备选波束索引信息是所述初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值，且对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量后，确定出的参考信号信息大于第三阈值的备选波束索引信息，所述参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；
    所述基站根据接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
  61. 根据权利要求60所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基站根据接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信，包括：
    所述基站接收所述用户设备发送的第一随机接入请求，根据所述第一随机接入请求生成上行时间提前TA；
    所述基站根据接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
  62. 根据权利要求60所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法，还包括：
    所述基站利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为所述用户设备分配的所述备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信；
    所述基站在控制信道上向所述用户设备发送随机接入指令；
    所述基站接收所述用户设备根据所述随机接入指令发送的第二随机接入请求，根据所述第二随机接入请求生成上行TA；
    所述基站根据分配的第二备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
  63. 根据权利要求57至62中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法，还包括：
    在与所述用户设备进行通信的波束中，所述基站将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，所述波束包括所述初始波束和所述备选波束中的至少一种；
    所述基站根据每个分组生成一个TA组，所述TA组包括TA组标识、所述分组中各个波束的波束索引信息、所述分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT；
    所述基站将生成的所述TA组发送给所述用户设备。
  64. 根据权利要求57所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基站根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，还包括：
    所述基站接收来源于所述用户设备的功率余量报告PHR，所述PHR中包括功率余量PH，所述PH是对各个初始波束的RSRP进行测量得到路损信息，根据最小的路损信息生成的；
    所述基站根据所述PH和与所述PH对应的初始波束为所述用户设备分配上行资源；
    所述基站通过与所述PH对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与所述用户设备进行通信。
  65. 根据权利要求64所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基站接收来源于所述用户设备的功率余量报告PHR之前，还包括：
    所述基站向所述用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示，所述第一指示用于指示所述用户设备对所述第一波束的RSRP进行测量。
  66. 根据权利要求57所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基站根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，还包括：
    所述基站接收来源于所述用户设备的信道状态指示CSI测量报告，所述CSI测量报告中包括CSI信息，所述CSI信息是对各个初始波束进行CSI测量得到信道质量指示CQI，根据最高的CQI生成的；
    所述基站根据所述CSI信息和与所述CSI信息对应的初始波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
  67. 根据权利要求66所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基站接收来源于所述用户设备的信道状态指示CSI测量报告之前，还包括：
    所述基站向所述用户设备发送携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示，所述第二指示用于指示所述用户设备对所述第二波束进行CSI测量。
  68. 根据权利要求57所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基站根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，还包括：
    所述基站根据用户设备的业务量调整小区带宽，所述小区带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；
    所述基站将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息广播给各个用户设备，或，通过RRC信令将调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息发送给各个用户设备，所述中心频点是所述调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或所述频率范围内的指定频率。
  69. 根据权利要求68所述的方法，其特征在于，若所述调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成，则所述方法，还包括：
    所述基站在位于所述中心频点的信道上向各个用户设备发送公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上向各个用户设备发送公共信息。
  70. 根据权利要求57所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基站根据所述RRM测量报告确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息之后，还包括：
    所述基站根据所述用户设备的业务量调整所述用户设备的用户带宽，所述用户带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；
    所述基站通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种将调整后的用户带宽的信息发送给所述用户设备。
  71. 根据权利要求70所述的方法，其特征在于，所述基站根据所述用户设备的业务量调整所述用户设备的用户带宽，包括：
    所述基站根据所述用户设备的业务量调整为所述用户设备分配的信道，得到所述用户带宽。
  72. 一种波束配置方法，其特征在于，所述方法包括：
    用户设备接收基站送的初始波束索引信息，所述初始波束索引信息用于指示所述基站为所述用户设备分配的毫米波频段的初始波束；
    所述用户设备发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告，所述RRM测量报告是所述用户设备对所述初始波束索引信息所指示的所述初始波束进行RRM测量后得到的，所述RRM测量报告用于指示所述基站确定与所述用户设备进行通信的所述初始波束索引信息。
  73. 根据权利要求72所述的方法，其特征在于，若所述RRM测量报告包括每个初始波束索引信息所对应的参考信号信息，所述参考信号信息包括参考信号接收功率RSRP和参考信号接收质量RSRQ中的至少一种，则所述用户设备发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，还包括：
    在所述用户设备从休眠状态切换到激活状态后，所述用户设备确定所述参考信号信息大于第一阈值的第一初始波束索引信息；
    所述用户设备通过所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
  74. 根据权利要求72所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法，还包括：
    所述用户设备接收所述基站通过无线资源控制RRC信令和媒体接入控制层控制元MAC CE中的至少一种从所述RRM测量报告中的各个初始波束索引信息中指定的第二初始波束索引信息；
    所述用户设备通过所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息。
  75. 根据权利要求73或74所述的方法，其特征在于，
    所述用户设备通过所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息，包括：所述用户设备以全向方式接收所述控制信息，或，以大于等于所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息，或，以小于所述第一初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息；
    所述用户设备通过所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束在控制信道上监听控制信息，包括：所述用户设备以全向方式接收所述控制信息，或，以大于等于所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息，或，以小于所述第二初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的波束范围接收所述控制信息。
  76. 根据权利要求72所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法，还包括：
    所述用户设备接收所述基站发送的备选波束索引信息，所述备选波束索引信息用于指示所述基站为所述用户设备分配的毫米波频段的备选波束；
    若所述初始波束的参考信号信息小于第二阈值，则所述用户设备对各个备选波束索引信息所指示的备选波束进行RRM测量，所述参考信号信息包括RSRP和RSRQ中的至少一种；
    所述用户设备根据所述RRM测量确定出参考信号信息大于第三阈值的第一备选波束索引信息；
    所述用户设备将确定出的所述第一备选波束索引信息发送给所述基站，所述基站用于根据所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的与备选波束所述用户设备进行通信。
  77. 根据权利要求76所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法，还包括：
    所述用户设备自动向所述基站发送第一随机接入请求，所述第一随机接入请求用于指示所述基站生成上行时间提前TA，并根据分配的第二备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信；或，
    所述用户设备在控制信道上接收所述基站发送的随机接入指令，所述随机接入指令是所述基站利用波束跟踪确定将要使用为所述用户设备分配的所述备选波束与所述用户设备进行通信后发送的，根据所述随机接入指令向所述基站发送第二随机接入请求，所述第二随机接入请求用于指示所述基站生成上行TA，并根据接收到的所述第一备选波束索引信息所对应的备选波束以及所述上行TA与所述用户设备进行通信。
  78. 根据权利要求72至77中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法，还包括：
    所述用户设备接收所述基站发送的TA组，所述TA组是所述基站在与所述用户设备进行通信的波束中，将上行TA相同的波束确定为一个分组，根据每个分组生成的，所述TA组包括TA组标识、所述分组中各个波束的波束索引信息、所述分组中各个波束所对应的小区标识和时间调整定时器TAT，所述波束包括所述初始波束和所述备选波束中的至少一种；
    若所述TA组中的TAT超时，则所述用户设备检测所述TA组中的所述小区标识是否对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT未超时；
    若检测出所述TA组中的所述小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT未超时，则所述用户设备确定所述波束索引信息所对应的小区，维护所述小区所对应的混合自动重传请求HARQ缓冲区和探测参考信号SRS资源；
    若检测出所述TA组中的所述小区标识对应于位于其它TA组中的波束索引信息且所述其它TA组的TAT超时，则所述用户设备确定所述波束索引信息所对应的小区，释放所述小区所对应的HARQ缓冲区和SRS资源。
  79. 根据权利要求72所述的方法，其特征在于，所述用户设备发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，还包括：
    所述用户设备对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的RSRP进行测 量，得到各个初始波束的路损信息；
    所述用户设备根据最小的路损信息生成功率余量PH，得到功率余量报告PHR；
    所述用户设备发送所述PHR，所述PHR用于指示所述基站根据所述PH和与所述PH对应的初始波束为所述用户设备分配上行资源，通过与所述PH对应的初始波束在对应的上行资源上与所述用户设备进行通信。
  80. 根据权利要求79所述的方法，其特征在于，所述用户设备对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个初始波束的路损信息，包括：
    所述用户设备接收所述基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第一波束的第一波束索引信息的第一指示；
    所述用户设备对所述第一指示所指示的各个第一波束的RSRP进行测量，得到各个第一波束的路损信息。
  81. 根据权利要求72所述的方法，其特征在于，所述用户设备发送无线资源管理RRM测量报告之后，还包括：
    所述用户设备对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束进行信道状态指示CSI测量，得到各个初始波束的信道质量指示CQI；
    所述用户设备根据最高的CQI生成信道状态指示CSI信息，得到CSI测量报告；
    所述用户设备发送所述CSI测量报告，所述CSI测量报告用于指示所述基站根据所述CSI信息和与所述CSI信息对应的初始波束与所述用户设备进行通信。
  82. 根据权利要求81所述的方法，其特征在于，所述用户设备对各个初始波束索引信息所对应的初始波束进行信道状态指示CSI测量，得到各个初始波束的信道质量指示CQI，包括：
    所述用户设备接收所述基站发送的携带有单个初始波束的波束范围内的第二波束的第二波束索引信息的第二指示；
    所述用户设备对所述第二指示所指示的各个第二波束进行CSI测量，得到 各个第二波束的CQI。
  83. 根据权利要求72所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法，还包括：
    所述用户设备通过广播接收所述基站发送的调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息，或，接收所述基站发送的RRC信令，所述RRC信令中携带有调整后的小区带宽的信息和中心频点的信息；所述调整后的小区带宽是所述基站根据用户设备的业务量调整的，且所述小区带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系，所述中心频点是所述调整后的小区带宽对应的频率范围的中心频率或所述频率范围内的指定频率；
    若所述调整后的小区由带宽相同的信道组成，则所述用户设备在位于所述中心频点的信道上接收所述基站发送的公共信息，或，在每个信道的中心频率上接收所述基站发送的发送公共信息。
  84. 根据权利要求72所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法，还包括：
    所述用户设备通过RRC信令、MAC CE和控制信道中的至少一种接收所述基站发送的调整后的用户带宽的信息，所述调整后的用户带宽是所述基站根据所述用户设备的业务量调整的，且所述用户带宽与所述业务量呈正相关关系；
    所述用户设备对组成所述用户带宽的信道的控制信道进行监听。
PCT/CN2014/087193 2014-09-23 2014-09-23 波束配置方法、基站及用户设备 WO2016044994A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (5)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201480035926.2A CN105830483B (zh) 2014-09-23 2014-09-23 波束配置方法、基站及用户设备
PCT/CN2014/087193 WO2016044994A1 (zh) 2014-09-23 2014-09-23 波束配置方法、基站及用户设备
EP14902628.8A EP3200498B1 (en) 2014-09-23 2014-09-23 Beam configuration method and user equipment
JP2017515797A JP6406777B2 (ja) 2014-09-23 2014-09-23 ビーム構成方法、基地局、およびユーザ機器
US15/466,546 US10264568B2 (en) 2014-09-23 2017-03-22 Beam configuration method, base station, and user equipment

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2014/087193 WO2016044994A1 (zh) 2014-09-23 2014-09-23 波束配置方法、基站及用户设备

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US15/466,546 Continuation US10264568B2 (en) 2014-09-23 2017-03-22 Beam configuration method, base station, and user equipment

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2016044994A1 true WO2016044994A1 (zh) 2016-03-31

Family

ID=55580043

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2014/087193 WO2016044994A1 (zh) 2014-09-23 2014-09-23 波束配置方法、基站及用户设备

Country Status (5)

Country Link
US (1) US10264568B2 (zh)
EP (1) EP3200498B1 (zh)
JP (1) JP6406777B2 (zh)
CN (1) CN105830483B (zh)
WO (1) WO2016044994A1 (zh)

Cited By (45)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2018026223A1 (ko) * 2016-08-03 2018-02-08 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 단말에 의해 수행되는 파워 헤드룸 보고 방법 및 상기 방법을 이용하는 단말
WO2018031908A1 (en) * 2016-08-11 2018-02-15 Convida Wireless, Llc Beam management
JP2018029333A (ja) * 2016-07-28 2018-02-22 華碩電腦股▲ふん▼有限公司 無線通信システムにおいてｕｅビームフォーミングを扱うための方法及び装置
WO2018060928A1 (en) * 2016-09-30 2018-04-05 Nokia Technologies Oy Determining, by an access node, association between refinement beam index (bi) and logical bi
WO2018128469A1 (en) * 2017-01-05 2018-07-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving data in wireless communication system
CN108282863A (zh) * 2017-01-05 2018-07-13 华为技术有限公司 一种上行测量信号的指示方法及装置
CN108288980A (zh) * 2017-01-06 2018-07-17 华硕电脑股份有限公司 用于无线通信系统中波束管理的方法和设备
WO2018143391A1 (ja) * 2017-02-03 2018-08-09 株式会社Ｎｔｔドコモ ユーザ端末及び無線通信方法
WO2018169848A1 (en) * 2017-03-14 2018-09-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques and apparatuses for beam management
WO2018171426A1 (zh) * 2017-03-23 2018-09-27 株式会社Ntt都科摩 波束配置方法、移动台和基站
WO2018172854A1 (en) * 2017-03-23 2018-09-27 Alcatel Lucent Communication method, terminal device and network device
CN108810964A (zh) * 2017-05-05 2018-11-13 华为技术有限公司 功率余量的上报方法和装置
US20180368009A1 (en) * 2017-06-16 2018-12-20 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. System and Method for Triggering Beam Recovery
CN109121201A (zh) * 2017-06-23 2019-01-01 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 用户设备、基站以及信息通知的方法
CN109155659A (zh) * 2016-05-11 2019-01-04 Idac控股公司 用于波束成形的上行链路传输的系统和方法
US10181891B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2019-01-15 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
CN109246743A (zh) * 2017-04-28 2019-01-18 华为技术有限公司 一种波束管理方法及终端设备、网络设备
WO2019028716A1 (en) * 2017-08-10 2019-02-14 Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America TERMINAL AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATION
KR20190018526A (ko) * 2016-08-03 2019-02-22 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 단말에 의해 수행되는 상향링크 통신 수행 방법 및 상기 방법을 이용하는 단말
CN109391297A (zh) * 2017-08-04 2019-02-26 财团法人工业技术研究院 多重波束无线通信系统的波束指示方法及其电子装置
TWI655850B (zh) * 2017-03-30 2019-04-01 財團法人工業技術研究院 束波測量和回報的方法及使用所述方法的基站與用戶設備
US10306597B2 (en) * 2015-07-21 2019-05-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for beam-level radio resource management and mobility in cellular network
CN109842914A (zh) * 2017-09-22 2019-06-04 珠海市魅族科技有限公司 一种切换覆盖波束的方法和切换覆盖波束的装置
US10383067B2 (en) 2016-10-21 2019-08-13 Asustek Computer Inc. Method and apparatus for power headroom report for beam operation in a wireless communication system
CN110192415A (zh) * 2017-01-05 2019-08-30 三星电子株式会社 节电状态下用于终端标识和针对终端的寻呼信号传输的方法、装置和系统
US10425138B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2019-09-24 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
JP2019534644A (ja) * 2016-11-04 2019-11-28 テレフオンアクチーボラゲット エルエム エリクソン（パブル） セル識別情報
US10498406B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2019-12-03 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
JP2019536349A (ja) * 2016-11-04 2019-12-12 エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド 無線通信システムにおける下向きリンクチャネルを受信する方法及びこのための装置
CN110583090A (zh) * 2017-05-05 2019-12-17 高通股份有限公司 对于用于切换的无竞争的和基于竞争的随机接入的ue选择
US10541741B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2020-01-21 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
CN111034064A (zh) * 2017-08-10 2020-04-17 华为技术有限公司 具有波束选择技术的协同侧链干扰管理
US10651899B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2020-05-12 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
CN111316573A (zh) * 2017-11-10 2020-06-19 苹果公司 Ue波束管理：用于通信开销和ue移动性权衡的周期性和基于事件的组合型报告方法
CN111510981A (zh) * 2016-08-10 2020-08-07 中兴通讯股份有限公司 无线链路管理方法及装置
TWI717570B (zh) * 2016-11-08 2021-02-01 華碩電腦股份有限公司 在無線通訊系統中觸發功率餘量回報用於波束運作之方法與設備
US10917158B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2021-02-09 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
US11012878B2 (en) 2017-03-30 2021-05-18 Industrial Technology Research Institute Beam measuring and reporting method and base station and user equipment using the same
US11075725B2 (en) 2016-04-13 2021-07-27 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam adjustment request
US11075682B2 (en) 2016-04-13 2021-07-27 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam management
US20210392597A1 (en) * 2019-02-23 2021-12-16 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Timing advance update method, terminal, and base station
JP2022031781A (ja) * 2016-09-29 2022-02-22 華為技術有限公司 無線リソース測定方法、無線リソース選択方法および装置
US11546845B2 (en) 2017-01-05 2023-01-03 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Method, apparatus, and system for terminal identification and paging signal transmission for terminal in power saving state
US11736989B2 (en) 2017-04-01 2023-08-22 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Random access method, network node and user equipment
US12003993B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2024-06-04 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Radio resource measurement method, radio resource selection method, and apparatus

Families Citing this family (95)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP5989798B2 (ja) * 2011-12-08 2016-09-07 インターデイジタル パテント ホールディングス インコーポレイテッド ミリ波通信システムの方法および装置
GB2532067A (en) * 2014-11-07 2016-05-11 Nec Corp Communication system
WO2017022870A1 (en) * 2015-08-03 2017-02-09 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for initial access in wireless communication system
WO2017034607A1 (en) * 2015-08-27 2017-03-02 Intel IP Corporation Inter-beam mobility control in mimo communication systems
US10219270B2 (en) * 2015-09-04 2019-02-26 Qualcomm Incorporated Enabling operation of variable bandwidth users in millimeter-wave systems
CN111030743B (zh) * 2015-09-11 2023-08-11 苹果公司 5g系统中用于初始获取的参考信号
US10700752B2 (en) * 2016-01-14 2020-06-30 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. System, method, and apparatus of beam-tracking and beam feedback operation in a beam-forming based system
US10750483B2 (en) * 2016-02-25 2020-08-18 Apple Inc. System and method for beam information and CSI report
US10141986B2 (en) * 2016-04-14 2018-11-27 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving signal through beamforming in communication system
EP3465936A1 (en) * 2016-05-27 2019-04-10 Telefonaktiebolaget LM Ericsson (PUBL) Reference signal tracking in a wireless communication system
EP3484062A4 (en) * 2016-07-06 2019-07-03 Sony Corporation BASE STATION, DEVICE DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD AND RECORDING MEDIUM
JP6769160B2 (ja) * 2016-07-29 2020-10-14 ソニー株式会社 端末装置、基地局、方法及び記録媒体
CN107950069B (zh) 2016-08-12 2022-11-22 联发科技（新加坡）私人有限公司 支持rrm测量的方法、用户设备以及存储器
CN107888244B (zh) * 2016-09-30 2021-08-20 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种无线通信系统中实现用户面功能增强的方法和装置
CN107888240B (zh) * 2016-09-30 2022-07-19 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种波束扫描和切换的方法及装置
JP6720408B2 (ja) * 2016-10-07 2020-07-08 テレフオンアクチーボラゲット エルエム エリクソン（パブル） ワイヤレス通信ネットワークで動作する通信デバイス向けのビームカバレッジの提供に関する方法及び装置
US11395169B2 (en) 2016-10-13 2022-07-19 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Measurement reporting method and related device
US11265880B2 (en) * 2016-11-03 2022-03-01 Qualcomm Incorporated Beam sets for cell and beam mobility
KR102449472B1 (ko) * 2016-11-03 2022-10-11 삼성전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 단말 간 간섭 관리 방법 및 장치
CN108024325B (zh) * 2016-11-03 2020-04-03 华为技术有限公司 无线通信方法和装置
KR102519326B1 (ko) * 2016-12-16 2023-04-07 삼성전자주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 채널 측정 방법 및 장치
US10681727B2 (en) 2016-12-19 2020-06-09 Qualcomm Incorporated Uplink transmission parameter selection during random access message transmission and retransmission
CN108271175B (zh) * 2017-01-03 2023-06-02 华为技术有限公司 功率控制方法和通信设备
US20180198665A1 (en) * 2017-01-06 2018-07-12 Asustek Computer Inc. Method and apparatus for handling ul timing asynchronism in a wireless communication system
US10567058B2 (en) 2017-02-08 2020-02-18 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for beam management
CN113452497A (zh) * 2017-03-16 2021-09-28 上海朗帛通信技术有限公司 一种被用于多天线传输的用户设备、基站中的方法和装置
EP3606257B1 (en) * 2017-03-22 2021-10-06 LG Electronics Inc. Method and user equipment for executing beam recovery
CN110463260B (zh) * 2017-03-23 2022-03-08 康维达无线有限责任公司 新无线电中的下行链路测量设计
WO2018185662A1 (en) * 2017-04-03 2018-10-11 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Method of limiting needed beam measurement in cell re-selection
US11223967B2 (en) * 2017-04-18 2022-01-11 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques to provide energy efficient radio resource management
WO2018205436A1 (zh) * 2017-05-10 2018-11-15 华为技术有限公司 波束管理的方法、网络设备及终端
JP6984667B2 (ja) 2017-06-14 2021-12-22 富士通株式会社 ビーム失敗回復要求の伝送リソース設定装置、ビーム失敗回復要求の応答装置、方法及び通信システム
EP3639431A4 (en) * 2017-06-16 2021-01-13 Motorola Mobility LLC TRANSMISSION OF SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL BLOCKS
US10462755B2 (en) 2017-06-16 2019-10-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques and apparatuses for power headroom reporting in new radio
CN110800338B (zh) * 2017-06-27 2021-11-30 瑞典爱立信有限公司 用于nr中基于网络控制波束的切换的无线通信设备及方法
WO2019009454A1 (ko) * 2017-07-07 2019-01-10 엘지전자 주식회사 무선통신시스템에서 상향링크 자원과 사이드링크 자원을 공유하여 단말 간 통신을 수행하는 방법 및 장치
WO2019013485A1 (en) 2017-07-10 2019-01-17 Lg Electronics Inc. METHOD OF TRANSMITTING POWER MARGIN RATIO IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AND DEVICE THEREFOR
KR102298454B1 (ko) * 2017-07-18 2021-09-06 삼성전자 주식회사 차세대 이동 통신 시스템에서 효율적으로 데이터를 분할하는 방법 및 장치
US11330457B2 (en) * 2017-07-25 2022-05-10 Mediatek Inc. Method for beam management with beam indication in wireless communication systems with beamforming
US10736166B2 (en) * 2017-08-04 2020-08-04 Qualcomm Incorporated Assisted node-to-node communication link operations in a wireless network
US11582702B2 (en) * 2017-08-04 2023-02-14 Ntt Docomo, Inc. User equipment and base station apparatus
US10659274B2 (en) * 2017-08-09 2020-05-19 Lenovo (Singapore) Pte. Ltd. Determining transmit power during a random access procedure based on downlink transmit antenna port parameters
US10887939B2 (en) 2017-08-10 2021-01-05 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Transmission power control for beam failure recovery requests
US10855359B2 (en) 2017-08-10 2020-12-01 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Priority of beam failure recovery request and uplink channels
US10834625B2 (en) * 2017-08-10 2020-11-10 Qualcomm Incorporated Carrier aggregation capability signaling
US11950287B2 (en) 2017-08-10 2024-04-02 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Resource configuration of beam failure recovery request transmission
US11337265B2 (en) 2017-08-10 2022-05-17 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Beam failure recovery request transmission
CN109429317B (zh) * 2017-08-30 2022-03-11 珠海市魅族科技有限公司 无线网络的通信方法和无线网络的通信装置
WO2019042560A1 (en) * 2017-08-31 2019-03-07 Nokia Technologies Oy METHOD FOR OPERATING A NETWORK ENTITY FOR A CELLULAR RADIO COMMUNICATION NETWORK AND NETWORK ENTITY FOR A CELLULAR RADIO COMMUNICATION NETWORK
US11277301B2 (en) 2017-09-07 2022-03-15 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Unified downlink control information for beam management
CN111096023B (zh) * 2017-09-11 2023-08-01 苹果公司 用于参考信号的配置的方法和装置
US10312988B2 (en) 2017-09-15 2019-06-04 At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. Two reference signal beam reporting and identification
ES2790275T3 (es) * 2017-09-20 2020-10-27 Asustek Comp Inc Procedimiento y aparato para la detección de haces en un sistema de comunicaciones inalámbricas
US11611468B2 (en) 2017-09-28 2023-03-21 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Beam management with DRX configuration
US20190103908A1 (en) * 2017-10-02 2019-04-04 Mediatek Inc. Method for Uplink Beam Indication for Wireless Communication System with Beamforming
CN111201723A (zh) * 2017-10-10 2020-05-26 瑞典爱立信有限公司 无线电收发机设备的波束管理
US11160030B2 (en) * 2017-11-03 2021-10-26 Qualcomm Incorporated Power control in directional beam environments
CN117353886A (zh) 2017-11-15 2024-01-05 交互数字专利控股公司 5g nr中的功率余量报告
CA3024596A1 (en) 2017-11-16 2019-05-16 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Beam paging assistance
CN111490863B (zh) * 2017-11-16 2021-05-11 华为技术有限公司 一种测量配置方法和网络设备以及终端设备
US11202272B2 (en) * 2017-11-17 2021-12-14 Qualcomm Incorporated Beam-specific timing advance groups
US10863570B2 (en) 2018-01-09 2020-12-08 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Beam selection in beam failure recovery request retransmission
EP3525516B1 (en) 2018-02-09 2022-08-31 Comcast Cable Communications, LLC Beam failure recovery procedure in carrier aggregation
US11419066B2 (en) 2018-02-15 2022-08-16 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Beam failure report
CN110177397B (zh) * 2018-02-17 2023-09-22 迪朵无线创新有限公司 一种被用于无线通信的用户设备、基站中的方法和装置
US11737072B2 (en) * 2018-03-20 2023-08-22 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for determining transmission beam in wireless communication system supporting sidelink, and terminal therefor
CN111903101B (zh) * 2018-03-29 2024-03-08 中兴通讯股份有限公司 无线通信中的信道状态信息报告
CA3038605A1 (en) 2018-03-30 2019-09-30 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Configuration for beam failure recovery
US11039350B2 (en) 2018-04-02 2021-06-15 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Beam failure recovery
IL278029B2 (en) * 2018-04-18 2024-02-01 Ntt Docomo Inc User terminal unit and radio communication method
US11095355B2 (en) 2018-05-10 2021-08-17 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Prioritization in beam failure recovery procedures
US11089622B2 (en) * 2018-05-29 2021-08-10 Qualcomm Incorporated Supporting scheduling plan indications
US10925116B2 (en) * 2018-06-26 2021-02-16 Apple Inc. Beam indication for semi-persistent and grant-free transmissions
US11711807B2 (en) 2018-07-09 2023-07-25 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Multi-level indicator of radio resource status for intended D2D transmission
US11012137B2 (en) 2018-08-09 2021-05-18 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Resource management for beam failure recovery procedures
EP3837866B1 (en) 2018-08-14 2023-09-27 Nokia Technologies Oy Method of multicast data delivery in 5g supporting cloud architecture
CN110859011A (zh) * 2018-08-25 2020-03-03 华为技术有限公司 一种通信方法及相关设备
CN110913477B (zh) * 2018-09-14 2023-01-06 成都华为技术有限公司 管理资源的方法和通信装置
CN115696607A (zh) * 2018-09-17 2023-02-03 华为技术有限公司 数据通信的方法和装置
CA3056500A1 (en) 2018-09-24 2020-03-24 Comcast Cable Communications, Llc Beam failure recovery procedures
US10779251B2 (en) * 2018-09-25 2020-09-15 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Timing advance in new radio
EP3629492A1 (en) 2018-09-25 2020-04-01 Comcast Cable Communications LLC Beam configuration for secondary cells
CN111294850B (zh) * 2019-01-11 2021-10-08 北京紫光展锐通信技术有限公司 测量上报方法及装置、终端设备信息获取方法及装置
WO2020188144A1 (en) * 2019-03-15 2020-09-24 Nokia Technologies Oy Timing advance validation and adjustment
US11729842B2 (en) * 2019-05-14 2023-08-15 Qualcomm Incorporated Systems and methods for coordinating user equipment (UE) direct communication in a communication system
CN112543443A (zh) * 2019-09-20 2021-03-23 华为技术有限公司 通信方法和通信装置
EP3799518A1 (en) * 2019-09-27 2021-03-31 Apple Inc. Secondary cell link recovery request transmission
CN112584443A (zh) * 2019-09-27 2021-03-30 苹果公司 辅助小区链路恢复请求传输
US11831383B2 (en) 2020-01-27 2023-11-28 Qualcomm Incorporated Beam failure recovery assistance in upper band millimeter wave wireless communications
US11856570B2 (en) * 2020-01-27 2023-12-26 Qualcomm Incorporated Dynamic mixed mode beam correspondence in upper millimeter wave bands
US20210234597A1 (en) * 2020-01-27 2021-07-29 Qualcomm Incorporated Asymmetric uplink-downlink beam training in frequency bands
US11711833B2 (en) * 2020-06-29 2023-07-25 Qualcomm Incorporated Beams for semi-persistent scheduling
CN113923732B (zh) * 2020-07-09 2024-03-26 展讯半导体(南京)有限公司 Rrm测量方法及装置、存储介质、ue、基站
EP3979766A1 (en) * 2020-10-02 2022-04-06 Nokia Technologies Oy Method for beam management
CN112533296B (zh) * 2020-12-09 2024-02-02 中国联合网络通信集团有限公司 基于波束的通信处理方法、装置、设备和存储介质

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2013089495A1 (en) * 2011-12-16 2013-06-20 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Methods and apparatus to enhance reliability in millimeter wave wideband communications
WO2014036150A1 (en) * 2012-08-28 2014-03-06 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Method for handover of a communication link using a primary beam
US20140349693A1 (en) * 2013-05-21 2014-11-27 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Method of providing millimeter wave band-based communication connection service

Family Cites Families (16)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2011517392A (ja) * 2008-03-11 2011-06-02 エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド ビームトラッキングプロセスを実行するための装置及びその方法
CN102318425B (zh) 2008-04-02 2014-08-13 Lg电子株式会社 分配信道时间的方法、确定兼容链路的方法和处理数据的装置
KR101410607B1 (ko) * 2008-05-09 2014-06-20 애플 인크. 셀룰러 네트워크에서의 안테나 빔 형성을 지원하기 위한 시스템 및 방법
US8469856B2 (en) * 2008-08-26 2013-06-25 Fallbrook Intellectual Property Company Llc Continuously variable transmission
US9014025B2 (en) * 2010-10-04 2015-04-21 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. System and method for coordinating different types of base stations in a heterogeneous communications system
US20130006562A1 (en) * 2011-06-30 2013-01-03 Cccomplete, Inc. Quality assurance system for elections
KR101884332B1 (ko) * 2011-09-14 2018-08-01 삼성전자주식회사 무선통신 시스템에서 가상 셀 형성 방법 및 장치
JP5989798B2 (ja) * 2011-12-08 2016-09-07 インターデイジタル パテント ホールディングス インコーポレイテッド ミリ波通信システムの方法および装置
CN103686781B (zh) * 2012-09-17 2018-07-17 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Csi-rsrp测量周期的配置方法及终端
EP2949055A1 (en) * 2013-01-25 2015-12-02 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Methods and apparatus for vertical beamforming
WO2014117352A1 (en) * 2013-01-31 2014-08-07 Qualcomm Incorporated 3d mimo csi feedback based on virtual elevation ports
GB201303521D0 (en) * 2013-02-27 2013-04-10 Bio Sep Ltd Process operations for biomass fractionation
KR20150134328A (ko) * 2013-03-25 2015-12-01 엘지전자 주식회사 하향링크 무선 신호를 수신하기 위한 방법 및 이를 위한 장치
US20160000654A1 (en) * 2014-07-07 2016-01-07 Cadila Healthcare Limited Method for determining formulation orientation of asymmetric multi-layered osmotic tablets
KR102345352B1 (ko) * 2014-08-24 2021-12-30 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 빔포밍을 위한 가중치 결정 방법 및 이를 위한 장치
WO2017020038A1 (en) * 2015-07-30 2017-02-02 Sinclair Jr Daniel S Method and apparatus for mixing a smoking product

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2013089495A1 (en) * 2011-12-16 2013-06-20 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Methods and apparatus to enhance reliability in millimeter wave wideband communications
WO2014036150A1 (en) * 2012-08-28 2014-03-06 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Method for handover of a communication link using a primary beam
US20140349693A1 (en) * 2013-05-21 2014-11-27 Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute Method of providing millimeter wave band-based communication connection service

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
See also references of EP3200498A4 *

Cited By (99)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10306597B2 (en) * 2015-07-21 2019-05-28 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for beam-level radio resource management and mobility in cellular network
US11075682B2 (en) 2016-04-13 2021-07-27 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam management
US11088747B2 (en) 2016-04-13 2021-08-10 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam management
US11791882B2 (en) 2016-04-13 2023-10-17 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam management
US11075725B2 (en) 2016-04-13 2021-07-27 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam adjustment request
US11381296B2 (en) 2016-04-13 2022-07-05 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam management
US11626919B2 (en) 2016-05-11 2023-04-11 Interdigital Patent Holdings, Inc. Systems and methods for beamformed uplink transmission
US11245456B2 (en) 2016-05-11 2022-02-08 Idac Holdings, Inc. Systems and methods for beamformed uplink transmission
CN109155659B (zh) * 2016-05-11 2022-04-19 Idac控股公司 用于波束成形的上行链路传输的系统和方法
JP7300833B2 (ja) 2016-05-11 2023-06-30 アイディーエーシー ホールディングス インコーポレイテッド ビームフォーミングされたアップリンク送信のためのシステムおよび方法
CN109155659A (zh) * 2016-05-11 2019-01-04 Idac控股公司 用于波束成形的上行链路传输的系统和方法
CN114710189A (zh) * 2016-05-11 2022-07-05 Idac控股公司 用于波束成形的上行链路传输的系统和方法
JP2019521548A (ja) * 2016-05-11 2019-07-25 アイディーエーシー ホールディングス インコーポレイテッド ビームフォーミングされたアップリンク送信のためのシステムおよび方法
US11855737B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2023-12-26 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
US10651899B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2020-05-12 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
US10181891B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2019-01-15 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
US11309941B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2022-04-19 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
US10985828B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2021-04-20 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
US11095358B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2021-08-17 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
US11101869B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2021-08-24 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
US10541741B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2020-01-21 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
US10498406B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2019-12-03 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
US11108441B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2021-08-31 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
US10917158B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2021-02-09 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
US10425138B2 (en) 2016-05-26 2019-09-24 Qualcomm Incorporated System and method for beam switching and reporting
JP2018029333A (ja) * 2016-07-28 2018-02-22 華碩電腦股▲ふん▼有限公司 無線通信システムにおいてｕｅビームフォーミングを扱うための方法及び装置
CN109565854B (zh) * 2016-08-03 2022-06-17 Lg 电子株式会社 在无线通信系统中执行上行链路通信的终端的方法和使用该方法的终端
US10575322B2 (en) 2016-08-03 2020-02-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for terminal for carrying out uplink communication in wireless communication system, and terminal using method
KR102163673B1 (ko) 2016-08-03 2020-10-08 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 단말에 의해 수행되는 상향링크 통신 수행 방법 및 상기 방법을 이용하는 단말
WO2018026223A1 (ko) * 2016-08-03 2018-02-08 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 단말에 의해 수행되는 파워 헤드룸 보고 방법 및 상기 방법을 이용하는 단말
US11229040B2 (en) 2016-08-03 2022-01-18 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for terminal for carrying out uplink communication in wireless communication system, and terminal using method
US10772049B2 (en) 2016-08-03 2020-09-08 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for terminal for reporting power headroom in wireless communication system, and terminal utilizing method
US11533743B2 (en) 2016-08-03 2022-12-20 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for terminal for carrying out uplink communication in wireless communication system, and terminal using method
CN109565854A (zh) * 2016-08-03 2019-04-02 Lg 电子株式会社 在无线通信系统中执行上行链路通信的终端的方法和使用该方法的终端
EP3496494A4 (en) * 2016-08-03 2020-01-15 LG Electronics Inc. -1- METHOD FOR A TERMINAL TO PERFORM UPLINK COMMUNICATION IN A WIRELESS COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, AND TERMINAL USING THE METHOD
KR20190018526A (ko) * 2016-08-03 2019-02-22 엘지전자 주식회사 무선 통신 시스템에서 단말에 의해 수행되는 상향링크 통신 수행 방법 및 상기 방법을 이용하는 단말
US10959149B2 (en) 2016-08-10 2021-03-23 Zte Corporation Method and apparatus for managing radio link
CN111510981B (zh) * 2016-08-10 2021-10-22 中兴通讯股份有限公司 无线链路管理方法及装置
CN111510981A (zh) * 2016-08-10 2020-08-07 中兴通讯股份有限公司 无线链路管理方法及装置
WO2018031908A1 (en) * 2016-08-11 2018-02-15 Convida Wireless, Llc Beam management
CN109792283B (zh) * 2016-08-11 2022-06-14 康维达无线有限责任公司 波束管理
CN109792283A (zh) * 2016-08-11 2019-05-21 康维达无线有限责任公司 波束管理
US10932150B2 (en) 2016-08-11 2021-02-23 Convida Wireless, Llc Beam management
US12003993B2 (en) 2016-09-29 2024-06-04 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Radio resource measurement method, radio resource selection method, and apparatus
JP2022031781A (ja) * 2016-09-29 2022-02-22 華為技術有限公司 無線リソース測定方法、無線リソース選択方法および装置
WO2018060928A1 (en) * 2016-09-30 2018-04-05 Nokia Technologies Oy Determining, by an access node, association between refinement beam index (bi) and logical bi
CN109937540B (zh) * 2016-09-30 2022-04-08 诺基亚技术有限公司 由接入节点确定精细波束索引(bl)与逻辑bl之间的关联
US11152996B2 (en) 2016-09-30 2021-10-19 Nokia Technologies Oy Refinement beam index beam identifier association
CN109937540A (zh) * 2016-09-30 2019-06-25 诺基亚技术有限公司 由接入节点确定精细波束索引(bl)与逻辑bl之间的关联
TWI707594B (zh) * 2016-10-21 2020-10-11 華碩電腦股份有限公司 無線通訊系統中波束運作之功率餘量回報之方法及設備
US10383067B2 (en) 2016-10-21 2019-08-13 Asustek Computer Inc. Method and apparatus for power headroom report for beam operation in a wireless communication system
US10778386B2 (en) 2016-11-04 2020-09-15 Lg Electronics Inc. Method for downlink channel reception in wireless communication system and device therefor
US10904931B2 (en) 2016-11-04 2021-01-26 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Cell identification information
JP2019534644A (ja) * 2016-11-04 2019-11-28 テレフオンアクチーボラゲット エルエム エリクソン（パブル） セル識別情報
JP2019536349A (ja) * 2016-11-04 2019-12-12 エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド 無線通信システムにおける下向きリンクチャネルを受信する方法及びこのための装置
TWI717570B (zh) * 2016-11-08 2021-02-01 華碩電腦股份有限公司 在無線通訊系統中觸發功率餘量回報用於波束運作之方法與設備
US10993192B2 (en) 2016-11-08 2021-04-27 Asustek Computer Inc. Method and apparatus for triggering power headroom report for beam operation in a wireless communication system
US11546845B2 (en) 2017-01-05 2023-01-03 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd Method, apparatus, and system for terminal identification and paging signal transmission for terminal in power saving state
US10791562B2 (en) 2017-01-05 2020-09-29 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving data in wireless communication system
WO2018128469A1 (en) * 2017-01-05 2018-07-12 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for transmitting and receiving data in wireless communication system
CN110192415B (zh) * 2017-01-05 2022-11-18 三星电子株式会社 节电状态下用于终端标识和针对终端的寻呼信号传输的方法、装置和系统
CN108282863A (zh) * 2017-01-05 2018-07-13 华为技术有限公司 一种上行测量信号的指示方法及装置
CN110192415A (zh) * 2017-01-05 2019-08-30 三星电子株式会社 节电状态下用于终端标识和针对终端的寻呼信号传输的方法、装置和系统
CN108288980A (zh) * 2017-01-06 2018-07-17 华硕电脑股份有限公司 用于无线通信系统中波束管理的方法和设备
CN110476450B (zh) * 2017-02-03 2023-04-11 株式会社Ntt都科摩 用户终端以及无线通信方法
JPWO2018143391A1 (ja) * 2017-02-03 2019-12-19 株式会社Ｎｔｔドコモ ユーザ端末及び無線通信方法
CN110476450A (zh) * 2017-02-03 2019-11-19 株式会社Ntt都科摩 用户终端以及无线通信方法
WO2018143391A1 (ja) * 2017-02-03 2018-08-09 株式会社Ｎｔｔドコモ ユーザ端末及び無線通信方法
JP7197371B2 (ja) 2017-02-03 2022-12-27 株式会社Ｎｔｔドコモ 端末、無線通信方法、基地局及びシステム
WO2018169848A1 (en) * 2017-03-14 2018-09-20 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques and apparatuses for beam management
US10666347B2 (en) 2017-03-14 2020-05-26 Qualcomm Incorporated Techniques and apparatuses for beam management
CN108632876A (zh) * 2017-03-23 2018-10-09 上海诺基亚贝尔股份有限公司 通信方法、终端设备和网络设备
WO2018171426A1 (zh) * 2017-03-23 2018-09-27 株式会社Ntt都科摩 波束配置方法、移动台和基站
US11218202B2 (en) 2017-03-23 2022-01-04 Ntt Docomo, Inc. Beam configuration method, a mobile station and a base station
WO2018172854A1 (en) * 2017-03-23 2018-09-27 Alcatel Lucent Communication method, terminal device and network device
TWI655850B (zh) * 2017-03-30 2019-04-01 財團法人工業技術研究院 束波測量和回報的方法及使用所述方法的基站與用戶設備
US11012878B2 (en) 2017-03-30 2021-05-18 Industrial Technology Research Institute Beam measuring and reporting method and base station and user equipment using the same
US11736989B2 (en) 2017-04-01 2023-08-22 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Random access method, network node and user equipment
US11303343B2 (en) 2017-04-28 2022-04-12 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Method, terminal device, and network device for beam failure management and beam recovery
CN109246743A (zh) * 2017-04-28 2019-01-18 华为技术有限公司 一种波束管理方法及终端设备、网络设备
CN110583090B (zh) * 2017-05-05 2023-06-13 高通股份有限公司 对于用于切换的无竞争的和基于竞争的随机接入的ue选择
CN108810964A (zh) * 2017-05-05 2018-11-13 华为技术有限公司 功率余量的上报方法和装置
EP3614750A4 (en) * 2017-05-05 2020-04-29 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. METHOD AND DEVICE FOR REPORTING POWER RESERVES
CN108810964B (zh) * 2017-05-05 2023-08-22 华为技术有限公司 功率余量的上报方法和装置
CN110583090A (zh) * 2017-05-05 2019-12-17 高通股份有限公司 对于用于切换的无竞争的和基于竞争的随机接入的ue选择
US20180368009A1 (en) * 2017-06-16 2018-12-20 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. System and Method for Triggering Beam Recovery
CN109121201A (zh) * 2017-06-23 2019-01-01 北京三星通信技术研究有限公司 用户设备、基站以及信息通知的方法
CN109391297A (zh) * 2017-08-04 2019-02-26 财团法人工业技术研究院 多重波束无线通信系统的波束指示方法及其电子装置
US10820323B2 (en) 2017-08-04 2020-10-27 Industrial Technology Research Institute Beam indication method for multibeam wireless communication system and electronic device using the same
CN110999102A (zh) * 2017-08-10 2020-04-10 松下电器（美国）知识产权公司 终端和通信方法
CN111034064A (zh) * 2017-08-10 2020-04-17 华为技术有限公司 具有波束选择技术的协同侧链干扰管理
WO2019028716A1 (en) * 2017-08-10 2019-02-14 Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America TERMINAL AND METHOD OF COMMUNICATION
CN111034064B (zh) * 2017-08-10 2021-12-31 华为技术有限公司 具有波束选择技术的协同侧链干扰管理
US10980031B2 (en) 2017-08-10 2021-04-13 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Collaborative sidelink interference management with beam selection technique
CN109842914A (zh) * 2017-09-22 2019-06-04 珠海市魅族科技有限公司 一种切换覆盖波束的方法和切换覆盖波束的装置
CN111316573A (zh) * 2017-11-10 2020-06-19 苹果公司 Ue波束管理：用于通信开销和ue移动性权衡的周期性和基于事件的组合型报告方法
US20210392597A1 (en) * 2019-02-23 2021-12-16 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Timing advance update method, terminal, and base station
CN114900882A (zh) * 2019-02-23 2022-08-12 华为技术有限公司 一种更新定时提前的方法、终端及网络设备
US11968640B2 (en) * 2019-02-23 2024-04-23 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Timing advance update method, terminal, and base station

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
EP3200498A4 (en) 2017-08-02
US10264568B2 (en) 2019-04-16
EP3200498B1 (en) 2020-01-22
JP6406777B2 (ja) 2018-10-17
JP2017532881A (ja) 2017-11-02
CN105830483B (zh) 2021-01-29
CN105830483A (zh) 2016-08-03
EP3200498A1 (en) 2017-08-02
US20170195998A1 (en) 2017-07-06

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2016044994A1 (zh) 波束配置方法、基站及用户设备
US20230344584A1 (en) Secondary cell activation method, access network device, and communications apparatus and system
CA3049490C (en) Signal transmission method and apparatus
US20210392626A1 (en) Beam refinement for in-active state data transmission
US20180332520A1 (en) Methods, devices, and systems for beam refinement during handover
US9794950B2 (en) Method and apparatus for allocating resources for D2D communication
WO2019020035A1 (zh) 一种选择波束的方法及设备
EP3280068A1 (en) Method for transmitting information, base station, and user equipment
KR20190008907A (ko) 고주파 버스트 전송을 포함하는 셀룰러 네트워크 작동 방법
TW201902156A (zh) 涉及無線通信網絡中的通道狀態資訊報告的方法和裝置
US20180220317A1 (en) Radio Network Nodes, Wireless Device, and Methods Performed Therein for Communicating in a Wireless Communication Network
US11877167B2 (en) Measurement management method and terminal device
US10863365B2 (en) Radio network node, and method performed therein for handling communication in a wireless communication network
WO2014048182A1 (zh) 一种实现小小区为ue服务的方法、装置和系统
US20240089744A1 (en) Communication control method, wireless terminal, base station, and ris device
CN115552959A (zh) 基于空间关系来调适周期性配置
JP7282160B2 (ja) ウェイクアップ信号の反復の適応
KR102612167B1 (ko) 통신 시스템에서 빔 요소 반송파의 전송 우선순위 결정 방법 및 장치
WO2022249821A1 (ja) 通信制御方法、無線端末、及び基地局
WO2024029517A1 (ja) 中継装置
US20230056592A1 (en) User Equipment-Autonomously Triggered-Sounding Reference Signals
WO2017091988A1 (zh) 信息传输方法、基站及通信系统
WO2023156708A1 (en) User equipment reception beam refinement based on measurement of second user equipment
CN115776733A (zh) 无线通信方法和通信装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 14902628

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2017515797

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

REEP Request for entry into the european phase

Ref document number: 2014902628

Country of ref document: EP

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2014902628

Country of ref document: EP